d1

ARI Research Note 86-73

00 COMPUTER-MANAGED INSTRUCTION FOR TANK COMMANDERS

±9K BNCOC MICROTICCIT SITE MANAGER AND OPERATOR'S MANUAL

00

Bonnie L. Walker, Lisa Kupper,

Derrick Walton, and Ray Kirchner 0InterAmerica Research Associates, Inc.

for

I

Contracting Officer's Representative

Donald M. Kristiansen

ARI Field Unit at Fort Knox, Kentucky

Donald F. Haggard, Chief

TRAINING RESEARCH LABORATORY

Harold Wagner, Acting Director

DTIC

S GLECTE 0

U. S. Army

Research Institute for the Behavioral and Social Sciences

June 1986

Approved for public release; distribution unlimited.

86 8 6 019.
U. S. ARMY RESEARCH INSTITUTE

FOR THE BEHAVIORAL AND SOCIAL SCIENCES

A Field Operating Agency under the Jurisdiction of the

Deputy Chief of Staff for Personnel

VIM. DARRYL HENDERSON

EDGAR M. JOHNSON COL, IN

Technical Director Commanding

Peer reviews by:

Billy L. Burnside

Donald M. Kristiansen

This report. as submitted by the contractor, has been cleared for release to Defense Technical Information Center.

(DTICJ to comply with regulatory requirements. It has been given no primary distribution other than to OTIC

and will be available only through DTIC or other reference services such as the National Technical information IService (NTIS). The vicws. opiniens, and/or findings contained in this report are those of the authortsi and

should not be construej as an offices; Cepaimeni of the Army position. policy, or decision. unless so designated by other official documentation.
UNCLASSIFIED

SECURITY CLASSIFICATION OF THIS PAGE (When Data Entered)

READ INSTRUCTIONS REPORT DOCUMENTATION PAGE BEFORE COMPLETING FORM

1. REPORT NUMBER 2. GOVT ACCESSION NO. 3. RECIPIENT'S CATALOG NUMBER

ARI Research Note 86-73 -A V __

4. TITLE (and Subtitle) S. TYPE OF REPORT & PERIOD COVERED

Computer-Managed Instruction for Final Report

Tank Commanders: 19K BNCOC MicroTICCIT September 84-January 86

Site Manager and Operator's Manual s. PERFORMING ORG. REPORT NUMBER

7. AUTHOR(e) 8. CONTRACT OR GRANT NUMBER(&)

Bonnie L. Walker, Lisa Kupper, MDA 903-84-C-0479

Derrick Walton, Ray Kirchner

9. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION NAME AND ADDRESS 10. PROGRAM ELEMENT, PROJECT. TASK

AREA & WORK UNIT NUMBERS

InterAmerica Research Associates, Inc. 2Q263743A794

1555 Wilson Blvd., Suite 700

Rosslyn. Virginia 22209 I. CONTROLLING OFFICE NAME AND ADDRESS 12. REPORT DATE

ARI Field Unit at Fort Knox, Kentucky June 1986

Steele Hall, Fort Knox, KY 40121-5620 NUMBER 34. OFPAGES 342

14. MONITORING AGENCY NAME & ADDRESS(If different from Controlling Office) IS. SECURITY CLASS. (of this report)

U S. Army Research Institute for the Behavioral Unclassified

and Social Sciences, 5001 Eisenhower Avenue,

Alexandria, VA 22333-5600 iS,. DECLASSIFICATION/DOWNGRADING

SCHEDULE

I. DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT (of thl Report)

Approved for public release; distribution unlimited.

17. DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT (of the abstract entered In Block 20, if different from Report)

1. SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES

Donald M. Kristiansen, contracting officer's representative and

technical monitor.

IS. KEY WORDS (Continue on reverse aide If neceeesar and Identify by block number)

Armor Training Computer-Based Instruction

Training Development Computer-Assisted Instruction

Training Technology Computer-Managed Instruction

20 ABSTRACT (C-atu _ -r-r artf it nvge emd Identlify by block number)

'.- The Fort Knox Training Technology Field Activity (TTFA) was established to explore training technologies, and their application to the Army's training

programs. The specific focus of the Ft. Knox TTFA is the improvement of the

effectiveness and efficiency of training provided through the Basic

Noncommissioned Officer's Course (BNCOC) for training Ml tank commanders (MOS 19K). One of the major activities undertaken by the Fort Knox TTFA is the

development of a computer-based instruction system for 19K BNCOC. (over)

DO IFO 1473 EDITION OF I NOV 6 IS OBSOLETE ~iSECURITY SJAEU I3 CLASSIFICATION UNC AI OF THIS FTIF PAGE (Whn Does Entered)
UNCLASSIFIED

SECURITY CLASSIFICATION OF THIS PAGE(Whan Data Entered)

ARI Research Note 86-73

20. Abstract (continued)

The system includes a computer-managed instruction (CMI) system that relates

to the administration and management of the 19K BNCOC course, and computerassisted instruction CAI) which provides task-specific remedial training

necessary for students entering the 19K BNCOC course. This manual serves as a

reference tool and documentation for the 19K BNCOC operators who manage the

CMI system and the CAI components. All of the instructions and documentation

in this manual assume that the user has a MicroTICCIT System II with TICCIT

version 38.17 installed.

4

Accesion For

NrIS CRAW,

DTIC TAB 0

U'annou.-ced

By. .......................

. ...

/,VBy Availabiity Codes

-'oDist Avaii a

UNCLASSIFIED i i SECURITY CLASSIFICATION OF THIS PAGE(WIe.n Data Entered)

% -- l N 41 A -- *
Preface

The Fort Knox Training Technology Field Activity (TTFA), a consortium

within the Department of the Army consisting of representatives from the

Training and Doctrine Command (TRADOC), the United States Army Research

Institute (ARI), and the United States Army Armor Center (USAARMC) has

been established to explore and apply training technologies to the Army's

training programs. The specific focus of the Fort Knox TTFA is the

improvement of the effectiveness and efficiency of training provided through

the Basic Noncommissioned Officer's Course (BNCOC) for training MI tank

commanders (MOS 19K).

One of the major activities undertaken by the Fort Knox TTFA is the

development of a computer-based instruction system for 19K BNCOC. The

system includes a computer-managed instruction (CMI) system that relates to

the administration and management of the 19K BNCOC course, and computerassisted instruction (CAI) which provides task-specific remedial training

necessary for students entering the 19K BNCOC course.

"The 19K MicroTICCIT Site Manager and Operator's Manual," is

intended to serve as a reference tool and documentation for the 19K BNCOC

operators who manage the CMI system and the CAI components. The guide is

included as Appendix B of the Final Report of the Computer-Managed

Instruction for Tank Commanders (Contract Number: MDA 903-84-C-047q)

Appendix A to this report, "The 19K BNCOC MicroTICCIT Tutorial and Reference

Manual for Instructors" is a companion document and is intended to serve as

a reference tool for 19K BNCOC instructors.

Important: All of the instructions and documentation in this

manual assume the user has a MicroTICCIT System I with TICCIT

version 38.17 installed.

S

~iii
Table of Contents

page

Preface i

Introduction vii

TICCIT System Components vii

TICCIT Registration viii

TICCIT Course 0 x

TICCIT Passwords xi

TICCIT Courseware Structure xii

The Permanent Data Areas and Student Performance Data xii

TICCIT Data Collection and Reporting xiii

Roles of TICCIT Users xiv

TICCIT Data Storage xiv

How This Manual is Organized xv

Using This Manual xvi

Suggested References xvi

Part I: Transferring Courseware I-1

1. Transferring Courseware 1-3

2. Dumping Courseware To Tape 1-4

3. Dumping Graphics To Tape 1-6

Part II: Installing 19K for Tank Commanders, Course 19 I-I

I. Installing the 19K BNCOC CMI System 11-3

2. Makecourse Instructions for Course 19 11-4

3. Loading Course 19 Courseware From Tape 11-7

4. Loading Course 19 Graphics From Tape 11-9

5. Batch Processing Courseware for Course 19 11-10

6. Batch Processing Graphics for Course 19 11-l

7. Registering Users in Course 19 11-12

8. Creating A TICCIT Roster File 11-13

9. Contents of Course 19 11-14

10. Contents of 19K BNCOC Unit 1 (Cluster L):

Diagnostic Tests and Remedial Training 11-16

11. Accessing Restricted Tests 11-20

Part III: Installing Course 20, 191 BNCOC CMI System 111-1

List of Figures 111-3

Introduction 111-5

1. Makecourse Instructions for Course 20 111-13

2. Loading Course 20 From Tape 111-16

3. Batch Processing Courseware for Course 20 111-18

4. Processing Graphics for Course 20 111-19

5. Registering Users for Course 20 111-20

6. Contents of Course 20 111-21

7. CMI System Files 111-26

8. Installing the Modified SRDBI (Patch for TICCIT System II) 111-27

V
Table of Contents (con't)

Part IV: Day-to-Day Operations V-I

Role of the TICCIT Operator IV-3

1. Bringing TICCIT "UP" IV-5

2. Shutting Down TICCIT IV-7

3. Backing Up the System IV-8

4. Changing the Proctor Password IV-11

5. User Passwords IV-12

6. Accessing COURSELIST.LS IV-14

7. Set Page for TICCIT Printouts IV-16

Part V: Courseware Management V-i

Managing Courseware V-3

1. Dump Courseware To Tape V-5

2. Dump Graphics To Tape V-7

3. Makecourse Instructions V-10

4. Loading Courseware from Tape V-13

5. Loading Graphics from Tape V-15

6. Batch Processing Courseware V-17

7. Processing Graphics V-18

8. Creating a Roster File V-19

9. Deleting an Entire Course (From the Disk) V-21

10. Deleting Part of a Course (From the Disk) V-23

11. Listing Names of Files on a Tape V-25

Part VI: Data Management VI-1

1. Developer Use of the NOTES Utility VI-3

2. NOTES Instructions to the User V1-4

3. Retrieving and Storing NOTES Data VI-5

4. Collecting Logging Tape Data VI-8

5. Retrieving Logging Tape Data VI-80

6. Using the COLLEGE Utility VI-11

7. PDADUMP VI-12

Part VII: TICCIT Hints VWI-I

1. TICCIT System Specifications and Parameters VII-3

2. The TICCIT System Operator (SYSOP) VII-5

3. Understanding TICCIT Modules VII-6

4. Courseware Modules VII-8

5. The TICCIT Command Line Interpreter (CLI) VII-9

6. The TICCIT Registration Directory VII-10

7. Break Files VII-11

8. Review Graphics VII-12

9. Changing the TICCIT Graphics (Start up, Shutdown displays) VII-13

10. Current Module Directories VII-14

11. Change Module Parameters VII-15

Vi
Table of Contents (cont)

PART VIII: RD08 HINTS VII-I

1. About RDOS and MPOS VIII-3

2. System Prompts VIII-4

3. The TICCIT System II Master Directory (DM0) VIII-5

4. RDOS Commands VIII-6

5. RDOS Files VIII-8

),. 6. Names of I/O Devices (INPUT/OUTPUT) VIII-L0

7. How to Write a Macro File VIII-If

PART IX: Revising 19 BUNCOC MicroTICCIT Course 19 lX-1

Introduction IX-3

1. Adding a Unit IX-7

2. Adding a Lesson IX-10

3. Adding a Segment IX-12

4. Deleting a Unit IX-16

5. Deleting a Lesson IX-19

6. Deleting a Segment IX-21

7. Deleting a Lesson Test IX-24

8. Modifying a Lesson Test 1X-26

9. Modifying a Menu IX-27

PART X: Revising 19K MicroTICCIT Course 20 X-I

List of Figures X-3

Introduction X-5

1. Adding a New Task Cluster X-9

2. Adding a New Task X-18

3. Deleting a Cluster X-22

4. Deleting a Task X-27

5. Using Course 20 With a Course Other Than Course 19 X-31

PART XI: Creating a TICCIT Test XI-1

List of Figures XI-3

Introduction XI-5

1. Test Development Requirements XI-15

2. Creating the APT Test Control (TC) File XI-16

3. Creating the ADAPT Test Explanation (E) File XI-19

4. Creating the ADAPT Test (T) File XI-22

PART XlI: Courseware Documention X11-1

Introduction XII-3

1. Color Palette XII-5

2. Introduction to Test Symbols XII-10

3. Symbols in Course 19 XlI-ll

4. Symbols in Course 20 XII-45

-. : vii
Table of Contents (con't)

PART XIII: Recordkeeping Xlll-1

Introduction XIII-3

1. BNCOC Master Record X1II-5

2. Operations Log XIII-6

3. Courselist.LS XIII-7

4. Registration Directory XIII-8

5. System Directories XIII-9

6. Macro Piles XlII-O

7. Problem Log XlII-11

Glossary G-1

Index I-1

viii
19K BNCOC MicroTICCIT Site Manager and Operator's Manual

Introduction to 19K BNCOC Courseware and Computer

Managed Instruction System on MicroTICCIT

TICCIT Ovstem Components

The main computer for the MicroTCCIT System II is Data General's

Eclipse S/20 microprocessor. The system has a 50 megabyte hard (fixed) disk

for storing programs and data. It also includes a console or terminal (the

Dasher model) which the TICCIT operator uses to communicate with the Data

General (DG) .

RDO, the Data General Operating System

Data General's operating system is RDOS (Real-Time Disk Operating System). A real-time operating system can concurrently monitor and control

multiple events occurring at the same time, e.g., students using the same

courseware at several different workstations.

The RDOS prompt which indicates that it is running and ready to

accept commands is "R.0

Command Line Interpreter (CLI)

The Command Line Interpreter (CLI) is a software interface that allows

the TICCIT operator to communicate with the Data General computer using a

relatively simple set of commands. A TICCIT version of the CLI is available

to operators at the MicroTICCIT terminal.

MicroTICCIT Workstations

A MicroTICCIT workstation consists of an IBM-PC (with one or two

disk drives), a Sony color display screen, a light pen, and a Sony videodisc

player. The workstation is designed to display TICCIT courseware. It can

also be used as a terminal by TICCIT authors and operators.

The Network Controller

One MicroTICCIT workstation is used as the Network Controller. This . ~workstation has only one disk drive. The operator uses this workstation to

bring TICCIT Odown." If the Network Controller is shut down (turned off),

the entire system comes down; so users at other workstations need to be

warned before the Network Controller is shut off.

The TICCIT Operating System (MPOS)

The TICCIT operating system (also called MPOS) runs TICCIT

courseware and TICCIT utility programs. The TICCIT prompt is "?."

Control is transferred from RDOS to MPOS using the UP. MC file (a macro on

the Master Directory). The TICCIT operating system is referred to

alternatively as either MPOS or simply TICCIT.

.ix

0 el 1, zI ,"
19K BNCOC MicroTICCIT Site Manager and Operator's Manual

Courseware Authoring Languages

Two courseware authoring languages operate in the TICCIT

environment: ADAPT and APT. APT is an earlier authoring language which

is now used mostly to create TICCIT maps and certain files used for TICCIT

tests. ADAPT includes a few file management commands, but is primarily

designed to create courseware. Hazeltine manuals also refer to another

courseware authoring language "TAL." This software has been replaced by

ADAPT.

System Utilities

A number of utility programs are included with the System II which

are used by the TICCIT operator for data reduction activities and reports and

for other tasks related to site management. Operators access these utilities

either on-line (at the MicroTICCIT terminal) or off-line (at the Data General

console). Most of the utilities required for site management are included in

this manual. Check the Hazeltine manuals for additional information.

On-Line and Off-Line Instruction

In the BNCOC instructional environment, part of the instructional

program will be conducted using MicroTICCIT courseware. In that context,

we refer to on-line instruction when the student uses MicroTICCIT and offline instruction when the student is taught away from MicroTICCIT, either

in a classroom or in the field.

TICCIT Rexistration

Importance of Registration

There is probably nothing more important to understanding TICCIT an-4

successfully managing a MicroTICCIT site than understanding registraticr.

To use MicroTICCIT, you must be registered in at least one course. Only a

system user with an operator or programmer authorization code can access

the Registration Editor and register another user in a course. At each

MicroTICCIT site, a person should be designated as the "official" TICCIT

operator. That person should be responsible for registration procedures and

recordkeeping.

User ID Numbers

The operator assigns each user a unique ID number which has from I

to 9 digits when the user is registered into the first course. Users have the

same ID number for each course. Each user can be registered in a maximum

of ten courses. Users enter this ID number when they log on the system.

User Passwords

During registration, users may be assigned a 4 character password

(numbers, characters, or a combination of both). If a password is

assigned, the user must enter it when he logs on. User passwords provide

some degree of protection against other users logging on to a course using a

false ID and completing lessons or taking tests as that user. However, in an

environment where students will be logged on by instructors and where

tests are restricted, a password is probably more trouble than it's worth. It

is not recommended that passwords be assigned to users other than TICCIT

operators.

Ix
, 

19K BNCOC MicroTICCIT Site Manager and Operator's Manual

User Modes

During registration in each course, the operator assigns a user

'mode." The two most common modes are student (ST) and instructor (IN)

The mode is extremely important to the proper use of the 19K BNCOC

courseware and the CMI system. All student users must be assigned a

student mode because TICCIT only collects performance data for those users.

No performance data are collected by the system for users registered in the

instructor mode. All BNCOC instructors will be assigned the instructor mode

in order to be able to access the 19K BNCOC CMI utilities (e.g., off-line data

entry, print Master Record). A user may have a different mode for each

course in which he is registered, but NOT a different authorization code.

Authorization codes are described below

Course Numbers

The course number is also entered during the registration process

Users must enter this number when they log on. A course number can be

from I to 3 digits. The 19K BNCOC course for students has been assigned the

number "19." The Off-line Data Entry and Print Master Record utilities for

use by instructors are part of TICCIT Course 20. Course numbers are

assigned arbitrarily by authors during the development process and could be

changed by the TICCIT operator No two courses on the system can have the

same number, of course.

Section Numbers

Students must be enrolled in a section in Course 19, 19K BNCOC for

Tank Commanders, in order for instructors to use the Course 20, the ;K

BNCOC CMI System. Students must also be assigned a section number m

order for instructors to access class data from the TICCIT utility, Student

Progress Reports. Instructors should not be enrolled in a section as no data

should be collected about their actions on the system. Sections are numbered

from 00 to 99. Thus, up to 100 different sections of students could be

enrolled in a single TICCIT course. A student cannot be registered in more

than one section for the same course.

TICCIT operators need to understand that TICCIT does not require a

section number in order for a user to access a TICCIT course; however, to

use the 19K BNCOC CMI System a section number must be assigned. Section

assignments are also required if instructors want to use TICCIT's Student

Progress Report utility for class reports.

Assigning a section number has the effect of separating students into

different classes within a TICCIT course. Different section numbers can be

assigned to different groups so that separate BNCOC Master Record reports

.4. can be produced.

"N°

Xi

* VI

?.[e

. . : , Jl,-W -
19K BNCOC MicroTICCIT Site Manager and Operator's Manual

Authorization Codes

During registration, users are also assigned an authorization (security

level) code. The authorization code determines which TICCIT menus may be

accessed by the user (e.g., Instructor Menu, Student Menu, Operator Menu,

etc.). The authorization code may be different than the user mode. In other

words, an author may register himself in a course as a student, but still

maintain a higher authorization level. Regardless of the different modes

that a user is assigned, however, each user has only one authorization level

on the system.

TICCIT operators must be aware that if no authorization code is

entered during registration, the system will assign the user to the lowest

level (i.e.,student). TICCIT operators must be careful to enter the correct

authorization code for all users each time there is a change in registration.

TICCIT Course -

Instructors, authors, operators, and programmers are usually registered in a TICCIT course called Course 0. Students are not usually

registered in Course 0. Students will be able to access the Student Menu by

using the ATT ' function.

When a user logs on to Course 0, he will see the "Supermenu"

which lists five sub-menus:

1. Author Menu

2. Operator Menu

3. Instructor Menu

p 4. Programmer Menu

5. Student Menu

The user's authorization level determines which sub-menus he may

access. The highest security level is a Systems Programmer (SY). Users

with that authorization code may access any part of the system.

The lowest authorization code is Student (ST). These users can access

the Student Menu and any course for which they are registered.

Only authorized TICCIT operators should have access to the Operator

Menu where the Registration Menu and other important utilities are located.

These utilities should never be used by people who do not know what they

are doing, particularly when a course is being used by students during a

BNCOC cycle. Many unpleasant things can happen such as completely wiping out the permanent data areas for an entire class, or making all the

courseware inaccessible.

Instructors will need to access the Instructor Menu in order to access

Student Progress Reports. Ordinarily, they should not have access to the

Author Menu unless they have been trained to use the ADAPT programming

language.

xii
19K BNCOC MicroTICCIT Site Manager and Operator's Manual

=' TICCIT Passwords

In addition to the unique user password which would be entered

during the logging on process, there are two other types of TICCIT

passwords: the Proctor Password and the System Operator's password.

The Proctor Password

The Proctor password is from I to 6 characters. These characters

may be upper or lower case. It is required to access Proctor functions for

unauthorized users. For example, an author or instructor who is logged on

a course may directly access the Proctor functions without using the

passwords. Students, however, cannot. BNCOC instructors will use the

Proctor password to give students access to restricted tests. There will be

many different user passwords but there is only one Proctor Password

on the System at any given time.

When using the Proctor password, users must type it exactly as it was

assigned, using upper or lower case as necessary.

The System Operator's (MYMOP) Password

The System Operator's (SYSOP) password has 4 characters. It is

actually Just the user password of this nspecial* user whose user ID is mi."

The default password assigned by Hazeltine is usually LORD. That password

can and should be changed periodically. However, the SYSOP should not

be registered in any other courses other than Course S. The SYSOP's

authorization code should always be 177777 (the highest possible code).

The TICCIT operator should have his own unique ID number. He

should only log on as User 0i in an emergency; otherwise, he should use his

own ID number. The reason for this is that any change In registration

runs the risk of a mistake which could make access to certain parts of the

system impossible. For example, if the TICCIT operator, logged on as User 1,

registered himself in a course to check it out, and did not enter an

authorization code, his authorization would be changed by default to Student.

Thus, when he attempted to log on again in Course 0, he would receive the

message: You are not authoriued for that option.

Changing Passwords

AUl three types of passwords may be changed and should be changed

at regular or irregular intervals by the TICCIT operator at each site. User

passwords are changed using the registration process. A TICCIT utility is

provided to change the PROCTOR password. Students may change their own

passwords using an option from the Student Menu. Operators can find out

what the current password is for any user using the Registration utility

which allows them to examine registration information.

xiii
19K BNCOC MicroTICCIT Site Manager and Operator's Manual

TICCIT Cur Ewar* Structure

TICCIT courses have a hierarchical structure: COURSE, UNIT, LESSON,

SEGMENT. That is, a course is divided into units; units are divided into

lessons; and lessons are divided into segments.

" A TICCIT course can have a maximum of 30 units.

* A unit can have from I to 30 lessons.

" A lesson can have as many as 99 segments.

TICCIT only records information about the course, its units, and its

lessons. It records nothing about the segments.

ADAPT is the language used to write TICCIT courseware. Another

language called APT is used to create course maps and test control files. The

CMI System and the MicroTICCIT courseware developed for 19K BNCOC use

menus, not maps, to locate parts of the courseware.

A TICCIT course has 3 components: the courseware, its graphics, and

its Permanent Data Area (PDA) course template. The PDA stores information

about the structure of a course. These three types of files are linked

together to form a TICCIT course.

Two forms of each piece of courseware are stored on the system

disk: source and object. The source courseware is the version the author

accesses from the ADAPT Editor. Each piece of courseware must be processed in order for a student to access the Instruction. Processing creates the

object version. The object (or processed) version is what the student sees.

To edit or change courseware, authors must change the source

version and then reprocess the courseware. The source Is written using

ADAPT and APT. The object files are stored in machine language.

If disk space is limited, a MicroTICCIT site could delete the source

code from the disk. The source code could be stored on a tape and loaded

back on the system if necessary. Graphics are also stored in source (the

author version) and object code (the student version). Remember, all source

code must be processed before the student can access the courseware.

The Permanent Data Area. and Student Performance Data

The Permanent Data Area (PDA) is a file that stores the course

template. This file stores information about the structure of a course, such

as how many units or lessons make up the course. When a user is

registered for a course, TICCIT uses the "course PDA" to create a unique user

data file. The user data file consists partly of information about the course

structure. It also stores information about the user's progress through the

course as well as information about the user's authorization level and user

mode. The user data file name has a .PD extension. A user has a unique .PD file on the disk for each course in which he is registered.

xiv
19K DNCOC MicroTICCIT Site Manager and Operator's Manual

Student Performance Data is stored in a .PD file, the user's own

unique data file associated with a course. In addition to information about

the user such as his authorization level, his user mode, his ID number,

TICCIT also stores information about his performance such as whether he has

passed a test, how many attempts were made, and his test scores.

Naturally, TICCIT cannot store this information unless the test is taken online.

Off-line test results can be entered at the MicroTICCIT terminal using

Course 20, an ADAPT course developed by InterAmerica Research

Associates. This program will enter both test results (GO or NOGO) and test

attempts (I to 3) directly into the user's .PD file. The program does not store

the student's score.

You can print the BNCOC Master Record using Course 20. One of the

programs in Course 20 reads all of the information in the students' .PD

files. It gathers results of both the student's on-line coursework and the offline test results entered by the instructor. The data are stored in a special

file which can be printed at the MicroTICCIT terminal using the system's line

printer.

TICCIT Data Coliection and Renortinf

Student Progress Reports

TICCIT has a utility called Student Progress Reports. Users can access

this utility from the Instructor Menu. Information about the students'

progress, both individually and as a class, can be displayed on the

MicroTICCIT terminal. Users can also print reports using the system's line

printer. To access student records, the operator or instructor must know

the course number and the students' section number. To access the records

of an individual student, the student's ID number must be entered.

TICCIT's Student Progress Report utility will not display complete

information about the off-line test results that entered using Course 20.

This utility is designed to collect and display results of only on-line student

activities.

Logging Data

Logging tapes can be used to gather information about every student

response while they are logged on MicroTICCIT. These data are used to

produce Item Analysis reports. An Item analysis report provides

information about group performance on individual items of a test or

activity. Instructors can find out which items are missed most frequently,

for example. To collect logging data, the TICCIT operator must place a tape in

the system's tape drive and indicate to the system that logging is desired.

The system will then collect and store data automatically.

xv
19K BNCOC MicroTICCIT Site Manager and Operator's Manual

The Notes Utility

If instructors or other authorized personnel want to collect

information about a course from the users, users can enter comments using

the TICCIT Notes utility. Users press the MOTE key on the MicroTICCIT left

keypad. TICCIT displays a screen where the user can type his comment.

The user can leave the message "Signed" or "Unsigned". TICCIT stores the

user's location in the course and the message. Notes data can be printed

using the TICCIT Notes on-line utility.

Roles of TICCIT Users

TICCIT Proctors

Someone should be on duty in the TICCIT lab who is knowledgeable

about the course content and the structure of the course on MicroTICCIT.

Proctor is a term used to name such a person. Proctors need to know

how to give students access to restricted tests. They need to know how to

bring TICCIT UP, how to load videodiscs, where to find related course

materials, etc. Ordinarily, only the TICCIT operator should bring TICCIT

DOWN, however. Proctors need to know how to use MicroTICCIT, but they

do not need technical knowledge about its operating systems or the

programming languages on the system. The Proctor can be an instructor or

the TICCIT operator.

TICCIT Operator

A TICCIT operator is the technical person who knows how to operate

and manage a TICCIT site. An operator controls the registration process; he

loads the TICCIT courseware. Sometimes he may need to make modifications

to the courseware. An operator needs to know how to use the ADAPT and

APT programming languages. He needs specialized knowledge of the TICCIT

operating system. He also needs to know how to use RDOS, the Data General

operating system. TICCIT operators perform daily back-ups of the system

and other routine tasks.

TICCIT Data Storage

As a TICCIT operator, you will need to be familiar with the octal

numbering system (base 8), ASCII codes, and the TICCIT decimal system. All

of these are referenced in this manual as well as the Hazeltine TICCIT

manuals. TICCIT utility programs and all files at the machine level are

stored in binary, of course. "owever, when you retrieve files using TICCIT

utilities, you will find the c,.ita displayed In octal. For example, the

authorization codes of all users are reported in octal when you use the

Registration utility. As stated above, the SYSOP's authorization code is

1777778. The subscripted number "8" indicates its octal denotation. When

a number is reported in decimal, no subscript is used.

Text files are stored on the system in ASCII code. Thus, when you

translate the octal code to decimal, you still have to know the ASCII

representation of numbers and letters. TICCIT decimal code is similar to

ASCII, but not exactly the same. Operators should have charts displaying

these codes available as well as a basic understanding of these coding

systems. Charts with ASCII codes and TICCIT decimal codes are included in

the Hazeltine manuals.

xvi
19K BNCOC MIcroTICCIT Site Manager and Operator's Manual

How This Manual Is Orsanlzed

The MicroTICCIT Site Manater and OQerator's Manual is divided into

several parts as follows:

Part I is specifically designed to assist the TICCIT operator in the task

of transferring courseware either to another system or to a backup tape.

Operators may need to archive courseware on tapes if there is a space

problem on the system disk.

Part II describes procedures for installing Course 19, "19K BNCOC For

Tank Commanders."

Part III describes the procedures for installing Course 20, "The 19K

BNCOC CMI System." This course allows instructors to enter off-line test

results and to print the BNCOC Master Record.

Part IV, Day-to-day Operations, is a set of specific task-oriented

instructions which should provide help for most of the tasks that the TICCIT

operator will need to perform routinely at the 19K BNCOC MicroTICCIT site.

Part V, Courseware Management, includes procedures related to

transferring and installing MicroTICCIT courseware.

Part VI, Data Management, includes instructions for using the Notes

and Item Analysis utilities which may be needed for evaluation purposes.

Part VII, TICCIT Hints, consists of information about TICCrr and

procedures for a few specialized TICCIT utilities.

Part VIII, RDOS Hints, is a brief guide to using RDOS, the Data

General operating system. Operators will need to refer to the RDOS manuals

published by Data General for more detailed information.

Part IX, Revising Course 19, contains instructions for making

changes to Course 19, 19K BNCOC for Tank Commanders.

Part X, Revising Course 20, has instructions for making changes to

Course 20, the 19K BNCOC CMI System.

Part I, Creating a TICCIT Test, includes Information about developing

a test on MicroTICCIT. These instructions will also assist the TICCIT

operator if revisions to MicroTICCIT tests are needed.

Part XII, Courseware Documentation, consists of information about

the color palettes used to develop Course 19 and Course 20. Information

about the symbols tables and other technical information is also included.

Part XIII, Recordkeeping, includes some sample forms that the

operator can use to manage the site.

This ManuaLalso includes a glossary of terms and a detailed index.

.1.2

xvi i
19K BNCOC MicroTICCIT Site Manager and Operator's Manual

Uslng This Manual

Here are a few tips that will help you as you use this manual.

1. We have tried to use the terminology in the manual consistently.

For example, when we expect you to use one of the TICCIT function keys, we

use the word "press." For example, "press ENTER." The name of the

function key to use appears in bold.

2. If we expect you to enter data using the regular keyboard, we say "type." For example, "type DMO", means that you should type those

characters.

3. If we expect you to enter a response using the light pen, we say "mark." For example, "Mark TUTORIAL", means to use the light pen to

touch the icon on the MicroTICCIT display screen.

4. We usually guide you from the first menu (Supermenu) through all

of the levels of sub-menus in our procedures. When we say "Select," you

will be expected to type the number of the appropriate menu item and press

ENTER. To move forward to the next screen, TICCIT generally wants you to

press GO. Likewise, you press BACK to return to a previous screen. Most

TICCIT utilities have ADVICE (help) screens. You can always try to get some

help by pressing ADVICE. If there is none available, nothing is lost.

5. You can get into "big trouble" by doing certain things. For

example, the command "Delete" on the CLI or File Utility menus does not offer

you a second chance. Once a file is gone, it is gone forever (unless, of

course, you want to load in your backup tapes). Certain files are extremely

important and are not recreated by the system. It is always best to think

first, and act later.

6. Always write down your procedures as you perform your tasks

If what you did works, you have documentation to add to this manual. If it

doesn't work, the history will help Hazeltine's customer service personnel

help you figure out what went wrong.

Suggested References

ADAPT System Functions 0 1984 by Hazeltine Corporation.

ADAPT Reference Manual 0 1984 by Hazeltine Corporation.

Introduction to RDOS 0 1983 by Data General Corporation.

Introduction to TICCIT Operations 0 1984 by Hazeltine Corporation.

RDOS/DOS Command Line Interpreter 0 1983 by Data General Corporation.

TICCIT System Utilities 0 1984 by Hazeltine Corporation.

xviii

'~ ~~~ " ~~~ "'" IL' I = . '"• . " , '
PUrt I: Tran~frrrinK CourewarI

PPart !: Transferring Courseware

Table of Contents

page

1. Transferring Courseware 1-3

2. Dumping Courseware To Tape 1-4

3. Dumping Graphics To Tape 1-6

Nt

IiU
Part 1. Tranofwrring and Inotalling Courowwarv

1-2
Part 1: Transferring and Installing Courseware

Transferring Courseware

Introduction These instructions are tailored for transferring 19K

BNCOC CMI System courseware to tape; however,

they may be applied to any MicroTICCIT

courseware.

You transfer courseware to tape when:

o you want to send the courseware to another site,

or

" you want to archive courseware at your location.

Files on the tape o MTO is the name of the tape drive device.

" The Data General RDOS System automatically sets

up the locations on the tape starting with 0.

Number your tape files from 0 to N. Do not skip

numbers.

o Keep a list of the files and their contents and

write them on two labels. Put one label on the

tape itself and one on the plastic tape container.

See the example below.

" MT0: 0 (BNCOCPIXS) " MTO: 1 (BNCOCPIXS -- copy)

" MTO: 2 (BN-.CW)

" MT0: 3 (BN-.CW -- copy)

Transfer

steps 0 Dump two copies of the courseware to tape.

" Dump two copies of the graphics to tape.

" Be sure to include Makecourse instructions for

the receiving site.

Detailed instructions are included on the next pages.

1-3
Part I: Tran3ferring and Installing Courmwarv

Dumping Courseware To Tape

Introduction These procedures are completed on-line (at the

MicroTICCIT terminal).

Procedures a Turn the tape drive on if necessary.

a Check your tape to be sure it is not write

protected.

* Put the tape in the tape drive.

* Log on Course 0 and select the Operator Menu.

" Select the File Utilities Menu.

* Select DIR (Type "19" )

" Type: DM0: BNCW 1

* Press EXIT.

* Select DUMP (Type "9")

FILE 1: MT0:O (Type MT0:0 and press ENTER.) 2

FILE 2: BN-.CW (Type BN-.CW and press ENTER) 3

Press ENTER again to begin the DUMP. The name

of each file will appear at the bottom of the screen.

Press ENTER to continue until all files are

* v* dumped. 4

Backup Copy * Repeat the process above. When the FILE 1:

prompt appears, type the next tape file name, e.g.

,-. MT0:1.

I DM0 is the Master Directory name for the TICCIT System I. "BNCW" is

the source courseware directory for Course 19, 19K BNCOC for Tank

Commanders. To use these instructions for dumping other courseware,

replace the prefix "BN" with the name of the course to dump.

2 MT0:0 is the name you will assign to the tape file which will contain

the source courseware for Course 19. MT0 is the name of the tape device.

W U is the name of the file. Several files may be stored on the same tape.

Number the files consecutively.

3 BN-.CW is the name of the source courseware files that you are going

to dump into MT0:0. "BN" is the name of the course. You may replace those

letters with the name of another course you wish to dump. This format will

dump the entire course. Using the wildcard character "-" will dump all

files which start with the letters "BN" and end with the extension ".CW."

4 The name of each file will appear at the bottom of the screen as it is

dumped. You may change the name of the file before pressing ENTER. This

procedure will allow you to change the names of the files as they are

dumped on the disk. You may use this procedure when you dump

courseware from other MicroTICCIT projects which will be placed in the 19K

BNCOC course structure.

1-4
Part I: Transferring and Installing Courseware

Quick Method 0 Before you press ENTER to begin the dump,

press RULE. (You will see a different display.) " TAB to the prompt: LISTING FILE.

* Type an ,*" beside the prompt.

* Press ENTER to return to the first screen.

" Press ENTER again to begin the dump. All files

will be dumped to the tape file without any further

action from you.

TICCIT Labels A COURSE NAME is always two letters. TICCIT files

or modules that store courseware have TICCIT

labels which correspond to their location within the

course. Examples:

BN010203.CW Unit 1, Lesson 2, Segment 3

BN050313.CW Unit 5, Lesson 3, Segment 13

Makecourse At the receiving site, the TICCIT operator may need

to create a course using the Makecourse utility. Be

sure to include instructions for Makecourse with

the courseware you are transferring.

Next stop Next dump the source graphics on to the

tape.

Dumping Part

of a Course If you want to dump part of a course, you will not

type BN-.CW beside the "FILE 2" prompt.

Remember that using the wild card 0-" dumps all

of the files beginning with the prefix "BN."

Below are examples of the labels you would type to

dump only particular parts of a course:

BNOIO1OI.CW (unit I, lesson 1, segment 1)

BNOI-.CW (dumps all lessons and segments in

unit 1)

BNO1O2-.CW (dumps all segments In unit 1, lesson 2)

1-5
Part I: Transferring and In3talling Coureware

Dumping Graphics To Tape

Introduction Source graphics for a TICCIT course are dumped in

separate files on the tape. If the courseware you

are transferring has no graphics, then you can

skip this entire section. These procedures are very

similar to those for dumping source courseware

except that you will dump files stored on the

source graphics directory which have an extension

of "SG."

Procedures * Check to be sure the tape is not write-protected.

• Turn the tape drive on if necessary.

* Put a tape In the tape drive.

• Log on Course 0 and select the Author Menu.

* Select *4, Graphics Utilities.

• Select *4, Dump Source Graphics (SG DUMP).

Enter information on the display that follows:

OUTPUT (DUMP) PILE: MTO.0 5

LISTING FILE (Optional): DMO: Filename 6

LOCATION SPECIFIER: BN 7

NEW LOCATION SPECIFIER: BN 8

SOURCE GRAPHICS DIRECTORY: TGRAPHIC 9

DUMP LINKS? [Y] 10

DUMP UNPROCESSED FORM [Y] (Always dump unprocessed

OF GRAPHICS? form of graphics files.)

VERIFY DUMP TO SCREEN? [Y] (Displays each title in tile)

SELECT GRAPHICS TO DUMP? [Y] (Dump selected graphics)

Message: Graphic to Dump: TICCIT file name [Press ENTER

to dump the file.]

Final Message: Selected Graphics Have Been Dumped.

5 Type name of the tape drive device and number of the tape file that

will store your dumped graphics. The tape file number in the example is

"0." Assign unique numbers to files so that you do not write over a file.

6 The listing file will save the names of the graphics files. Type a

filename of your choice using the usual filenaming conventions.

7 The location specifier Is the name of the course holding the graphics to

dump. Type the course name to dump all of the course graphics. Dump

graphics from a part of the course by typing BN.1 or BN.2.3 (etc.).

-$ Transfer graphics to a different course or a different location within a

* course, by typing the new location specifier here. You can leave this blank.

9 Type the name of the directory that contains the source graphics.

10 If your graphics are linked within the course, it is extremely

important to dump the link files. Respond Y (Yes) to this question to be safe.

I-
Part I: Transferring and Installing Courseware

Backup Copy Repeat the procedures above. Change the tape file

name, e.g. from MT0:I to MTO.2. Use the Quick

Method described below.

Quick Method Indicate N (No) beside Verify Dump to Screen

and No beside Select Graphics to Dump to dump

all graphics in a course. You will not see the

names of files at the bottom of the screen. They

will ou be dumped without any further action from

you.

Makecourse At the receiving site, the TICCIT operator will need

to create a course using the Makecourse utility. Be

sure to include instructions for Makecourse with

the courseware you are transferring. Part II and

III of this manual have instructions for installing

courseware.

Dumping Part

of the Course Change the "location specifier" to indicate the part

of the course containing course graphics to dump.

BN.l.l.1 (unit 1, lesson 1, segment I)

BN.1 (dumps graphics for all lessons and segments

in unit I)

BN.l.2 (dumps graphics for all segments in unit I

lesson 2)

"

1,1-

.!!A

'a..

')" I-7
Part 11: Installing 19K BNCOC For Tank Commanders, Course 19

Part II: Installing 191 BNCOC For Tank Commanders,

Course 19

Table of Contents

pagse

1. Installing the 19K BNCOC CMI System 11-3

2. Makecourse Instructions for Course 19 11-4

3. Loading Course 19 Courseware From Tape 11-7

4. Loading Course 19 Graphics From Tape 11-9

5. Batch Processing Courseware for Course 19 11-10

6. Processing Graphics for Course 19 11-l1

7. Registering Users in Course 19 11-12

8. Creating A TICCIT Roster File 11-13

9. Contents of Course 19 11-14

10. Contents of 19K BNCOC Unit 1 (Cluster L):

Diagnostic Tests and Remedial Training 11-16

11. Accessing Restricted Tests 11-20

II1-1

-............... . ... .......... .................. -..--. ,:
Part ll: Installing 19K ENCOC For Tank Commanders, Course 19

~~,p

11-2i

dyhI.s'-- - .5 *- .' ~, -- ~ I
Part II: Installing 19K BNCOC For Tank Commanders, Course 19

Installing The 19] BNCOC CMI System

Introduction These instructions are tailored for installing the

19K BNCOC CMI System. These instructions are for

installing Course 19. See Part III for instructions

for installing Course 20.

Courseware to Install & TICCIT COURSE 19 (19K BNCOC for Tank

Commanders)

* TICCIT COURSE 20 (19K BNCOC Computer

Managed Instruction System)

Files on the Tape * MTO:0 (BN-.CW)

9 MT:1 (BN-.SG)

* MTO:2 (BN-.CW -- copy)

* MTO:3 (BN-.SG -- copy)

# MTO:4 (DE-.CW)

* MTO:5 (DE-.SG)

* MTO:6 (DE-.CW -- copy)

* MTO:7 (DE-.SG -- copy)

Installation

Steps * Create Course 19 using Makecourse.1

• Load courseware for Course 19 (BN-.CW). 2

& Load the graphics for Course 19 (BN-.SG).

0 Batch process the courseware at all levels.

* Process the graphics.

6 Register users for Course 19. Assign a

Section Number.

* Create Course 20 using Makecourse.

a Load the courseware for Course 20 (DE-.CW).

* Load the graphics for Course 20 (DE-.SG).

• Batch process the courseware at all levels.

* Process the graphics.

* Register users for Course 20.

a Create a TICCIT Roster File for students

registered in Course 19.

* Access Course 20 and create a BNCOC Master

Record File for students registered in Course

19. A separate file must be created for each

section.

Important[ Read through the entire set of instructions

in Part II and Part III before beginning the

installation.

I Makecourse must be completed before processing the courseware and

graphics.

2 The courseware and graphics may be loaded from tape either before or

after creating the course template using the Makecourse utility. We suggest

instYdling the CMI system in the sequence given in this Manual.

11-3
Part 11: Installing 19K BNCOC For Tank Commanders, Course 19

Makecourse Instructions For Course 19

Introduction The purpose of the Makecourse utility is to create a

template file for your course. The template stores

information about the structure of the course.

Important You cannot have duplicate course numbers on your

system. If another course has already been

assigned the number "19," you will have to use

another number when creating this course.

Replacing An Existing

Course If you already have Course 19 on your system and

you are only updating the courseware, you will

not need to create a new course template unless

the updated version has a larger number of units

or lessons than the previous version. In that

case, skip the procedures below and go on

to the next section, "Batch Processing

Courseware.0

Procedures * Select the Author Menu from the Supermenu.

* Select the Author Utilities Menu.

" Select Makecourse.

* Select Build a New Course Prom Scratch

(Item *3).

oRespond to each of the prompts with the

information given below.

Course Number 19

Course Name BN

Course Title 19K BNCOC FOR TANK COMMANDERS

Module Range CAUTION: Read these instructions completely

before responding to this prompt. Typing the

actual numbers of a module range will delete all

existing courseware in that module range. Be sure

you know what you are doingi

& A new module range requires the establishment

of a module directory.

* The safest route is to enter the course

number of an existing course at your site.

11-4
Part II: Installing 19K BNCOC For Tank Commanders, Course 19

Number of Units 11 (Enter a K in "!I1 spaces.) Press GO to

continue.

Number of Lessons (Enter a K in the number of spaces indicated below

for each unit. ) Press 60 for next unit.

Unit 1-- 18

Unit 2-- 5

Unit 3-- 9

Unit 4-- 8

Unit 5-- 4

Unit 6-- 2

Unit 7-- 2

Unit 8-- 2

Unit 9-- 9

Unit 10 -- 1

Unit l 1--

Press SKIP to advance to the next frame.

Start Window Accept the default value and press GO to continue.

Number of Active

Windows Type "9" and press ENTER.

The number you choose relates to the maximum

number of active lessons students will be allowed

to work in at any one time. We suggest allowing

the maximum number unless you have reasons for

doing otherwise.

Graphics/Audio

Directory Enter a1 unless otherwise instructed by the TICCIT

Site Manager or Hazeltine's Customer Service

Department. This directory must exist at your

site. See the Hazeltine TICCIT operations manuals

for instructions about creating directories.

Source Courseware

Directory Enter DKFAULTTAL unless you have installed a

different courseware directory at your site.

Source Graphics

Directory Enter GRAPHICS unless you have installed a

different source graphics directory at your site.

Number of ObjectiveTest Attempt Blocks Accept the default value and press GO to continue.

Extended Data Area The 19K BNCOC course has no extended data area.

Press EXIT to record the structure for this course.
Part 11: Installing 19K BNCOC For Tank Commanders, Course 19

Courseware Template

File Name You will see the following message on your screen

which indicates that the course structure for this

course has been recorded on your disk.

PDAOI9000 created 3

Next Step After the course template has been created,

process the source courseware and the source

graphics.

Warningi Do not change the course structure after the

BNCOC cycle has begun. Any change In the

course template destroys all student data.

All students must be re-reastered to access

the revised course.

Changing the

Course Structure To change the course structure,

* Select item #1, "Modifying the Course

Structure" from the Makecourse menu.

* Follow the instructions above, entering new

data as appropriate.

* Remember that any changes to the course

structure will require you to re-register all users

in the course. All student performance data will

also be destroyed. Never change course structure

during a BNCOC cycle.

.

3 The first three numbers refer to the course number. You may omit

the leading zero when referring to this course. The last three numbers refer

to the site number. All MicroTICCIT sites have "000" as the site number.

II-6
Part II: Installing 19K BNCOC For Tank Commanders, Course 19

Loading Course 19 Courseware From Tape

Introduction Complete these procedures on-line (at the

MicroTICCIT terminal).

Procedures * Bring TICCIT UP if you have not already done

SO.

* Put a tape in the tape drive. Be sure the

tape drive is on and the tape is In the read

only position.

* Log on and select the Operator Menu.

e Select the File Utilities Menu.

* Select DIR (Type "19").

* Type: DM0: BNCW 4

* Press EXIT.

* Select LOAD (Type "8").

FILE 1: MTO: 0 (Type MTO: 0 and press ENTER.) 5

FILE 2: BN-.CW (Type BN-.CW and press ENTER.) 6

Press ENTER again to begin the LOAD. The name

of each file will appear at the bottom of the screen.

Press ENTER to continue until all files are loaded. 7

4 DM0 is the Master Directory name for the TICCIT System 1I. "BNCW" is

the source courseware directory for Course 19, 19K BNCOC for Tank

Commanders.

5 MTO: 0 is the name of the file containing the source courseware for

Course 19. MTO is the name of the tape device and "0" is the name of the

file. Several files may be stored on the same tape. They are usually

numbered consecutively. The tape containing the 19K BNCOC courseware

contains eight files numbered from 0 to 7.

6 BN-.CW is the name of the source courseware files you are going to

load. "BN" is the name of the course. You may replace those letters with the

name of another course you wish to load. This format will dump the entire

course. Using the wildcard character "-" will load all files which start

with the letters "BN" and end with the extension ".CW."

7 The name of each file will appear at the bottom of the screen as it is

loaded. You may change the name of the file before pressing ENTER. This

procedure will allow you to change the names of the files as they are loaded

on the disk. You will use this procedure when you load courseware from

other MicroTICCIT projects which will be placed in BNCOC Course 19.

11-7
Part I: Installing 19K BNCOC For Tank Commanders, Course 19

Quick Method Before you press ENTER to begin the load, press

RULE. Press TAB to move the cursor beside the

prompt: LISTING FILE. Type an .*." Press ENTER

to return to the first screen. Then press ENTER to

begin the load. All files will be loaded without any

further action from you. Note: You would not use

this method if you needed to change the names of

the files before loading them into the system. See

Footnote 6 below.

TICCIT Labels A COURSE NAME always has two letters. TICCIT

files that store source courseware have TICCIT

labels which correspond to their location within the

course.

Examples:

BNO10203.CW Unit 1, Lesson 2, Segment 3

BN050313.CW Unit 5, Lesson 3, Segment 13

Loading Parts

of the Course Enter the appropriate TICCIT file name beside the

OFILE 2:" prompt. See examples below.

BNOO11.CW (unit 1, lesson 1, segment 1)

BNOI-.CW (loads all lessons and segments in

unit 1) BNOlO2-.CW (loads all segments in unit 1, lesson 2)

Next Step Now load the source graphics from the tape.

The instructions are presented on the next

page of this manual.

hz.<

. 1-
Part I: Installing 19K BNCOC For Tank Commanders, Course 19

Loading Course 19 GraphIcs From Tap*

Introduction Source graphics for a TICCIT course are dumped in

separate files on the tape. If the courseware you are

loading has no graphics, then you can skip this entire

section. These procedures are very similar to those for

loading source courseware except that you will load these

files on the source graphics directory . These files have

the extension ".SG."

Procedures * Be sure the tape is in the tape drive.

* Log on Course 0 and select the Operator Menu.

* Select the Pile Utilities Menu.

* Select DIR (Type "19").

* Type: DM0: BNSG 8

* Press EXIT.

* Select LOAD (Type "8").

FILE 1: MT0:1 (Type MT0:1 and press ENTER.)

FILE 2: BN-.SG (Type BN-.SG and press ENTER.) 9

Press ENTER again to begin the LOAD. The name of each

file will appear at the bottom of the screen. Press ENTER

to continue until all files are loaded. 10

Quick Method Before you press ENTER to begin the load, press RULE.

Press TAB to move the cursor beside the prompt: LISTING

FILE. Type an "* ." Press ENTER to return to the first

screen. Then press ENTER to begin the load. All files

will be loaded without any further action from you.

NoteL You would not use this method if you needed to

change the names of the files before loading them into

the system. See Footnote 9 below.

DM0 is the Master Directory name for the TICCIT System 11. BNSG is

the source graphics directory for Course 19, the 19K BNCOC ADAPT course. To

use these instructions for loading other source graphics, replace the prefix

"BN" with the name of other course.

9 N-. SG is the name of the source graphics files you are going to load

"BN" is the name of the course. You may replace those letters with the

name of another course you wish to load. This format will load the graphics

the entire course. Using the wildcard character "-" will load all files which

start with the letters "BN" and end with the extension ".SG."

10 You may change the name of the file before pressing ENTER. This

procedure will allow you to change the names of the files as they are loaded

on the disk. You will use this procedure when you load source graphics

from other MicroTICCIT projects which will be placed in the 19K BNCOC

course structure.

11-9
Part II: Installing 19K BNCOC For Tank Commanders, Course 19

Batch Processing Courseware for Course 19

Introduction Before you can use the Courseware files you have

loaded, you must process them. When you process

a file, you are creating a separate object file (a

TICCIT module). 11

Procedures * 'og on Course 0 and select the Author Menu.

o Select the Author Utilities Menu.

* Select Run Courseware Batch Processor

(Item *5).

Process courseware at all levels. Processing will

-+ take some time depending on how long the

courseware is. Other authors will not be able to

use the processor until you are finished. Enter the

TICCIT labels as follows:

BN (Processes all course level files)

BN.* (Processes all unit level files)

BN.*.* (Processes all lesson level files)

BN.*.*.* (Processes all segment level files)

* You can substitute the name of another course

for "BN. "

* The asterick () is the wildcard indicating that

you want ALL files (including all extensions) at that

level to be processed.

e All types of files (standard, test, APT, etc.) will

be processed.

* Press ADVICE for additional information.

Next Step Process source graphics files if the course has

graphics. Otherwise, register users for the

course.

,1 After the installation has been completed, you may wish to delete the

source courseware files from the disk. Keep the tape containing the source

courseware files for backup purposes. Deleting the source courseware has

two results: You will have more space on the disk for other courseware.

You will also be unable to make changes in this course from the ADAPT

editor. See other sections of this manual for more information about TICCIT

4.. modules.

. -
Part 11: Installing 19K BNCOC For Tank Commanders, Course 19

Batch Processing Graphics for Course 19

Introduction Follow these instructions to process source graphics

which have been loaded from tape to disk.

Procedures * Log on Course 0 and select the Author Menu.

* Select the Graphics Utilities Menu.

* Select Batch Graphics Processor.

* Enter the courseware location; e.g., BN

0 Enter the name of the Source graphics directory;

e.g. BNSG.

• Type "Y" beside the prompt: DISPLAY ERROR

MESSAGE.

%,Id Type "Y" beside the prompt: PROCESS LINK

GRAPHICS.

* Type "N" beside the prompt: FORCE HIGH

RESOLUTION.

__ Be sure that graphics have been dumped in

unprocessed form before reprocessing. 12

* Press ENTER to begin processing. These

instructions will process all source graphics

associated with the named course.

Check Graphics * After processing, register a student in the course

and check the graphics.

Next step Register users in Course 19.

. gm

12 List any of the source graphics files to find out whether they are

processed or unprocessed. Processed graphics files will have a user defined

file attribute which will appear in the file information as a "7.0 If they

have been dumped in processed form, first unprocess the files; then proceed

with the instructions for processing graphics.

I1-1
Part II: Installing 19K BNCOC For Tank Commanders, Course 19

Registering Users In Course 19

Important Only the TICCIT operator should register students in

a course. Operators should keep careful records of

all transactions.

Introduction Before you can access Course 19, you must

register at least one user in the course.

Procedures e Select the Operator Menu.

* Select the Registration Menu.

- Access the InterActive Registration Menu.

* Register instructors in Course 19. Assign them

an Instructor (IN) mode. Do not assign them to a

section. 13

* Register students into Course 19, Section 00.14

6 Type the user's name last name first. The

name can be a maximum of 20 characters

(including first and last names).

* Assign an ID number. Be sure every user on

the system has a unique ID number. The ID

number can be from I to 9 numbers.

* Enter Course number 19, Section 00.

0 Optional: Assign a four character password.

The password can be numbers or letters or

1" combination of both.

Modes and

Authorization Codes Fill in both the mode and authorization code

information for all users. If you do not enter an

* authorization code, the System will assign the

default code which is ST (Student).

* The mode and authorization code for students

must be ST (student).

* The mode and authorization code for instructors

must be IN (instructor).

Important Notes: e TICCIT only stores performance data for users

who are registered In student mode.

* A student can only be registered in one section of

a course.

13 To see and test Course 19 the way it will be presented to students, be

sure to register at least one user in student mode. You should not register

instructors Into a section. No performance data are stored for users

registered in the instructor mode.

14 Section numbers must be two digits -- 00 to 99. The example shown

here is 00"; however, the section number can be any two digits. Assign no

more than 15 students to a section.

11-12
Part~~~~ NO FrTn I-: IPart 11: Installing 19K ENCOC For Tank Commanders, Course 19

Creating A TICCIT Roster File

Important This file must be created before attempting to use

TICCIT Course 20 which includes utilities for

entering off-line data and printing the BNCOC

Master Record.

Introduction The TICCIT Roster File utility creates a disk file

which lists the identificaton number and mailbox

number of each student registered in a particular

course and section. The 19K BNCOC CMI System, Course 20, will use these data to locate information

about the student and to create the CMI System's

Roster File.

BNCOC personnel could maintain two or more

rosters by registering different students into

different sections of the same course. Create a

separate TICCIT Roster File for each section. ..

Procedures 0 Log on Course 0 and select the Instructor

Menu.

" Select Student Progress Reports.

" Go to the second page of the menu.

* Select Build Class Roster ( Item *7).

. Enter the course number (i.e., 19).

" Enter the two digit section number that you assigned to the students during registration.

0 Press HARD to create the TICCIT Roster File for

this section. This file will be on the Registration , Directory (TREGISTER) under the name 01900.RO.

The first 3 digits are the course number and the

second two digits are the section number.

Changing the Roster If students are added or dropped from the 19K

BNCOC course during a cycle, the TICCIT Roster File

will need to be recreated using the procedures

above.

Changes in the "TICCIT Roster File" will not affect

athe performance data files of students registered in

Course 19; however, the CMI Roster File created

by Course 20, the 19K BNCOC CMI System, will need -. to be recreated to reflect the changes.

Instructions for creating the CMI Roster File are

included in Part III of this manual.

C..

11-13

-F -C.
Part 11: Installing 19K BNCOC For Tank Commanders, Course 19

Contents Of Course 19

Introduction Course 19, 19K BNCOC For Tank Commanders,

consists primarily as a set of menus which provide

the structure" for 19K BNCOC MicroTICCIT

courseware. Course 19 will allow BNCOC students

' to access the MicroTICCIT courseware developed

for 19K BNCOC including the Diagnostic Tests and

Remedial Training for five (5) of the BNCOC

Prerequisite Tasks and other Tasks included in the

Land Navigation, Military Communiciations, and

Tank Commander's Gunnery Clusters.

The Main Menu The Main Menu of Course 19 lists the 19K BNCOC

Task Clusters. Page One of the Menu is shown

below.

Mark a TASK CLUSTER with your light pen.

19X BNCOC COURSE MENU I

. Diagnostic Tests/Remedial Training

* Duties/Responsibilities of an NCO . Land Navigation

' NBC Defense

. Military Communications

QUIT-] - TUTORIAL]

Submenus Each Task Cluster Menu lists all of the 19K BNCOC

tasks in that cluster.

MicroTICCIT Tutorial Course 19 includes the MicroTICCIT Tutorial for students and for instructors which is accessible

from the Main Menu by marking the icon,

TUTORIAL, with the light pen. The Tutorial

includes an introduction to the BNCOC course menus

and instruction on using the light pen. Which

version of the Tutorial the user sees depends on

their user mode.

11-14

4.%

444 '4.4 '.,I A k. -
Part II: Installing 19K BNCOC For Tank Commanders, Course 19

DBCOC Tests Course 19 has three BNCOC tests which have been

converted for MIcroTlCCIT presentation from their

previous paper/pencil format. No Instruction is

included for the Tasks which they evaluate.

These tests are located at:

Cluster Task

Responsiblities of an NCO Conduct Performance Counseling

Tank Commander's Gunnery Estimate Range

Select Firing Position

111
Part II: Installing 19K BNCOC For Tank Commanders, Course 19

Contents Of 19K BNCOC Unit I (Cluster L): Diagnostic Tests

And Remedial Training

Introduction 19K BNCOC's Task Cluster L includes instruction and

testing of those tasks determined to be prerequisite

to the 19K BNCOC course. The 19K BNCOC course on

MicroTICCIT includes on-line testing and instruction

for five of those prerequisite tasks.

Accessing Instruction To use the instruction and tests for the five on-line

prerequisite tasks, follow these procedures:

" Log on Course 19.

" Mark the first menu item on the Course Menu,

Diagnostic Tests and Remedial Training.

19K BNCOC Course Menu

Mark a TASK CLUSTER vith your light pen.

19K BNCOC COURSE MENU

* Diagnostic Tests/Remedial Training

a Duties/Responsibilities of an NCO

e Land Navigation

* NBC Defense

e Military Communications

QUTITUTORIALI

Diagnostic Tests

Sub-Menu The first sub-menu (shown below) offers three

choices:

Hark on option vith your light pen.

I I 9z C oc

Diagnostic Tests/Remedial Trainint

" Dialoatic Tests

" Remedial Training

" Off-lime Prerequisite Tasks

II-lU
Part II: Installing 19K BNCOC For Tank Commanders, Course 19

Diagnostic Tests The tests for the prerequisite tasks are called

diagnostic because they are intended to measure the

student's existing knowledge and/or skills. The

student takes this test prior to having received

instruction.

Remedial Instruction The instructional material is called remedial

because it is intended to remediate the student's

lack of the knowledge and/or skills measured by

the tests. A student does not see this instruction

unless he fails the diagnostic test.

Other TICCIT instructional segments will be

different. Ordinarily, the student must do the

instructional activities before taking the test.

On-Line

Prerequisite Tasks There are 5 prerequisite tasks on-line. Both

instruction and tests are included. See the sample

screen below.

Mark an option vith your light pen.

19K BNCOC

Deredial Training

* Six Digit Grid

* Operate a Radio Set

0 Commuiete Using Viscol Signals

a Becogtize/ldentiiy FriendlylThrest Vehicles

- Establish Took Firing Positions

Off-Line

Prerequisite Tasks There are several other tasks which are

prerequisite to the 19K BNCOC course. Those

tasks are tested off-line (either in the field

or in classroom). Students who do not pass

these tests receive remedial instruction, but

that instruction is not on MicroTICCIT.

Student Records TICCIT stores each student's test results

(Pass/Fail), the number of test attempts (1 to

3), and the student's score. TICCIT cannot

store results of off-line testing. Those results

must be entered by the instructor using

TICCIT Course 20. Instructions for using

Course 20 are given In the next section of

this manual.

11-17
Part I: Installing 19K BNCOC For Tank Commanders, Course 19

Videodisc A videodisc has been developed to support the

TICCIT courseware for the diagnostic tests

and remedial training. The videodisc must

be loaded before accessing this courseware.

Instructions for loading videodiscs and using

the videodisc player are included in the lIK

BNCOC MicroTCCIT Instructor's Tutorial and

Reference Manual.

Taking the Tests The student must begin by taking all five

diagnostic tests in the order in which they

are listed. If a student passes a test, the test

name on the menu will change from CYAN

(light blue) to GRZE. If the student fails

the test, the task title will change from

CYAK to RED. Once begun, student must

complete a test. TICCIT will record the test

attempt information.

Accessing Restricted Tests All 19K BNCOC tests are restricted; that is, a

student cannot access a test without

instructor (or Proctor) assistance.

Second and Third

Test Attempts The student cannot take a test again until he

*i has completed the appropriate remedial

instruction. A student may take a test a

maximum of three times.

Accessing the Courseware A student will not be able to access the

Remedial Training until he has taken all

five diagnostic tests at least one time. He

may access only the instruction for the task

he failed. Remedial instruction must be

completed before a student can take the

corresponding test again.

If a student exits the system without

completing a remedial lesson, the task name

on the menu will change from CYAN to

YELLOW. The color YELLOW indicates that

a lesson has been started but not completed.

Successful completion of a lesson will change

the task name from CYAN (or YELLOW) to

GREEN.

Gitl.
Part II: Installing 19K BNCOC For Tank Commanders, Course 19

Using the Light Pen Students will make all responses using the

light pen. In each case, students mark the

appropriate screen location with the light

pen. TICCIT records the information and

determines whether the student has

responded appropriately.

Using the Keyboard Only instructors will need to use the

MicroTICCIT keyboard. They will use the

keyboard to log students on the system and

to give them access to restricted tests.

11-19
Part II: Installing 19K BNCOC For Tank Commanders, Course 19

Accessing Restricted Tests

Introduction You must use the Proctor Password to give a

student access to a restricted test. All BNCOC tests

are restricted. 15

0 There is only one Proctor Password, but every

user may have a unique user password. The

Proctor Password may be different or the same as

a User Password. The Proctor Password is not

necessarily the same as the System Operator

password.

Procedures * Press the ATT'N key.

* Type "p' for "Proctor."

* Press the TAB key to move the cursor to the

masked boxes at the right of the screen.

e Type the Proctor's password in the masked

boxes. Be sure to use the Caps Lock key or

shift key if the password is uppercase

letters.

* Press ENTER.

* Type "y" for "yes* and press ENTER.

Result The first page of the test should appear. If the

system display requesting the Proctor password

appears again, the password you have just entered

was incorrect. You may have forgotten to

capitalize all letters, if the password required it.

Check with the TICCIT operator to find out the

current Proctor password.

4

is Only users registered in student mode will be required to enter the

Proctor password to access the test. If the user is registered as an

instructor or higher security level, any password may be used.

11-20
Part III: Installing Course 20, 19K BNCOC CMI System

Part III: Installing Course 20, 19K BNCOC CMI System

Table of Contents

page

List of Figures 111-3

Introduction 111-5

1. Makecourse Instructions for Course 20 111-13

2. Loading Course 20 From Tape 111-16

3. Batch Processing Courseware for Course 20 III-18

4. Batch Processing Graphics for Course 20 111-19

5. Registering Users for Course 20 111-20

6. Contents of Course 20 111-21

7. CMI System Files 111-26

8. Installing the Modified SRDBI (Patch for TICCIT System 11) 111-27

4..

!II1-1
Part III: Installing Course 20, 19K BNCOC CMI System

,

111-2
Part III: Installing Course 20, 19K BNCOC CMI System

List of Figures

page

1. Log On Procedures and the .PD File 111-6

2. Structure of the User Permanent Data Area 111-7

3. Lesson Table in the .D Area 111-8

111-3

'..,!'~
Part III: Installing Course 20, 19K BNCOC CMI System

J

.1

q111-4
Part III: Installing Course 20, 19K BNCOC CMI System

Introduction

Before you install Course 20, The CMI System, you must install the

modified SRDBI function, a patch for TICCIT System II developed by Hazeltine

Corporation for the CMI System (1985). Instructions for performing this patch

are provided on Page 111-27 in this part of the Manual. Information about

the SRDBI function and its relationship to the TICCIT permanent data files

(PD) may be found below.

Installation Steps

Installing Course 20 on TICCIT System II requires several steps. With

the exception of "installinB the modified SRDBI" those steps match normal

CvOur ~wa7e installitioii pYceedues. If Whe modified SRDBI has been InstLalle1vd

and/or Course 20 has already been established using Makecourse, you will

not need to repeat those steps.

" Install the modified SRDBI.

" Create a course structure using Makecourse.

" Load the courseware and graphics files from the tape.

* Process the files (courseware and graphics).

* Register users in the course.

Using Course 20 as a Computer Managed Instruction system for the

BNCOC courseware in Course 19, 19K BNCOC for Tank Commanders, also

requires the operator to create a TICCIT Roster File for each section of

students registered in Course 19.

Section-Size Restrictions

You may create more than one section of students during registration

simply by assigning different section numbers to different groups of students.

A section may not exceed 15 students. This restriction is imposed by

memory requirements of the CMI System (Course 20) and not by the TICCIT

operating system.

The Permanent Data Area

A TICCIT course is established using Makecourse which creates a

course template stored in a file with the prefix "PDA." For example, the 19K

for Tank Commanders course template file is "PDA019000. The first three

digits correspond to the course number (with a leading zero) and the last

three digits indicate the site number. All MicroTICCIT sites have the same

site number 00."

The PDA stores information about the course structure such as the

number of units and number of lessons per unit. When a user is registered

for a TICCIT course, the System uses the course template to create a unique

user data file for that individual. Each user data file has the .PD extension,

e.g., 0000002200.PD. The first nine digits correspond to the user's

identification number (up to 9 digits with leading zeros). The tenth digit

indicates the relative entry of the course in the authorization file for that

user. Each user may be registered In from 1 to 10 courses; therefore, the

tenth digit can be from 0 to 9. In the example above, this user (ID 220) was

registered in this course first. If the same user were registered in a second

course, the file created would be named 000000220I.PD.

111-5
Part III: Installing Course 20, 19K BNCOC CMI System

If you LIST the system files, the filename will appear without the

leading zeros, e.g., 2201.PD.

Whenever the user logs on the System, he must enter a course

number. TICCIT searches the authorization file to determine if the user has

been registered for the course and locates the user's .PD file corresponding to

that course and loads it into TICCIT's core memory. See Figure 1, Log on

Procedures and the .PD file, below. The .PD file is updated depending on the

user's actions. For example, information related to time spent in each lesson,

results of tests, etc. is stored in specific areas of this file. Based on data

stored in the .PD file, the display that was on the terminal when the user

logged off can be rebuilt and the user can resume course activity at the same

location when he logs off again. When the user logs off, the contents of his

.PD file are rewritten into the first 16 sectors of the file.

Figure 1, Log On Procedures and the .PD File

STEP ONE STEP TWO STEP THREE

User logs on TICCIT validates the TICCIT loads the first

indicating his course and ID number 16 sectors of the user's

ID number and and find the disk .PD file into Core Locations

course number. address of the user's 0 - 77778.

.PD file corresponding

to the course.

The user's .PD file exists as a disk file, 18 sectors long (each sector is

256 words). The disk address of the .PD file is stored in the system

authorization file (REGISTER.AF). Locations 0 to 77770 (Sectors 1 to 16) are

called the "lower data area" of the "user permanent data area." Sector 17 is

an index to the .PD file which contains data about the size and contents of the

file. Sector 18 and beyond contain data regarding the length of time in a

lesson or test, number of test attempts, and other student progress data. See

Figure 2, Structure of the User Permanent Data Area, below.

The 19K BNCOC CMI System (Course 20) only accesses data in the .D

area, described below in Figure 2. When a student takes a TICCIT Test online, the system writes also data to the .T area (See Figure 2). The CMI

System does not read or write to that area.

The information in the PDA is all data; that is, no programs are

included. In addition to the PDA, executable TICCIT modules which are used

frequently by the user are stored in core resident. Other TICCIT modules are

stored on the disk. They contain TICCJT functions which are not used as often

and so are loaded into memory only as needed.

II-
Part III: Installing Course 20, 19K BNCOC CMI System

Pigure 2, Structure of the User Permanent Data Area

Location in Octal Description

0 to 1240 Fixed data, not dependent on course in which user

is enrolled

1241 UMAX, the name of the location which contains

number of units in the course and the beginning of

the .D area

1242 Location that stores value which indicates whether

a student has passed the course

1243-1270 Two words for each unit, word one contains the

Unit data and word two contains the pointer

(address) to the Lesson Table for that Unit.

1271-1382 Lesson Tables which vary in length depending on

the number of lessons per unit; word one contains

the number of lessons in a specific unit followed by

V one word for each lesson in that unit.* 19K BNCOC

for Tank Commanders (Course 19) consists of 11

units and a total of 61 lessons.

Following the Lesson Tables is workspace for

system modules required by the user.

10000 The .1 area. This is the .PD index area which

contains information about the size of the lesson

tables area (.L) and the size of the test Tables area

(.T).

11400 The .L area which contains information about each

lesson. Each lesson is assigned 6 words.

11800 The .T area which contains information about each

test taken by the user, including each test attempt.

Data area entered in the order in which the user

accesses the test. This area Is optional and is only

created when the user takes a test. The data here

are used to create Student Progress Reports about

test results.

' See Figure 3, Lesson Tables in the .D Area, for a detailed explaination of the

data contained in each word.

w.

111-7

€ ."-, ,' ,-,/, : , ,.'- ,<., .- - - ,_,- ,o - -., .-.-.-. - ..--. ;, -.- , / .- ,., ., , '. ' .' , N,. .N 
p - -. . . - - .- . - - 

rwrwwrrr .... w wr gvr-r , r V -  =2 4 4. o . - . , - - . 4 - -.- -_

Part Ill: Installing Course 20, 19K BNCOC CMI System

r. r+ Lesson Tables In the .D Area

In the .D area of memory TICCIT locates data related to each lesson of

the course. The SRDBI function allows a programmer to access this area

which stores the information required by the CMI System to produce the 19K

BNCOC Master Record. The specific data of interest are the pass/fall status of

each lesson and the number of test attempts. The programmer can access

the specific word in memory that contains these data by knowing the unit

number, thus accessing the word that contains the lesson pointer. Then by

knowing the specific lesson number of interest In that unit can locate the

information. Actually, ADAPT allows a programmer only to access a specific

byte, so all values must be doubled when positioning the pointer in the file to

read specific data. In addition, all values must be converted from octal and

entered in decimal. For example, Location 1241 which contains the number of

units in the course is the octal value.

Information in the Lesson Table Is stored by bit position, not by single

bytes. Thus a mask must be developed to interpret data for use by the CMI

system. See Figure 3 below, Lesson Table In the .D Area.

Figure 3, Lesson Tables in the .D Area*

II10101010111010101010101010 11111

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 12 131415 16

S This user has passed the test on the first attempt.

The first bit (reading from left to right) is either a I or a 0 depending

on whether the student has passed (1) or not passed (0). The next two bits

are empty and therefore always contains zeros. The next three bits hold the

* value for the number of test attempts. (A maximum of 7 are allowed by the

TICCIT; however a maximum of 3 are allowed in BNCOC courses.) The next

seven bits hold the value of the test score. These bits are not turned on by

taking the Lesson Test. The test score is stored, however, in the .T area.

The final three bits hold the value related to the color or status of the user

in that lesson. These color values are NOT the same as the values of colors

used by authors. There are three possible values stored in these bits:

I (red, fail),

2 (yellow, not started yet), and

3 (green, passed).

Future TICCIT programmers working with the 19K BNCOC CMI System

should note that these same data are stored In the .T area; however, since

the test results in that area are stored in the order that the user takes the

tests, including each test attempt, access would be much more complicated

than accessing the same information In the .D area.

NS

5 !11-s
Part III: lnstallin4; Course 20, 19K BNCOC CMI System

ADAPT System Functions

The ADAPT authoring language includes several categories of system

functions, one of these is the SRDBI. The SRDBI.CS is the file that stores this

set of functions on the disk; however, there is only one function at the

present time in this file. The SRDBI.CS file is located on the System's Master

Directory (DMO). When the programmer calls the SRDBI function into the

course, TICCIT calls the module 701. The SRDBI function is designed to allow

the programmer to access specific areas of the PD file even when that user

is not logged on the System. The SRDBI is central to the functioning of the

19K BNCOC CMI System's off-line test results entry procedures since it allows

the program to examine or modifiy the contents of any student record.

Arguments include the specific data area of the .PD file, the byte position in

the file to be read or written to, the student identification number, and the

course number. The named areas of the .PD file are as follows:

1241 - .D Contains all course, unit and lesson data including

test results

10000-10377 .1 Index to the .PD file

10400-10777 .L COntains lesson data

10800- 2 .T Contains test results.

The end of the .D area depends on the length of the course in terms of

number of units and lessons. The size of the .T area depends on the

number of test attempts by the individual student. The 19K BNCOC system

allows the student to take a test a maximum of 3 times.

TICCIT's Method For Recording Off-Line Data

TICCIT has a means for recording off-line test results without the

complex programming method developed for the 19K BNCOC CMI System. An

V instructor can log on a course using eah individual student's ID number.

Then he can use the appropriate Proctor Function to turn the "map" green

for any unit, lesson or segment to indicate that the student has successfully

completed that activity or test. The disadvantage of this method, of course,

is that the instructor would need to log on for each student, access the

appropriate course area, select the Proctor function, change the data, log off,

and then repeat the process for as many students as there are in the course.

This method is still available to the instructor even though the CMI

System is in place. However, instructors are not likely to be given training

in understanding TICCIT maps in an environment where the light pen and

ADAPT menus are used to develop courseware. Despite the use of menus

, instead of the TICCIT map, TICCIT itself still "thinkso in terms of maps.

~III-,I
Part III: Installing Course 20, 19K BNCOC CMI System

Roster Files

The CMI System (Course 20) uses the TICCIT Roster File to built its own

system files. The Roster File which has the extension RO includes the

mailbox number and the identification number of all students registered in a

particular course and section. The first three digits of the file name

correspond to the course number and the last two digits correspond to the

section number. The file is located on the TREGISTER or REGISTER directory.

Each registered student is allotted three words of information (six

bytes) in the Roster File. The first two bytes contain the student's mailbox

number, and the last four bytes contain the student's identification number.

Information obtained from the Roster File by the 19K BNCOC CMI System is

used to access information stored in the REGISTER.AF file described below.

Register.AF (TICCIT System File)

Register.AF is a file created and maintained by the TICCIT operating

system. It is a contiguous file which allots each registered user a 64 word

area. Areas are ordered according to the user's mailbox number. Each area

contains the user's name and other information about each course for which

that person Is registered (up to 10). The 19K BNCOC CMI System (Course 20)

accesses this file using the mailbox number obtained by searching the Roster

File (described above) and gets the name of the student.

19K BCOC CMI System Files (Files created by Course 20)

The CMI system creates a file called MRCCCSS for each section of

students using the 19K BNCOC for Tank Commanders (Course 19). "CCC* is the .course number and *SS" is the section number. For example, a file might be

named MR01900. This file is located on the Master Directory, DMO. It is a

random access file which contains information about the student's

identification number and and all of the student performance data required

to build and print the 19K BNCOC Master Record. Data are stored in ASCII

format. The MR file is updated using the appropriate menu option within the

Course 20.

Three listing files are also created in order to print the BNCOC Master

Record. The contents of these files depend on the current course and section

number being accessed by the user. More information about these files is

included under the heading OCMI System File" on Page 111-26 in this section of

the Manual.

111-10
Part 11: Installing Course 20, 19K BNCOC CMI System

Using the 191 BCOC CMI System with Another Course

Course 20 can be modified so that the CMI System can be used to

manage a course other than 19K BNCOC (Course 19). Instructions for

modifying Course 20 are included in Part X of this Manual. Using the

System with another course, such as 19E BNCOC, for example, requires

modifying or replacing the menus within Course 20. A word of warning:

This procedure requires thorough understanding of both Course 19 and Course

20 and should only be attempted by an experienced ADAPT programmer, not a

courseware developer. Knowledge of the TICCIT operating system is

absolutely required.

More Information

Additional information about Course 20 may be found in Part X,

Revising Course 20, in this Manual. The TICCIT operator will find complete

documentation of the TICCIT system in Hazeltine manuals provided with the

System II by Hazeltine Corporation. A third source of information are the

RDOS manuals available from Data General.

Summary of the 19K BNCOC CMI System Capabilities

1. Allows an instructor to log on Course 20 using his own ID and

enter off-line test results for all tests and all students in a single section by

writing data directly to the .D area of the users' .PD files.

2. Allows course managers to maintain separate records for

several sections of BNCOC students during a single cycle or over the course of

several cycles, up to 99 sections.

3. Allows for a maximum of 15 students to be registered into one

section.

4. Maintains records of test results for all 19K BNCOC tasks and all

Prerequisite tasks including tests taken on-line and those administered offline.

5. Produces a Master Record indicating the GO/NOGO status and the

number of test attempts required by each student for the entire 19K BNCOC

course Including the Prerequisite Tasks.

6. Produces a record indicating the total number of NOGO test

results for each student in a section.

'I-l

I lll-% I
Part III: Installing Course 20, 19K DNCOC CMI System

blank page

1 1
Part 111: Installing Course 20, 19K BNCOC CMI System

Makecourse Instructions For Course 20

Introduction Course 20 contains the programs which allow 19K

BNCOC instructors to enter off-line test results and

to print the 19K BNCOC Master Record.

Updating an Existing

Course 20 If Course 20 already exists on your system and no

changes to the unit and lesson structure have been

made, ski thi teip.

0 If no changes are needed, you should next

process the courseware and source graphics.

* If the unit and/or lesson structure has changed,

skip to the last section of these directions,

*Modifying Course Structure."

Course Number 20

Course Name DE

Course Title 19K BNCOC CMI SYSTEM

Module Range Enter the course number of an existing c .rse at

your site, e.g. "19" or other course on your System.

CAUTION: Do not type the module range numbers

(e.g., 120000-129999). Doing so will adeletee all

existing courseware in that module range. Be

sure you know what you are doingl

Number of Units 3 Enter a K In the first three spaces.

Press GO to continue.

Number of Lessons Enter a K in the number of spaces indicated below

for each unit. Press 60 for the next unit.

Unit 1 -- I

Unit2-- 1

Unit3-- I

Press SKIP to advance to the next screen.

Start Window Press GO to accept the default value.

111-13
Part Ill: Installing Course 20, 19K BNCOC CMI System

Number of Active

Windows Type "9" and press GO.

The number you choose relates to the maximum

number of active lessons students will be allowed

to work in at any one time.

Graphics/Audio

Directory Enter the number of the graphics directory used at

your site. If in doubt, ask your Site Manager or

Hazeltine's Customer Service Department. This

directory must exist at your site. See the Hazeltine

TICCIT Operations manual for instructions about

creating directories.

Source Courseware

Directory Type "DEPAULTTALO unless you have installed a

different courseware directory at your site. This

directory must exist at your site.

Source Graphics

Directory Type "GRAPHICS" unless you have installed a

different source graphics directory at your site.

This directory must already exist on your disk.

Number of ObjectiveTest Attempt Blocks Press GO to accept the default value.

Extended Data Area The CMI System does not use an extended data

area to store data. Press EXIT to record the

structure for this course.

Course Template

Pile Name You will see the following message on your screen

which indicates that the course structure for this

course has been recorded on your disk.

PDA020000 created

The first three numbers refer to the course

number. You may omit the leading zero when

referring to this course. The last three numbers

refer to the site number. All MicroTICCIT sites

have "000" as the site number.

V111-14
Part III: Installing Course 20, 19K BNCOC CMI System

Warning If you use Makecourse to change any aspect of the

course structure, all users (including authors,

operators, instructors) must be re-registered In

order to access the revised course structure.

Never make changes in the course structure

during a BCOC cycle. Even checking the

course structure using the "Modifying the Course

Structure" utility (described below) results in a

new PDA template. So, do not even attempt to

check the existing course structure in the middle of

a BNCOC cycle.

Modifying the

Course Structure To change the course structure,

0 Select item *1, *Modifying the Course

Structure" from the Makecourse menu.

* Follow the instructions above, entering new data

as appropriate.

*Remember that any changes to the course

structure will require you to re-register all users

in the course. All student performance data will

also be destroyed. Never change the course

structure during a BNCOC cycle.

IIi

4 |||
Part IIl: Installing Course 20, 19K BNCOC CMI System

Loading Course 20 From Tape

Introduction Complete these procedures on-line (at the

MicroTICCIT terminal).

Procedures * Put the tape in the tape drive.

* Log on Course 0 and select the Operator Menu.

* Select the File Utilities Menu.

Load Courseware

Files * Select DIR (Type "19 ).

* Type: DM0: DECW 1 .

. Press EXIT.

* Select LOAD (Type "8 ").

FILE 1: MTO:4 (Type "MT0:4" and press ENTER.) 2

PILE 2: DE-.CW (Type "DE-.CW" and press ENTER.) 3

Press ENTER again to begin the LOAD. The name

of each file will appear at the bottom of the screen.

Press ENTER to continue until all files are loaded.4

'

DMO is the Master Directory name for the TICCIT System II. "DECW" is

the source courseware directory for Course 20, the 19K BNCOC CMI System.

2 MT0:4 is the name of the file containing the source courseware for

Course 20. MT0 is the name of the tape device. "4" is the name of the tape

file. Several files may be stored on the same tape. They are usually

numbered consecutively. The tape containing the 19K BNCOC courseware

contains eight files numbered from 0 to 7.

3 DE-.CW is the name of the source courseware files you are going to

load. ODE" is the name of the course. Using the wildcard character "-"

will load all files which start with the letters "DE" and end with the

extension ".CW."

4 The name of each file will appear at the bottom of the screen as it is

loaded. You may change the name of the file before pressing ENTER. This

procedure allows you to change the names of the files as they are loaded on

the disk if necessary.

I-
Part Ill: Installing Course 20, 19K BNCOC CMI System

Load Course Graphics 0 Select DIR (Type "19 "),

* Type: DM0: DESGS .

* Press EXIT.

* Select LOAD (Type "8 ")

FILE 1: MT0: 5 (Type "MTO:5" and press ENTER.) 6

FILE 2: DE-.SG (Type "DE-.SG" and press ENTER.) 7

Press ENTER again to begin the LOAD. The name

of each file will appear at the bottom of the screen.

Press ENTER to continue until all files are loaded. 8

Quick Method Before you press ENTER to begin the load, press

RULE. On the next screen, press TAB to advance

the cursor beside the prompt: LISTING FILE. Type

an "l a. Press ENTER to return to the first screen.

Then press ENTER to begin the load. All files will

be loaded without any further action from you.

'IR

.

5 DM0 is the Master Directory name for TICCIT System 1I. "DESG" is the

source graphics directory for Course 20, The 19K BNCOC CMI System. To use

these instructions for loading other graphics, replace the prefix "DE" with

the name of the course to load.

6 MT0:5 is the name of the file containing the source graphics for

Course 20. MTO is the name of the tape device; "5" is the name of the file.

7 DE-.SG is the name of the source graphics files you are going to load

"DE" is the name of the course. This format will dump the entire course.

Using the wildcard character "-" will load all files which start with the

letters "DE" and end with the extension ".SG."

a The name of each file will appear at the bottom of the screen as it is

loaded. You may change the name of the file before pressing ENTER. This

procedure will allow you to change the names of the files as they are loaded

on the disk.

I11-17
Part III: Installing Course 20, 19K BNCOC CMI System

Batch Processing Courseware for Course 20

Introduction Before you can use the courseware files you have

loaded, you must process them. Processing a

source file creates an object file (also called a

TICCIT module) for each source file.

Procedures 0 Log on Course 0 and select the Author Menu.

* Select the Author Utilities Menu.

* Select Run Courseware Batch Processor

(Item *5).

Process courseware at all levels. Processing will

take varying amounts of time depending on how

long the courseware is. Other authors will not be

able to use the processor until you are finished.

Enter the TICCIT Labels as follows:

DE (Processes all course level files)

DE.* (Processes all unit level files)

DE.*.* (Processes all lesson level files)

DE.*.*.* (Processes all segment level files)

* The asterick () is the wildcard indicating that

you want ALL files at that level (including all

extensions) to be processed.

* All types of files (standard, test, APT, etc.) will

be processed.

, Press ADVICE for additional information.

Next Step Process the Course 20 source graphics files.

,

,

111I-Is

P%

.- r%
dr L W. iu1iSt.4iLi1 Cuut e 20, i9K b&COC LMi 6y5L~ff1

Batch Processing Graphics for Course 20

Introduction Follow these instructions to process source graphics

which have been loaded from tape to disk.

Procedures * Log on Course 0 and select the Author Menu.

" Select the Graphics Utilities Menu.

" Select Batch Graphics Processor.

* Enter the courseware location; e.g., DE.

" Enter the name of the Source graphics directory;

e.g.,.DESG.

* Type "Y" beside the prompt: DISPLAY ERROR

MESSAGE.

* Type "Y" beside the prompt: PROCESS LINK

GRAPHICS.

* Type "N" beside the prompt: FORCE HIGH

RESOLUTION.

Be sure that graphics have been dumped in

unproceased form before reprocessing.

Note: Always unprocess graphics files before

dumping them to a tape file or disk file or

transferring them to another location on the disk.

When you "unprocess" a file you are actually

deleting the object file so that you can dump or

transfer the source file. The file will require

processing (changing back to object) at the new

course location before it can be accessed by

students within a course.

* Press ENTER to begin processing. These

instructions will process all source graphics

associated with the named course.

Next step Register users in Course 20 using the Interactive

Registration Editor.

111-19

jI

4,_. ,,, ."''"' '.. '. £ % ? ,....'% , ''': :. -"" "''"" ,':''.."v% . --.. .... '

I j *,~s" ," . m ' . ,r.r '", . l - ,v "

,rW. ,. r. ,- . _! ,.- . # ..'. r'Ms W ,,.,," ,, ,.,4 * . , ,' ," P ,.1 r' .,4.'.,,, ,' ,-* *",I .-. " •,, -,. *,. . -"*'-* '
Part III: Installing Course 20, 19K BNCOC CMI System

Registering Users For Course 20

Important! Install Course 19 and register student users

before proceeding with these instructions.

Introduction Before you can use Course 20, you must register

users in Course 19 and create a TICCIT Roster File.

(See "Creating a TICCIT Roster File" in Part 11 of

this manual.)

Procedures * Log on Course 0 and select the Operator Menu. ' Select the Registration Menu.

" Select the InterActive Registration Menu.

" Register only instructors or operators into

Course 20. 9

e Assign instructors an IN (instructor) mode and

-an IN (instructor) authorization code. 10

e It is essential that these users are

registered in instructor mode. Otherwise,

TICCIT's Advisor will attempt to analyze the

,A instructor's input in terms of a right or wrong

answer and may butt in at the most inopportune

times. Other unpleasant things will happen in an

unpredictable manner unless the authorized users

of the CMI system have the proper user modes and

authorization codes. ..

Next Step Create a TICCIT Roster File for each section of

students enrolled in Course 19 if you have not

already done so. See instructions in Part It of this

Manual.

To see and test Course 20 the way it will be presented to users, be

sure to register at least one user in instructor mode. Do not assign

instructors to a section.

10 Instructors must have an "IN" authorization code to access the

Instructor Menu from the Supermenu. They must also be registered in

Course 0.

111-20
Part III: Installing Course 20, 19K BNCOC CMI System

Contents of Course 20

Introduction Course 20, "The 19K BNCOC CMI System" contains

the programs that will allow BNCOC instructors to

enter test results from instruction conducted offline (i.e., not on MicroTICCIT). Since most of the

19K BNCOC tasks are taught and tested either in the

field or in the classroom without using

MicroTICCIT, instructors and other authorized

personnel will be entering most of the test results

using this course.

The Tutorial A complete on-line tutorial is part of Course 20 and

may be accessed from the Main Menu. Simply

touch the light pen to the TUTORIAL icon at the

bottom of the screen.

Main Menu Course 20 lists five choices on the Main Menu.

" Identify Course and Section

" Create/Update the Master Record File

* Review CMI Roster

" Enter Off-Line Test Results

* Create and Print BNCOC Reports

Mark an option vith your light pen. ~MAIN ME:NU

119K BNCOC CMI SYSTEM

" Identify Course and Section

" Create/Update Master Record file

" Reviev CMI Roster

" Enter Off-Line Test Results

" Print BNCOC Reports

IQUIT r ITUTORIAL

Course Icons The following icons (symbols) will appear at the

bottom of the screen in Course 20.

? Help Pages Go to the next screen or menu

Go back to the last screen or menu

M-NU Return to the previous menu

TUTORIAL Complete instructions for using Course 20.

RETURN Go back to the screen where you

accessed the ? icon.

111-21

Iq
Part III: Installing Course 20, 19K BNCOC CMI System

Identify Course

and Section Before you begin entering off-line test results you

must identify the course number and students'

section number .

* Mark the three digit course number with your

light pen. It will appear beside the word "COURSE."

If you make a mistake, mark the icon "START

OVER."

* After you enter the course number, mark the

box "ENTER SECTION." Then mark the two digit

section number.

COURSE: SECTION:

[ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0

START OVER MAIN MENU

Then mark MAIN MENU to return to the main

menu.

* Create/Update

Master Record File Only the TICCIT onerator should access this

This utility locates information about the course

"-A. you are managing. Unless registration information

changes (i.e., students added or dropped from the

Course 19) this program should be run only once

during each BNCOC cycle.

Note A TICCIT Roster file must be created for each

section of students enrolled in Course 19 before

using this program.

1.

a', III-22

j'
Part III: Installing Course 20, 19K BNCOC CMI System

Review CM1 Roster This utility allows you to review the names of

the students on the roster in a particular course

and section.

Before you select this option, you must enter the

course number and section (option 1). You will see

a list of students and ID numbers in the course and

section you selected.

COURSE: 019 SECTION: 00 DATE 07/17/85

ID 0 Name

213212312 Allen, 6eorge N.

849320192 Brown, Peter W.

* Mark MENU to exit and return to the Main

Menu.

Enter Off-Line

Test Results * Identify the course and section (see Option 1).

* Select a Task Cluster from the BNCOC Course

Menu.

•" Choose a task from the Task Cluster Menu.

" Enter the test results for each student enrolled

in the course by marking GO or OGO under the

appropriate Test Attempt number.

" Mark - to go to the next student.

" Mark ? if you need help.

L Mark Menu to return to the Task Cluster

Menu to select a different task.

Task Cluster: Task:

Title:

Student Name:

Student ID:

TEST ATTEMPTS

GO I NOGO I GO I NOGO I GO I NOGO

NO ATTEMPT ? MENU

Fixing Mistakes You can start over by marking the NO ATTEMPT

icon. This action changes all the test attempt boxes

to white which indicates no attempt has been

made.

Test Attempt Colors When you mark GO, the box will turn GREEN.

When you mark NOGO, the box will turn RED.

111-23
Part III: Installing Course 20, 19K BNCOC CMI System

Print BCOC Reports This option allows you to print the BNCOC Master

Record. The sub-menu offers three choices:

" Create and print FIRST Master Record

" Print existing Master Record

" Create an UPDATED Master Record

" Print End-of-Course Awards

Print BNCOC Reports

* Create and print FIRST Master Record*

a Print EXISTING Master Record

a Create an UPDATED Master Record

a Print End-of-Course Avards

* Select this option only once at the

start of each BNCOC cycle. Mark ? for

more information.

Ojtton I (used only by the TICCIT operator) will

read the data in each student's permanent record

file (PD) and will then print the Master Record

file. This process will take up to several minutes.

Otion 2 prints the current Master Record file and

Nwill not include any test results entered made since

the last update. To update the file see Option 3

below.

t reads the data in each student's

permanent record file and completely replaces the

data in the previous version of the Master Record

file. This process takes up to several minutes.

nOption 4 reads the data in each student's

permanent data file (.PD) and counts the number of

NOGO's each student received during the course.

The printed report lists each student in that section

and the total number of NOGO's each received.

111-24
Part III: Installing Course 20, 19K BNCOC CMI System

Master Record

Codes The 19K BNCOC Master Record lists each student

and the results of each test, including both off-line

and on-line tasks. Results are coded as follows:

NA = No attempt

61 = 60 on first test attempt

G2 = GO on second test attempt

63 = 60 on third test attempt

NI = OGO on first test attempt

U2 = O60 on second test attempt

N3 = NOGO on third test attempt

IN

'1 2

|!I-25
Part II: Installing Course 20, 19K BNCOC CMI System

CMI System Files

Introduction The CMI System (Course 20) will create several of

its own files which will be stored on the disk. It

uses other TICCIT files in the process. One of those

file is the TICCIT Roster file.

Creating a Roster

File The TICCIT operator must create a TICCIT Roster

File (a utility on the Student Progress Reports

menu) before instructors can use the CMI System.

The Roster File is a TICCIT system file that lists all

of the students enrolled in a particular course and

section.

The CMI Utility uses the data in the TICCIT Roster

File to create another disk file called MRCCC.SS.

where CCC is the course number and SS Is the

section number. This file holds the data required

to print the Master Record. These data are in ASCII

format.

CMI Files The CMI system will use certain TICCIT files and

utilities to do its Job. It will also create some new

files on the system disk. They are:

MRCCC.SS (where "CCC" is the course number

and *SS" is the section number). This file stores

the names and ID numbers of students registered in

a class. It also stored the student's performance

data for all 61 BNCOC tasks (including prerequisite

tasks). There may be several of these files on the

system, depending on how many different courses

and sections are being monitored by the Course 20

utilities. Example:

MR019.00 (Course 19, section 00)

Three listing files are created to print the Master

Record. These files are created once on each

system. Their contents depend on the current

course and section number being accessed by the

user.

IMRCCCSS.DS This file stores performance

data for the prerequisite tasks.

MRCCCSS. Li This file stores performance

data for BNCOC clusters B-D.

MRCCCSS. L2 This file stores performance

data for BNCOC clusters E-K.

Example:

MR0190*.DS (Course 19, Section 00)

III-26
Part IlI: Installing Course 20, 19K BNCOC CMI System

Installing the Modified SRDBI (Patch for TICCIT System 11)

Introduction These instructions will guide you in the installation

of the modified SRDBI function on a TICCIT System

II, Version 38,17. This function enables you to read

and write to the .D area of the user's permanent

data area files (.PD). This software is required to

use Course 20, The CMI System.

Required Tape Files These files are provided on a separate tape. Check

the label to be sure you have the correct tape.

Pile Name Directory Description

UC02.LB TSYSGEN System Library File

701 TPROGRAMS SRDBI System Module

1001 TPROGRAMS Error Handling Module

1009 TPROGRAMS Error Handling Module

Before You Start * Backup your system before beginning these

procedures as a safety measure.

* Bring TICCIT Up and place the tape containing the

files listed above in the tape drive. Be sure the

tape drive is on and the tape is in the writeprotected position.

Load the Library Pile -- UCO2.LB

* At the MicroTICCIT Terminal, access the MPOS

Pile Utility Menu.

* Select DIR (Type 019m).

Type "DM0: TYSYGEN" and press EXIT.

* Select RENAME (Option ).

FILE 1 UCO2.LB (Name of file to rename)

FILE 2 TEMPUO2.LB (New name of flie) 1 1

* Select LOAD (Type "8" ).

Type the tape file name (e.g., MT0:0) and

press ENTER twice.

(The System will display the name of the file being

loaded from the tape file at the bottom of the

screen.

* Press EXIT to return to the File Utilities Menu.

11 This is a recautionary action. In case something goes wrong, you can

change the name of the temporary file back to the original name.

111-27

XA2
Part 111: Installing Course 20, 19K BNCOC CMI System

Perform a Patch With

the System Debugger

* Press ATT'N and type "P" for Proctor.

* Type "D" for Debugger.

You will see a blank screen with the word "CORE"

at the bottom. CORE refers to the computer's

read/write (RAM) memory area.

* Press ATT'N to reach the screen where you will

initialize the correct directory.

* At the prompt: TYPE DIRECTORY SPECIFIER

BELOW, type "DM0* and press EXAMPLE. When

you see the message: Operation Successful, press

EXIT to return to the Debugger. * Press ENTIR to move the cursor to the left of the

screen where you can enter the file name to edit.

* Type: 'EPCO3817.CO. Be sure to begin with the

apostrophe (single quote).

You will see the first line of the file with the data

displayed in octal, e.g.

WORD POSITION DATA ASCII

000000 000000 Ip

& The cursor wil be positioned on the lower left of

the screen.

Type: BTFUNC+255

You should see the word position and data change

to something similar to the following:

042105 001000 0

Write down the word position (e.g., 042105) and

press EXIT.

You will use this number when you perform the

System patch described later in this section.

* Bring TICCIT Down as you would normally do at

the end of the day, but stop at the "R" prompt.

1.,

11|-28
Part Ill: Installing Course 20, 19K BNCOC CMI System

~Load the Now Modules Load the modules on the tape file at the Data

General console using these procedures:

0 At the R prompt,

Type "DIR DM0" (CR)

"INIT MTO" (CR)

"MLOAD/V/R/A MT:*" (CR)12

The MLOAD utility will load a TICCIT module into is

proper directory and location. When the System

has loaded the module, you will see the following

information on the display screen:

TPROGRAMS: 701

TPROGRAMS: 1001

TPROGRAMS: 1009

Configure the

nf e System Still working at at the Data General console with

TICCIT Down do the following:

* Type "DIR DM0" (CR)

"DIR TMSGEN (CR)

MSYSGEN (CR)

MSYSGEN is a program that configures the new

TICCIT System.

N.L If you get an error message at this point, see

the instructions below:

The System may respond: CANNOT READ FILE: UPRV

If this message is received, type:

MOVE/A/V TSYSGEN UPRV (CR)

Then continue with the instructions.

* While MSYSGEN is running, answer "NO" to all

questions except: CONFIGURE CORE RESIDENT.

Answer "YES. "

You will see the names of 3 files on the screen.

EPC03817.CO

EPCO3817.LS

EPC 3817.ST

* At the "R" prompt, type the following:

MOVE/A/V/R %MDIRX EPC03817.CO (CR)

MOVE/A/V/R XMDIRX EPC03817.LS (CR)

MOVE/A/V/R ZMDIRX EPCO3817.ST (CR)

a Bring TICCIT altheay. Down.

12 Check the tape label to find out the appropriate tape file number.

I1l-29
Part III: Installing Course 20, 19K BNCOC CMI System

Performing the

SPatch Bring TICCIT UP again.

2 * At the TICCIT Prompt (?) press return.

* The System will respond: MNEMONIC.

Type "CO" and press return.

* Press the NEW LINE key at the Data General

Console keyboard.

" At the TICCIT prompt (?) press Control-P (together)

" The System will respond: PATCH: -

" Type the number you wrote down from the

System Debugger. (The word address). Be sure to

use 6 digits with leading zeroes if necessary.

" Press the NEW LINE key again.

" The System will respond with the data stored in

that location.

On the next line, the System will present the word

location for you to type the new data.

Type 000654 and press return.

* Press Carriage Return twice.

The TICCIT System will be ready to perform system

functions using the "modifed SRDBI." 3

Test Program Follow instructions for loading Course 19 and Course

20 and run the programs in Course 20. If the patch

has been successful, the programs should perform

as described under "Contents of Course 20" provided

in this section of the Manual.

m., 13 The SRDBI function included with TICCIT system version 38.17 from

" Hazeltine will not access the .D area of the PDA unless this patch is

performed. The procedures described here produce a "modified" version of

the TICCIT software which should not affect other courseware on your

system. In the event that Hazeltine releases a new TICCIT version, you

should inform them that you are using Course 20 and a modified SRDBI

f unction.

5 i!1-30

--
Part IV: Day-tv-Day Operations

Part IV: Day-to-Day Operations

Table of Contents

page

Role of the TICCIT Operator P1-3

1. Bringing TICCIT UP IV-5

2. Shutting Down TICCIT IV-7

3. Backing Up the System IV-8

4. Changing the Proctor Password IV-1l

5. User Password IV-12

6. Accessing COURSELIST.LS IV-14

7. Set Page for TICCIT Printouts IV-16

IV- I
Part IV: Day-to-Day Operations

IV-2
Part IV: Day-to-Day Operation=

Role of the TICCIT Operator

The TICCIT operator is responsible for providing technical support to

the users at a MicroTICCIT site. The people who will use the system are"

the instructors and the students. At the Fort Knox site, MicroTICCIT will

be used to present only part of the 19K BNCOC instructional program.

Another major part will continue to be taught in classrooms or in the field.

Assisting MicroTICCJT Users

BNCOC students will spend six weeks using MicroTICCIT, then a new

group will arrive. During each cycle, the TICCIT operator will have students

to train and assist who have probably never used a MicroTICCIT before.

BNCOC instructors will only spend a small percentage of their time in

the MicroTICCIT lab. Many instructors will be unfamiliar with computers

and almost all will be unfamiliar with MicroTICCIT. The TICCIT operator

will have to train and assist these system users.

Someone always needs to be present in the MicroTICCIT lab to assist

students, not only with using MicroTICCIT, but just as importantly with

using the courseware. Such a person is called a Proctor. Since all BNCOC

tests on MicroTICCIT are restricted, a Proctor will be needed every time a

student wants to take a test. Students will also need assistance with

loading the proper videodisc at each MicroTICCIT station. Sometimes, the

TICCIT operator will serve as a Proctor. Instructors also may be trained as

Proctors.

Operators also run and maintain the system printer. They assist

users with videodisc players and keep track of the videodiscs which

accompany MicroTICCIT courseware.

Day-to-Day Maintenance

In addition to assisting students and Instructors as they use

MicroTICCIT, a TICCIT operator is also responsible for the day-to-day

maintenance of the system. These procedures and other useful instructions

are included in Part IV, Day-to-Day Operations:

" Bringing TICCIT UP (Page IV-5).

" Shutting TICCIT DOWN (Page IV-7).

" Backing up the System (Page IV-8).

* Changing the Proctor Password (Page IV-ll).

Other responsibilities may include:

* Changing the User Passwords (See Page IV-12).

* Accessing the COURSELIST.LS file to list courses on the System and

information about those courses (See IV-14).

* Managing the printer (See information about the "Set Page for TICCIT

Printouts" utility on Page IV-16).

IV-3

I a- 
Part IV: Day-to-Day Operations

Managing Courseware

TICCIT operators also manage courseware on the system. From time to

time, they must load new courseware, transfer courseware to other

systems, archive unused courseware. Part V, Courseware Management,

deals with those tasks.

Data Collection and Report Generation

Also, the TICCIT operator will assist in data collection and reporting.

Part VI, Data Management, has information about these tasks:

* Load the logging tape and run ITEM ANALYSIS reports.

* Print NOTE data reports.

* Archiving PDA data.

Managing Registration and Recordkeeping

A TICCIT operator's most important job is managing Registration and

keeping records about system users and courses that are on the system.

Recordkeeping chores are described in Part XIII, Recordkeeping.

IV4 .. W "

i

IV-4

-,p.

".
Part IV: Day-to-Day Operations

Bringing TICCIT "UP"

Introduction Bringing TICCIT "UP" means transferring control of

the computer from the Data General Operating

System (RDOS) to the TICCIT operating system

(MPOS). Ordinarily, you will bring TICCIT UP

from a "warm start." A "warm start" means

that the Data General has not been shut down

completely. Turning the Data General or its disk

drive off is not recommended.

MIcroTICCIT

Terminals When you come into the TICCIT lab, check the

MicroTICCIT terminal displays. The screen display

tells you whether TICCIT is UP (ready for action) or

DOWN.

9 If the screen is dark, press the ATT'N key. A

display will appear unless the terminal is off.

* To turn the MicroTICCIT terminal on, use the

ON/OFF switch on the right side of the IBM/PC

terminal. There must be a startup diskette in

Drive I to start up the MicroTICCIT terminal.

Startup Disks for the

IBM PC Hazeltine has furnished a startup program on a

floppy disk that should be kept in each MicroTICCIT

terminal's Disk Drive 1. Make backup copies of

the floppy for each MicroTICCIT terminal if

necessary. The disk is needed only if the terminal

has been shut off. Ordinarily, you should not shut

the MicroTICCIT terminals off.

'?I,
Part IV: Day-to-Day Operation5

Bringing TICCIT UP If you see a display saying that TICCIT is resting or

,A other message indicating that TICCIT is not ready,

you must bring TICCIT UP at the Data General

console. Follow these steps:

N* Press the CMD and ON-LINE keys (together). Then

,- press the ALPHA LOCK key. You will see two red

lights if the system is ready to accept a command.

& You should see the "FILENAME?" prompt on the

Data General console screen. This indicates that

RDOS is ready to accept a command.

6 Press the CR (carriage return) key.

* The system will ask you to supply the date

(M/D/Y). Type in this information and press the

CR key. The system will then ask you to supply

the time (H:M). Type in this information and press

the CR key.

* You will see a series of messages from the

system. Then the "" prompt will appear. Type

the word "UP" and press the CR key. The letters

must be uppercase.

* You will see another series of messages from the

system and then the TICCIT prompt "?" will

appear. TICCIT is ready for action. If you look at a

MicroTICCIT terminal, you should see the log on

screen.

* Take the Data General console off-line by

pressing the CMD key and the ON-LINE key

simultaneously. Then press the ALPHA LOCK key.

The two red lights on the keyboard should go out.

Dim the Data General console screen. These actions

" will prevent accidental use of the system.

'0

IV-6

Ja,~fCN % N.
Part IV: Day-to-Day Oprations

Shutting TICCIT "DOWN*

Introduction At the end of the day, TICCIT should be shut down.

Shutting down TICCIT means returning the control

of the system to RDOS. You will need to do this

before you back up the system. You should back up

at the close of any day when activity has occurred.

Hefre Shutting

TICCIT Down Use the MicroT1CCIT Network Controller to shut

TICCIT down.

@ BEFORE you begin, put the Data General Console

ON-LINE.

* Press the CMD and On-Line keys. The on-line red

light should now be on.

9 Press the CMD and ALPHA LOCK keys to be sure

what you type will be in upper case characters.

Shutting TICCIT Down

From The MlcroTICCIT

Network Controller Follow these steps:

sLog on Course Oand select the Operator Menu.

*Select TICCIT Shutdown.

*Check to be sure all users have logged off.

: When ready, press ENTER.

,All MIcroTICCIT screens should display the Shut

Down display in a few seconds.

* On the Data General console, you will see the

following message:

3817 TICCIT System I

Current System = TESYS

Master Device = DM0

Copyright notice also appears.

Steps to Take at the

Data General Console At the RDOS prompt "R",

"V type: "DOWN" and press return.

You should see the following response.

-" Master Device Released

FILENAME?

Perform the backup operations using instructions

on the following page.

I This information is valid only for TICCIT system "3817" which is

currently installed at the Ft. Knox MicroTICCIT site. The name of the

Master Device (the hard disk) is DMO on a System II. Master device names

device on a TICCIT System III is DPO.

IV-7
Part IV: Day-to-Day Operations

Backing Up the System

Introduction All of the TICCIT courseware that you use is stored

on your TICCIT system's hard disk. In addition to

the courseware, the disk holds the two operating

systems (RDOS and MPOS) and all of the utility

programs. Plus, your disk has the files that store

the performance data for 19K BNCOC students.

What is a backup? A backup is an exact copy of the programs and files

on the hard disk. You make this copy on magnetic

tapes. If something unforeseen happens, you can

load the contents of the tapes back into the system.

How often to backup? You should make backup tapes at least once every

day. You may need to backup more often if the

system has heavy use.

What is DISKMAINT? DISKMAINT is a system utility that checks the disk

for problems. You do not have to run this

program every day, but it can't hurt and it may

help! Unless you are doing something unusual,

you shouldn't have any errors. If DISKMAINT

does report problems, write down whatever

appears on the screen. Try to remember what

happened during the day. Then call the Hazeltine

Customer Service to report the problem. Finally,

write down whatever you did to correct the

problem.

Things to Know DMO is the name of the Master Directory of a

TICCIT System II disk drive. It is the "name" of

the disk.

The System II disk drive has a storage capacity of

50 megabytes. You will need 4 magnetic tapes to

backup this disk. No matter how much data

you have on your disk, you will always

use 4 tapes.

Each tape will store the contents of part of the

hard disk. Data on a disk is stored in sectors.

You will need to tell the system which sectors to

store on each tape. You will type the numbers in

octal (base 8) which is why you will never use a

number larger than 7.

The name of the tape drive device is MTO. You

will name the tape file using the number 0. You

will store all of the disk contents in one file.

IV-8
Part IV: Day-to-Day Operations

Backup Procedures FILENAME? Type DISKMAINT (CR) 2

System response:

DMOS 38.14 Eclipse Diskmaint.

OPTION: Type CHECK (CR)

DISK TO CHECK: Type DM0 (CR)

CHECK OPTION: Type GO (CR)

After a few moments, the System responds:

DMO

No check errors detected.

CHECK OPTION: Type LAST (CR)

301012 - Last Used Block 3

CHECK OPTION: Type QUIT (CR)

S Operation successfully completed.

OPTION: Type DUMP (CR)

DISK TO DUMP FROM: DM0

FILENAME OR SECTOR RANGE: 67777

TAPE FILE TO DUMP TO: MT0:0

TAPE FILE LABEL: DUMP 8/8/85 Tape 1 of 4

(This operation takes about 5 minutes.)

SYSTEM RESPONSE: OPERATION SUCCESSFULLY

COMPLETED

Loading a New Tape After each "Operation successfully completed"

message, remove the tape and insert a new one.

2 The abbreviation "CR" is used to remind you to press the carriage

return-key to enter the information into the computer's memory.

3 Use this number as the last number in the SECTOR RANGE for the last

tape file.

IV-9
Part IV: Day-to-Day Operations

Next tape: OPTION: DUMP

DISK TO DUMP FROM: DMO

FILENAME OR SECTOR RANGE: 70000, 157777

TAPE FILE TO DUMP TO: MT0:0

TAPE FILE LABEL: DUMP 8/8/85 Tape 2 of 4

Repeat two more times:

SECTOR RANGE: 160000, 247777

TAPE FILE LABEL: DUMP 8/8/85 Tape 3 of 4

SECTOR RANGE: 250000, 3010124

TAPE FILE LABEL: DUMP 8/8/85 Tape 4 of 4

When DUMP

is finished When the entire disk contents have been dumped to

the tapes, take the Data General console off-line

and dim the screen. You may bring TICCIT UP

again if desired. 5

*You can turn the MicroTICCIT terminals off, but

ordinarily this is not necessary.

N

4 This is the number you received when you used the CHECK OPTION:

LAST. You may also type a comma and leave the last number blank.

6 A screen can be permanently damaged by leaving the brightness on for

long periods of time.

IV-10
Part IV: Day-to-Day Operations

Changing The Proctor Password

Introduction You will use the Proctor Password to give students

access to restricted tests. To maintain test

security, establish a regular procedure for changing

the password. For best results, change the

password on a regular basis (daily, weekly, etc.),

and also change it at random intervals. Do NOT

select a mneumonic password that could be

discovered unexpectedly by a student such as the

Proctor's name, the TICCIT operator's name, or a

subject related password such as TANK. Passwords

may be from I to 6 characters. You can vary the

length of the words selected between four and six.

Procedures * Log on Course 0 and select the Operator Menu.

e Select the Data Base Operation Menu (Option

#4).

6 Select Set New Proctor Password (Option #5).

The current Proctor Password will be displayed.

* Type new password in the space. Enter from 1

to 6 characters (no blanks). Press ENTER.

4 You will receive the message "Operation

Complete."

* Press EXIT until you are back on the desired

menu.

Suggestion Make the password all capital letters. To enter the

password you will be required to press the cap lock

key down or use the shift key. This will be one

additional step which will hinder unauthorized use

of materials.

Recordkeeping Keep a record in a secure location of the Proctor

Passwords which have been used and the current

password.

Date Proctor Password

IV-1I
Part IV: Day-to-Day Operations

User Passwords

Introduction There is only one Proctor Password on the System

at any given time, but each user may have his

own unique password. If a user has a password,

he must enter it each time he logs on MicroTICCIT.

Changing User

Passwords * Log on Course 0 and select the Operator Menu.

" Select the Registration Menu.

" Select Interactive Registration.

" Decide whether this will be a change or a new

registration. Enter the appropriate responses in

the boxes.

* Complete the screen, entering a password in the

appropriate box. The user password must be four

characters. It may not contain spaces.

Removing a

Password To log on without a password, go to the

Registration Editor and select CHANGE. Enter all of

the information about the course and section but

enter nothing in the PASSWORD section of the

screen.

Press ENTER to record the new data.

You will receive a message "Operation Successfully

Completed. "

The password will no longer be required.

Checking on User

Passwords If an instructor or other user forgets his password,

the TICCIT operator can find out what it is.

" Select the Registration Menu.

" Select Examine User Registration.

" Type the user's name or ID number. The

Password will be displayed at the top of the screen.

IV-12
Part IV: Day-tv-Day Opuration3

Changing the

Password Via the

Student Menu Any System user Including students can change

their own password via the Student Menu.

* From any location within a course, press

ATT'N. Type 'x' and press ENTER to access the

Student Menu.

* Select option 6, Change Password.

Student Menu

1. Mailbox

2. Terminal-to-Terminal

3. User Directory

4. Change Courses

5. Videotapes

6. Change Passvord

7. Games

hen Page 1 Type a number an d press enter. ]

IV-13
Part IV: Day-to-Day Operations

Accessing COURSELIST.LS

Introduction Part of the TICCIT operator's job is to keep track of

the names of the courses currently on the system.

These instructions will show you how to find out

the names of the courses on your disk and to

display them on the MicroTICCIT terminal.

* Log on and select the Author Menu.

• Select the Author Utilities Menu.

* Select Makecourse.

* Select Print Courselist.

* If your system has a printer, select Print

then delete.

COURSELIST.LS COURSELIST.LS is the name of the listing file that

provides information about the courses on the disk.

If you do not have a printer, you can display this

information on the MicroTICCIT Terminal by

following these instructions.

Note: Do not confuse this "listing file" with the file

named COURSELIST. (with no extension). This file

must not be deleted from the System. It contains

the information about the courses on the disk that

TICCIT requires to access courses. Deleting this file

makes all of the courseware on the System

inaccessible.

Displaying COURSELIST.LS

on the MicroTICCIT

Terminal * Select Author Utilities Menu.

* Select Makecourse.

* Select Print Courselist.

* Select Print then delete.

* Now reenter Print Courselist again. This will

give you an updated list. This time press EXIT.

* Now select the Operator Menu.

e Select the Command Line Interpreter (CLI).

9 Type: DIR DMO (Press ENTER.)

* Type: EDIT COURSELIST.LS (Press ENTER.)

* Press EASY. The first page of the file will be

displayed.

* Press ADVICE for instructions on advancing

through the file.

IV-14

v-s ~ ~ . .N
Part IV: Day-to-Day Operation5

Interpreting

Courselist COURSELIST.LS has several kinds of information

about the courses on the disk that you may need to

know. The date this file was created will be listed.

sample

IA 110000 119999

9999 113321 31 3

ADAPT Training

Course name, starting module range number,

ending module range number, number of modules

in the module range, starting module number',

course number, graphics directory number.

* This is the first module in the module range with

IA courseware.

IV-15

law " ' 
Part IV: Day-to-Day Operations

Set Page For TICCIT Printouts

Introduction These instructions will guide you to the utility

which allows you to change or set the page size for

TICCIT printouts.

Procedures * Log on Course 0 and select the Operator Menu.

" Select the Database Operations Menu.

" Select Change Module Parameters (Item #8).

" Select Set Page Size for TICCIT Printouts

(Item *2).

* Note: The default or last entered values for page

size will appear in green. These may be changed

as described below.

* Enter the number of rows (page length) you wish

to appear on a page.

* Enter the number of columns (page width) to

appear on a page.

* Press ENTER to record the data. The system will

respond "Operation Complete."

VERSATEK Model 1100A Specify 126 as the number of rows.

Specify 209 as the number of columns.

K., VERSATEK Model V-SO Specify 68 as the number of rows. Specify 102 as the number of columns.

EPSON 1oo Add the information here when it becomes

-. available.

IV-16

. S-- S
Part V: Courseware Management

Part V: Courseware Management

Table of Contents

page

Managing Courseware V-3

1. Dump Courseware To Tape V-5

2. Dump Graphics To Tape V-7

3. Makecourse Instructions V-10

4. Loading Courseware from Tape V-13

5. Loading Graphics from Tape V-15

6. Batch Processing Courseware V-17

7. Processing Graphics V-18

8. Creating a Roster File V-19

9. Deleting an Entire Course (From the Disk) V-21

10. Deleting a Part of a Course (From the Disk) V-23

11. Listing Names of Files on a Tape V-25

V--
Part V: Courseware Management

-a

'l-w.

S.V-
Part V: Courseware Management

Managing Courseware

The first two procedures in Part V, Managing Courseware, are

-i instructions that you will use when you wish to transfer MicroTICCIT

courseware to a different TICCIT system or when you wish to archive (store)

,* a course on tape.

N. a Dump courseware to tape.

* Dump graphics to tape.

Be sure that you always include Makecourse instructions for the

courseware in your files or send them with the tape to the receiving site.

The next set of procedures are instructions that you will use when

you receive new MicroTICCIT courseware for 19K BNCOC. You will also use

these instructions when you load courseware you have archived on tape

back into the system. The procedures are given in the sequence you should

use to add new courseware.

e Makecourse (Creating a new course or modifying an existing course).

- Loading courseware from tape to your System disk.

* Loading graphics from tape to your System disk.

* Processing the courseware.

* Processing the graphics.

* Creating a TICCIT Roster File.

Also included here are instructions for:

* Deleting an entire course

* Deleting part of a course

* Listing names of TICCIT files on a tape.

V p-."

V-3

'V
q

Part V: Courseware Management

$

V

I.-

V

~4

'I.

* "

-I.

we.-

-hi.

4.'

-C.' -4

hi

tm

* .. 4. 4.

"p

*t4

Mt9

4-.-..

-4.--.

-'4,

-4

.4,.

V-4

A. 

-t

' 

~
Dump Courseware To Tape

Introduction You may wish to store a courseware file on a

tape for several reasons; for example,

* To transfer the file to a different site

o To make space on the hard disk for other files

Procedures o Put a tape in the tape drive.

9 Log on Course 0 and select the Operator Menu.

* Select the Pile Utilities Menu.

* Select DIR (Type #19).

a Type: DMO (This is the Master Directory.)

9 Type: BNCW.DR (This is the Courseware

Directory. Replace BN with the name of the

course you wish to dump.)

* Select DUMP (Option p9).

" DIALOGUE

PILE 1: MT0:O (This is the name of the file

you will dump the courseware to. MTO is the

name of the tape device; "0" is the name of the file.

If you dump several files to the same tape, you

should number them consecutively to keep track of

the materials you are transferring.)

Type MT0:0 and press INTER.

FILE 2: BN-.CW (This is the name of the file you

are going to dump. "BN" is the name of the course.

Replace those letters with the name of the course

you wish to dump. This example will dump the

entire course. (-) is a wildcard which means dump

all files starting with the letters "BN" and ending

with the extension ".CW.")

Type BN-.CW and press ENTER.

Press ENTER again to begin the DUMP.

The name of each file will appear on the bottom of

the screen. Press ENTER after each one until all

files are dumped.

Backup Copy Repeat the procedures above and make a second

copy of the file for safe keeping. Be sure to call the

next file MT0:l.

V-5
Part V: Courseware Management

Quick Method Before you press ENTER to begin the dump, press

RULE. On the next screen press TAB to advance the

cursor beside the prompt: LISTING FILE. Type an

"s ". Press ENTER to return to the first screen.

Then press ENTER to begin the dump. All files will

be dumped without any further action from you.

TICCIT Labels A COURSE NAME is always two letters. TICCIT files

or modules that store courseware have TICCIT

labels which correspond to their location within the

course. Examples:

BNO10203.CW Unit 1, Lesson 2, Segment 3

BNO50313.CW Unit 5, Lesson 3, Segment 13

Record the File

Names Be sure to write the names of the files you have

dumped on the tape (in this case BN-.Cw). You

must know the names when you reload the files.

Deleting Files A dump does not remove the file from the hard

disk. To remove the file, you must delete it.

Instructions for deleting files or courseware are

given separately in this manual.

Makecourse At The

Receiving Site Record the course structure on the tape. The

receiving site must establish a course to receive the

materials using the Makecourse utility. They will

need to know how many units the course has and

how many lessons each unit contains.

The receiving site must either use the course name

which corresponds to the coursename on your file

or change the name to match an existing course on

that system. Instructions for changing the file

names are included with "LOAD COURSEWARE"

instructions.

If your course has graphics, see *Dump Graphics To Tape."

Dumping Parts

of the Course BN010I0l.CW (unit 1, lesson 1, segment i)

BNO1-.CW (dumps all lessons and segments in

unit 1)

BNO102-.CW (dumps all segments in unit 1, lesson 2)

V-6
FAA-* V2 CWUS-W was- - Mtasv.wiai*

Dump Graphics To Tape

Introduction Courseware graphics must be dumped separately,

If the courseware you are dumping has no

graphics, then you can skip this entire section.

Procedures e Log on Course 0 and select the Author Menu.

* Select Graphics Utilities (item #4).

* Select Dump Source Graphics (SG DUMP)

(item*4).

Enter information on the display that follows.

(Suggested responses are given for each item. You

may can change the responses to match your

courseware and your particular needs.)

OUTPUT DUMP FILE: MT0: 0

LISTING FILE (optional): DMO: filename

LOCATION SPECIFIED: BN

NEW LOCATION SPECIFIER: BN

SOURCE GRAPHICS DIRECTORY: TGRAPHIC

DUMP LINKS? [Y]

DUMP UNPROCESSED FORM

OF GRAPHICS? [Y]

VERIFY DUMP TO SCREEN? [Y]

SELECT GRAPHICS TO DUMP? [Y)

Message: Graphic to Dump: TICCIT file name

[Press ENTER to dump the file.]

Final Message: Selected Graphics have been dumped.

Output Dump Pile This is the name of the file on the tape. MTO is

the name of the tape drive device. The number

following the colon (:) is the tape file number.

Number files consecutively on the tape. Be sure to

keep a record of the files you store on the tape.

Listing File The system will create a file that lists the names

of the graphics that you dump. You will store this

file on the Master Directory (DMO). Give the file

any legal name you choose; e.g., BNCOCPIXS.

Location The location is the name of the course where the

graphics are "located." If you type the name of

the course without additional specifiers (unit,

lesson), you will dump graphics for the entire

course.

v-7

_- -V 5 .
Part V: Courseware Management

New Location You may wish to dump graphics from one course to

another. You can type the name of the new

course here. For example, you may wish to

dump graphics from a course on your system

named BN to another course named GG. You can

also dump graphics from a specific part of a course

and change them to another location, e.g. from

BN.l.l to BN.2.1.

Source Graphics

Directory Youz source graphics are the unprocessed form of

the graphics. SGDUMP locates the unprocessed

form and "dumps" these files. Your source

graphics directory should be part of your course

template (Makecourse) documentation.

Links If the graphics are linked to other courses or other

parts of a course (if they are used in more than

one location, for example), link files exist on the

graphics directory. Ordinarily, you will want to

dump the links; so respond "Yes" to the question. If

they do not exist, no harm has been done.

Unprocessed

Graphics AjwavA dump the "unprocessed form" of your

graphics. Respond "Yes" to this question.

Verify Graphics If you respond "Yes" to this question, TICCIT will

display the name of each graphic before it dumps

the file. You will press ENTER each time. If you

want the entire file dumped and do not need to see

the names of each file, then you can respond "No"

to this question.

Select Graphic If you are planning to dump only "selected"

graphics from a "location," then respond "Yes" to

this question.

Record the

Pile Name * Write down the names of the files on the tape

label.

V-8
Pakt V1 CWUu-w#-W* i M IAflLVib

Makecourse

at the

Receiving Site You must also record the course structure on the

tape in order for the receiving site to load in the

course. The receiving site must establish a course

to receive the materials using Makecourse. They

will need to know how many units the course has

and how many lessons each unit contains.

The receiving site must either use the course name

which corresponds to the coursename on your file

or change the name to match an existing course on

that system. Instructions for changing the file

names are included with "LOAD COURSEWARE"

instructions.

I.I

V-9
Part V: Courseware Management

Makecourse Instructions

Introduction The TICCIT Makecourse utility menu consists of

several options. Makecourse creates a disk file

with the prefix PDA followed by the 3 digit Course

number and the site number. This file contains

the course template and is used by the System to

create individual user data files with the extension

.PD when a user is registered into a course. It is

very important to remember that users must be

re-registered after any change to the PDA file in

order to access the new course structure.

Procedures * Log on Course 0 and select the Author Menu.

* Select Makecourse.

* To create a new course, select Create a new

course from scratch.

* Complete the following dialogue substituting the

appropriate responses for your course.

Course Number 19 ( to 3 digits)1

Course Name BN (two alphanumeric characters)

Course Title 19K BNCOC FOR TANK COMMANDERS (up to 20

characters)

Module Range Enter the course number of an existing course at

your site.

You can also enter the module range where you

want the course to be located, e.g., 120000 to 129999.

WARNING: Typing in a module range will delete

all existing courseware in that module range. Be

sure you know what you are doing!

Number Of Units Enter the number of units in the course by typing

a K in the appropriate number of blocks.2 Press

GO to advance to the next screen.

Number Of Lessons Enter the number of lessons for each unit, typing

a K in each block. Press GO for the next unit.

Start Window Press ENTER to accept the default location or type

another location.

I The course numbers and names at each site must be unique. The

system will warn you if there is another course on the disk with the same

name or number. You do not need to type leading zeros i.e., 019 or 009.

2 A "K" will produce a black box on a TICCIT map indicating an "on-line"

course component. Other codes may be entered here indicating off-line

instruction, etc.; however, the CMI system is entirely menu driven, making

codes for TICCIT map colors extraneous information.

V-IO
re-t V: cuut.WAwSv vd*AI~dfvI&*tVht

Number Of Active

Windows Type a number from I to 9 and press ENTER.

The number you choose relates to the maximum

number of active lessons students will be allowed

to work in at any one time. We suggest allowing

the maximum number unless you have reasons for

doing otherwise.

Graphics

Directory Enter the number of the graphics directory at your

site. This directory must have already been

created. See the Hazeltine TICCIT Operations

manuals for instructions about creating directories.

Source Courseware

Directory Enter the name of the source courseware directory

at your site (e.g, DEFAULTTAL, COURSEWARE, etc.)

This directory must have already been created on

your disk.

Source Graphics

Directory Enter the name of your site's source graphics

directory, (e.g. GRAPHICS). This directory must

already exist on your disk.

*Number of Objective

Test Attempt Blocks Press ENTER. Accept the default value unless

otherwise Instructed by the courseware developers.

The system sets aside space for an average number

of 3 test attempts per lesson. If a course requires

more space, you may enter a larger number.

Follow the instructions given by the courseware

developers.

Extended Data

Area This section is optional. Enter the two character

name and the size in sectors of each extended data

area you wish to create. You can read and write

data to these areas using ADAPT's SRDBI function.

If extended data areas are required by the

courseware, the developers should provide the

name and sector size with their Makecourse

instructions.

If the courseware does not require extended data

areas, press EXIT.

V-1I
Part V: Courseware Management

Course Template

File name You will see the following message on your screen

which indicates that the course structure for this

course has been recorded on your disk.

PDAO19000 created

The first three numbers refer to the course

number. You may omit the leading zero when

referring to this course. The last three numbers

refer to the site number. All MicroTICCIT sites

have "000" as the site number.

Warning Do not use Makecourse to change the course

structure after the BNCOC cycle has begun.

Any changes in Makecourse destroy all

student data. All students would have to be

re-registered.

V-12

.4

I, ! " .
Part V: Courseware Management

Loading Courseware From Tape

Jntroducton Complete these procedures on-line (at the

MicroTICCIT terminal).

Procedures 0 Bring TICCIT UP if you have not already done so.

* Put a tape in the tape drive. Be sure the tape

drive is on and the tape is in the read only

position.

" Log on and select the Operator Menu.

" Select the File Utilities Menu.

" Select DIR (Type "19").

" Type: DM0: BNCW 3

" Press EXIT.

" Select LOAD (Type "8").

FILE 1: MTO: 0 (Type MTO: 0 and press ENTER.) 4

FILE 2: BN-.CW (Type BN-.CW and press ENTER.) 5

Press ENTER again to begin the LOAD. The name of

each file will appear at the bottom of the screen.

Press ENTER to continue until all files are loaded.'

3 DM0 is the Master Directory for the TICCIT System II. "BNCW" is the

source courseware directory for Course 19, 19K BNCOC for Tank Commanders.

You would replace the letters "BN" with the course initials of the course you

are loading.

4 MT0:0 is the name of the file containing the source courseware you

are loading onto the system. MT0 is the name of the tape device and "0" is

the name of the file on the tape. If the courseware you are loading is stored

on the tape in a file other than "0", you would substitute that number into

this command (e.g., MT0:1).

5 BN-.CW is the name of the source courseware you are going to load.

"BN" is the name of the course. If the course initials are different for the

course you are loadiag, substitute those letters for "BN." This format will

load the entire course. Using the wildtard character "-" will load all files

which start with the letters "BN" (or the initials you have substituted) and

end with the extension ".CW."

6 The name of each file will appear at the bottom of the screen as it is

loaded. You may change the name of the file before pressing ENTER. This

procedure will allow you to change the names of the files as they are loaded

on the disk. You will use this procedure when you load courseware from

other MicroTICCIT projects which will be placed into BNCOC Course 19.

V-13
Part V: Courseware Management

Quick Method Before you press ENTER to begin the load, press

RULE. Press TAB to move the cursor beside the

prompt: LISTING FILE. Type an "*." Press ENTER

to return to the first screen. Then press ENTER to

begin the load. All files will be loaded without any

further action from you. Note: You would not use

this method if you needed to change the names of

the files before loading them into the system. See

Footnote 6 below.

TICCIT Labels A COURSE NAME always has two letters. TICCIT

files that store source courseware have TICCIT

labels which correspond to their location within the

course.

Examples:

BNO10203.CW Unit 1, Lesson 2, Segment 3

BNO50313.CW Unit 5, Lesson 3, Segment 13

Loading Parts

of the Course Enter the appropriate TICCIT file name beside the

"FILE 2:" prompt. See examples below.

BN0I1010.CW (unit 1, lesson 1, segment 1)

BNO1-.CW (loads all lessons and segments in

unit 1)

BNO1O2-.CW (loads all segments in unit 1, lesson 2)

Next Step Now load the source graphics from the tape.

The instructions are presented on the next

page of this manual.

V-14

--- ~~& %X d *
Part V: Courseware Management

Loading Graphlcs From Tape

Introduction Source graphics for a TICCIT course are dumped in

separate files on the tape. If the courseware you

are loading has no graphics, then you can skip this

entire section. These procedures are very similar

to those for loading source courseware except that

you will load these files on the source graphics

directory. These files have the extension ".SG."

Procedures 0 Be sure the tape is in the tape drive.

* Log on Course 0 and select the Operator Menu.

" Select the File Utilities Menu.

" Select DIR (Type "19").

" Type: DMO: BNSG7

* Press EXIT.

* Select LOAD (Type "8").

FILE 1: MT0:l (Type MTO:I and press ENTER.) 8

FILE 2: BN-.SG (Type BN-.SG and press ENTER.) 9

Press ENTER again to begin the LOAD. The name of

each file will appear at the bottom of the screen.

Press ENTER to continue until all files are

-'loaded. 1 0

7 DMO is the Master Directory name for the TICCIT System II. BNSG is

the source graphics directory for Course 19, the 19K BNCOC ADAPT course. To

use these Instructions for lo,'ding other source graphics, replace the prefix

"BN" with the name of the other course.

8 MTO:1 is the name of the file containing the source graphics to be

loaded. MTO is the name of the tape device and "I" is the name of the file on

the tape. Make sure that you respond to the File I prompt by typing the

correct MTO:n file name. Check the label on the tape to see the file name

holding the source graphics to be loaded.

BN-.SG Is the name of the source graphics file you are going to load.

"BN" is the name of the course. You may replace those letters with the

name of another course you wish to load. This format will load the graphics

in the entire course. Using the wildcard character "-" will load all files

which start with the letters "BN" and end with the extension ".SG."

to You may change the name of the file before pressing ENTER. This

procedure will allow you to change the names of the files as they are loaded

on the disk. You would use this procedure when you load source graphics from other MicroTICCIT projects which will be placed in the 19K BNCOC

course structure.

V-15
Part V: Courseware Management

Quick Method Before you press ENTER to begin the load, press

RULE. Press TAB to move the cursor beside the

prompt: LISTING FILE. Type an "*." Press ENTER

to return to the first screen. Then press ENTER to

begin the load. All files will be loaded without any

further action from you.

Note: You would not use this method if you needed

to change the names of the files before loading them

into the system. See Footnote 10 below.

V.1

J.

aI.

V-16a_. a- 
Part V: Courseware Management

Batch Processing Courseware

Introduction Before you can use the Courseware files you have

loaded, you must process them. When you process

a file you are creating a separate object file or

TICCIT module 11

Procedures a Log on Course 0 and select the Author Menu.

* Select the Author Utilities Menu.

* Select Courseware Batch Processor (#5).

Process courseware at all levels. Processing will

take some time depending on how long the

courseware is. Other authors will not be able to

use the processor until you are finished. Enter the

TICCIT Labels as follows:

BN (Processes all course level files)

BN.3 (Processes all unit level files)

BN..* (Processes all lesson level files)

BN...* (Processes all segment level files)

* You can substitute the name of another course

for "BN.

" The asterick () is the wldcard indicating that

you want ALL files all that level (including all

extensions) to be processed.

* All types of files (standard, test, APT, etc.) will

be processed.

* Press ADVICK for additional information.

Next step Process source graphics files if the course has

graphics. Otherwise, register users for the

course.

1 After the installation has been completed, you may wish to delete the

source courseware files from the disk. Keep the tape containing the source

courseware files for backup purposes. Deleting the source courseware has

two results: You will have more space on the disk for other courseware.

You will also be unable to make changes in this course from the ADAPT

editor. See Part VII of this Manual for information about TICCIT modules.

V-17
Part V: Courseware Management

Processing Graphics

Introduction Follow these instructions to process source graphics

which have been loaded from tape to disk.

Procedures * Select the Graphics Utilities Menu.

* Select Batch Processor.

* Enter the courseware location; e.g., BN or other

course name.

* Enter the name of the Source graphics directory;

e.g. BNSG.

* Type "Y" beside the prompt: DISPLAY ERROR

MESSAGE.

0 Type "Yu beside the prompt: PROCESS LINK

GRAPHICS.

e Type "N" beside the prompt: FORCE HIGH

RESOLUTION.

* Press ENTER to begin processing. These

instructions will process all sour-e graphics

associated with the named course.

Check Graphics * After processing, you must register a student in

the course to check the graphics.

Next Step Register users in the course using the InterActive

Registration Editor.

rI1
Part V: Courseware Management

Creating A Roster File

Important This file must be created before attempting to use

Course 20, The 19K BNCOC CMI System, which

includes utilities for entering off-line test results

and printing the BNCOC Master Record.

Introduction The TICCIT Roster File utility creates a file on the

system listing the identification number and

mailbox number of each student registered in a

particular course and section. The CMI System

will use these data to locate information about the

student in the TICCIT authorization files.

BNCOC personnel could maintain two or more

rosters by registering different students into

different sections of the same course.

Registration

Procedures * Select the Operator Menu.

& Select the Interactive Registration Menu.

* Type the student's name last name first.

* Assign a unique ID number.

* Enter course number and a Section two digit

section number.

* Assign a four character password if desired.

& Give students an ST mode and and ST

authorization code.

& Press ENTER to record the registration data.

Important! * TICCIT will assign the ST authorization code by

default if you do not enter information in the box.

# TICCIT does not require you to enter a section

number. However, you will not be able to create

a TICCIT class roster file unless students are

registered into a particular section.

Create the

Roster Pile * Select the Instructor Menu.

* Select Student Progress Reports.

* Press GO to advance to page 2 of the menu.

* Select Build Class Roster (Item *7).

* Enter the course number (e.g., 19).

* Enter a two ditit section number. This number

must include leading zeros if necessary.

* Press HARD to create the TICCIT Roster File for

this section. This file will be located on the

TREGISTER Directory under the name 01900.RO.

The first three digits represent the course number

and the last two represent the section number.

9 V-19
Part V: Courseware Management

More than

one section If you are creating more than one section of

students for a course, repeat the process above for

each section.

Changing the

Roster Pile If students are added or deleted from the 19K BNCOC

course during a cycle, the TICCIT Roster file must

be recreated using the procedures above. Avoid

making changes in registration after a course cycle

has begun.

The CMI Roster Pile See Instructions for creating a CMI Roster File in

Part III of this Manual. The TICCIT Roster File is

required to build the CMI System File.

V-20
Part V: CVU*'W"rv Mftavt wait

Deleting An Entire Course

Introduction Thes instructions should be followed only when

you wish to delete an entire course from the disk.

Be sure to archive the source to tape first using the

instructions for DUMPING COURSEWARE. A dump

transfers only the source to the tape.

To delete a course completely from the disk you

must remove the object and source files for both

the courseware and the graphics.

Object is the processed (machine language) version

that is accessed in student mode.

Source is the unprocessed version that is accessed

in author mode through the ADAPT, APT, or

GRAPHICS editors.

Saving Disk Space If space is required on the disk, you may wish to

delete only the source version of courseware

and graphics.

Deleting Object

Courseware & Log on Course 0 and select the Author Menu.

Select the Courseware Utilities Menu.

Select Makecourse.

* Select Delete an Entire Course.

* Enter the course name and number as required.

This process deletes the object modules and the

PDA. You will no longer be able to access the

course in student mode. Author mode will still be

available. Reprocess the courseware to access in

student mode again.

* Go to the Interactive Registration Menu and

delete all registered users. See Page V-20 for

instructions.

4

V-21

r '.1% %, ',%.NMI -.
Part V: Courseware Management

Deleting Source

Courseware Use these procedures when you want to delete

only the source courseware. The course will no

V longer be accessible in author mode but will be

available to students.

* Log on and select the Operator Menu.

* Select the Pile Utilities Menu.

* Select DIR (*19) and type DMO to initialize (open)

the Master Directory. Press EXIT.

* Select DIR and type the courseware directory of

the course to be deleted: e.g., AACW.DR

(Substitute the name of your course for the letters

"AA.") Press EXIT.

" Select DELETE.

" At the FILE NAME prompt, type AA-.CW to delete

the entire course. (Substitute the name of your

course for the letters "AA." )

Deleting Object

Graphics * Log on Course 0 and select the Author Menu.

a Select the Graphics Utilities Menu.

* Select the Batch Process Graphics option.

* Type the course name (e.g., AA).

* Select Unprocess Graphics. (This deletes the

object graphics and leaves only the rource graphics

on the disk.)

Deleting Source

Graphics & Select the Operator Menu.

" Select the File Utilities Menu.

" Select DIR (#19) and type DM0 to initialize the

Master Directory. Press EXIT.

a Select DIR and type AASG.DR. (Substitute the name

of your course for "AA." You are initializing the

"Source Graphics Directory." Press ZXIT.12

" Select the DELETE option.

" At the prompt FILE NAME, type AA-.SG. This will

delete all the source graphics files associated with

the course titled "AA."

Clean Up

Registration To clean up the registration environment, go to the

Registration Menu and drop all users registered for

the course you have deleted from the disk. It is

important to make "Clean Up" procedures a regular

part of your TICCIT maintenance operations.

12 You may access the source graphics directory in one step by selecting

DIR and typing DMO:AASG.DR.

V-22
ph&"~ V CWUfibWW&- dasv 3wef.4v.*.b

Deleting Part Of A Course

Introduction There may not be enough space on your disk to

store all of your courseware at one time.

Thes instructions will help you delete specific

portions of the 19K BNCOC course (Course 19) as well

as parts of other courses on your system disk.

See 'Deleting An Entire Course" for additional information.

Deleting Object

Courseware * Log on Course 0 and select the Author Menu.

* Select ADAPT EDITOR.

* Type the specific section of the course to be

deleted, e.g., BN.3.S; BN.3.1.S.

In the "Further Options" box, type "2" for Delete.

and press ENTER.

* TICCIT will ask if you are sure you want to

delete the material. If you do, press HARD. To

return to the Editor without deleting the file, press

EXIT.

Deleting Source

Courseware e Select the Operator Menu.

* Select the Pile Utilities Menu.

. Select DIR (*19) and type DM0 to initialize (open)

the Master Directory. Press EXIT.

* Select DIR and type the courseware directory of

the course to be deleted: e.g., AACW.DR. (Substitute

the name of your course for the letters "AA.").

Press EXIT.

* Select DELETE.

* At the FILE NAME prompt, type the specific TICCIT

label for the file or files you wish to delete.

AA03O01l.CW deletes unit 3, lesson 1, segment 1.

AA03-.CW deletes all of unit 3.

AAO1O1.-CW deletes all segments of unit 1, lesson 1.

Deleting Object

Graphics 9 Select the Author Menu.

* Select the Graphics Utilities Menu.

* Select the Batch Process Graphics option.

* Type the course name (e.g., AA).

* Select Unprocess Graphics. (This changes the

object graphics to source graphics.)

V-23

MAX.
Part V: Coursware Management

Deleting Source

Graphics * Select the Operator Menu.

* Select the Pile Utilities Menu (*19).

* Select DIR and type DM0 to initialize the Master

Directory. Press EXIT.

* Select DIR and type AASG.DR. (Substitute the name

of your course for "AA." You are initializing the

"Source Graphics Directory." Press EXIT.

* Select the DELETE option.

* At the prompt FILE NAME, type the TICCIT label

for the specific portions of the course you wish to

delete.

AAOlO01.SG deletes graphics associated with Unit 1,

lesson 1, segment 1.

AA01-.SG deletes all graphics associated with unit 1,

all lessons, all segments.

Warning Do not drop students from the course if you are

only deleting part of the course. Make no changes

in registration. Do not remove the unit or lesson

from the course template using Makecourse unless

you are between course cycles and the change will

be permanent.

V-24
Part V: Courewar W maneavwnt

Listing Names Of Files On A Tape

Introduction You may wish to list out the names of files stored

on a tape. These instructions will assist you.

Procedures * Turn the Tape Drive On.

* Put the tape in the drive.

* Log on and select the Operator Menu.

Select the File Utilities Menu.

Select LOAD (Option *8).

e FILE 1: MTO:O (Type the name of the tape

device and the file to list.)

e FILE 2: Press HELP.

The name of the first file contained in tape file

MTO.0 (or the number you chose to enter) will be

displayed at the bottom of the screen.

*Continue pressing HELP until all the files are

listed.

Important: If you press ENTER, the System will

LOAD that file on the disk.

* To list the contents of the next tape file, change

the file number beside the FILE 1 prompt and

press HELP as described above. For example, the

next file on the tape would be MTO: I.

V-25
Part VI: Data Management

Part VI: Data Management

Table of Contents

Spage

1. Developer Use of the NOTES Utility VI-3

2. NOTES Instructions to the User VI-4

3. Retrieving and Storing NOTES Data VI-5

4. Collecting Logging Tape Data VI-8

5. Retrieving Logging Tape Data VI-10

6. Using the COLLEGE Utility VI-11

7. PDA DUMP VI-12

.

VI-1

*~~~~2 - el "r,...*~
Pan VT: Data hWaIttBV*tWkt

N

-N

I'

4

S

*0~

'I.

9.

VI-2

* *~S4 b ~>
Part VI: Data Management

Developer Use of the NOTES Utility

Introduction As a TICCIT courseware developer or as an

evaluator of courseware, you may wish to gather

informal responses from the courseware users or

instructors. TICCIT provides an easy method for

collecting these types of data using the NOTE key

and TICCIT utilities which collect and store data.

How the NOTE

Function Works At the top left of the MicroTICCIT keyboard there is

a key labeled NOTE. Any person engaged in a

TICCIT course can press this key at any time. The

course is interrupted and a blank screen appears

for the user to type a message. Once finished the

user has the option of leaving the message signed or

unsigned. TICCIT records the user's message and

the location in the course when the NOTE key was

. pressed. The user returns to the same location in

the course.

Data Storage TICCIT stores NOTES data in a disk file located on

the Master Directory called DISKNOTES.LG. It is

NOT necessary to put in a logging tape to collect

these data. Complete instructions for retrieving

the data are provided for TICCIT operators on page

VI-5 in this section of the Manual.

NOTES Output The NOTES function stores the following

Sinformation about each input:

%* User name (if given)

* Course/section

* Unit.Lesson.Segment

* Function/Part/Level/Item

* User message

',

VI-3

j.7 ~ ~ . p- - .
J 

R w

Part VI: Data Manaremnrnt

NOTE Instructions To The User

Introduction Developers or evaluators should provide

instructions to all users from whom they wish to

collect NOTES data. Instructions are included in the

19K BNCOC MicroTICCIT Instructor's Tutorial and

Reference Manual.1

A

Purpose Comments about the MicroTICCIT courseware as it

is used can assist the instructors in evaluating and

monitoring the courseware. MicroTICCIT provides

an easy method to gather information.

Procedures * Find the NOTE key at the top left of the

MicroTICCIT keyboard.

* When you are logged on MicroTICCIT, press the

NOTE key at any time you wish to make a

comment about anything you see on the screen.

* You will immediately see a blank screen. Type

your message. Use the Left Arrow key to erase an

error if necessary.

* MicroTICCIT will record the name of the course

you are using and specific information about the

exact location in the course. It will also record

your message.

* You have a choice between leaving a SIGNED or

an UNSIGNED message.

* Find the MAP and the EXIT keys on the far

right of the MicroTICCIT keyboard.

" Press EXIT to record a SIGNED message.

" Press MAP to record an UNSIGNED message.

Re-entering the

Course You will automatically resume the course at the

exact location at which you left. Press the NOTE

key any time you wish to leave another message or

a comment.

, The 19K MIcroTiCrr hstruotor's Tutorial *nd Refm Maima was deyvee byj nteAmerioa

Research Associates (Augut 1985) as a part of the CMI fel' Tank Commanders project.

VI-4

" ,tL( t ,"J'4 O' ," - - -" -". - . - " - " " " .-.- ,< ' ' " ". - . " ".". ," " . " '.'. "'.e
, q 

Part VI: Data Management

Retrieving And Storing NOTES Data

Introduction The purpose of TICCIT's NOTES utility is to allow

you to collect comments about your courseware

from system users and to retrieve that information

either at the MicroTICCIT terminal or in a printout. Instructions will be provided below for

systems with or without printer capability

NOTES Data Storage User comments will be entered at the MicroTICCIT

terminal any time while they are logged on and

using a TICCIT course. Those comments will be

stored automatically on the Master Directory (DM0)

in a disk file called DISKNOTES.LG. The NOTES

utility stores the message along with the user's

name (if given), the course and section, and specific

information about the location of the user in the

course including: unit, lesson, segment, function,

part, level, and item.

Retrieving NOTES

Data On-line To retrieve the NOTES data at the MicroTICCIT

terminal follow these steps:

o Log on Course 0. You must be registered for this -,1

course as a TICCIT operator.

" Select the Operator Menu.

" Select the Command Line Interpreter (CLI).

" Type EDIT DM0: DISKNOTES.LG and press ENTER

* Press EASY.

The first NOTE message will be displayed on the

screen. Type "5" and press GO to advance to the

next message. Continue until all messages have

been displayed and then EXIT the editor.

Retrieving NOTES

Data Off-line You may also display NOTES data when TICCIT is

DOWN on the Data General Console screen. Follow

these procedures:

* At the "R" prompt, type:

TYPE DMO: DISKNOTES.LG

(Note: TYPE is an RDOS command which lists out

an ASCII file on the DG display.)

The contents of the file will scroll by. You may stop

. the display by pressing CTRL-S and resume

scrolling by pressing CTRL-Q. To exit and return

to RDOS, press CTRL-A. (Note: As an example of

using the CTRL key, pressing CTRL-S means that

you hold down the CTRL key at the same time as

you press the S key.)

VI-5

44 -., .. . ..•. . % ' *""" "" """" ""%"i" ""% " "" '" ' " " 5"'. -. ',• "" ,"". . , "" "..% . . "" .% . ..'"'""'
Part VI: Data Management

Printing NOTES Data

On-line Follow these procedures at the MicroTICCIT

terminal:

" Log on Course 0 and select the Operator Menu.

" Select #8, Data Reduction Menu.

* Select #5, Notes Menu.

You will see two options:

1. Print Student Notes from Log Tape file (NOTES)

2. Print Student Notes from Notes Disk File

Select #2 and press GO to print the default system

file, DISKNOTES.LG.

Printing the

NOTE Data off-line If your TICCIT system has a line printer, you may

use the off-line TICCIT utility, NOTES.SV to produce

a print-out of the DISKNOTES.LG file. Follow these

procedures:

* Bring TICCIT DOWN.

* At the "R" prompt, type: DIR DMO.

* Press the CR key (carriage return).

* Type NOTES.SV log filename and press the CR

key to run the utility.

a Important! COLLEGE must be available on the

disk to run this utility. The off-line utility

COLLEGE is described on another page in this section

of the manual.

Without a printer, you will receive the message:

UNIT NOT ON LINE.

Archiving NOTES

Data on Tape You may wish to archive NOTES data on a daily or

weekly basis. Or, you may wish to archive NOTES

data related to a particular course. Regardless of

your purpose, the procedures are as follows:

* Bring TICCIT UP. Place a tape in the tape drive.

Be sure the tape drive is on and the tape Is in the

write position.

" Log on Course 0 and select Operator Menu.

" Select the File Utilities Menu.

" Select Option #19, Type DM0, and press ENTER.

" Select Option #9, DUMP.

" File 1 MT0:0 (Name of tape file)

" File 2 DISKNOTES.LG (Name of file to dump)

Vl-6

Lwwwwil! Rim0M -l
Part VI: Data Management

Transferring the

ROTES File to Disk * BRING TICCIT UP. Place the tape containing the

file to load in the tape drive. Be sure the tape drive

is on and the tape is in the Read position.

* Log on Course 0 and select the Operator Menu.

& Select the File Utilities Menu.

* Select Option *19, Type DM0, and press ENTER.

* Select Option #8, LOAD.

0 File 1: MT0:0 (Name of tape file)

Press ENTER twice.

TICCIT will display the name(s) of the file to be

loaded.

Note: There could be several files stored in one tape

file. You may change the name of the file if

desired before loading in on the disk.

* You may now follow the procedures for

displaying the contents of the file on the screen or

printing the file.

Deleting the

DIEKUOTES File Usually, you should delete the DISKNOTES.RG file

when you have recorded the data to avoid storing a

long file with useless data on the disk. TICCIT will

automatically create a new DISKNOTES.RG on the

disk when the NOTE utility is invoked.

V! -7 Si i 

r
Part VI: Data Management

Collecting Logging Tape Data

Introduction The purpose of these instructions is to allow you to

store student performance data on a logging tape

for processing using TICCIT utilities such as ITEMS

and ITEM ANALYSIS REPORTS.

Initiating

Logging Procedures The ADAPT courseware your students are using

will automatically log student performance data if

the logging tape has been turned on, unless the

ADAPT programmer has included other

instructions. Operators should check the

documencation included with each piece of ADAPT

courseware.

* Turn the tape drive on (if necessary) and place a

tape marked LOGGING DATA in the tape drive. The

tape must be in the Write position.

* Bring TICCIT UP if you have not already done so,

leaving the Data General console in the ON LINE

position (the ON-LINE light should be on). The

ALPHA LOCK light should also be on.

e At the TICCIT prompt "?", type CTRL-L and press

the CR key. (Note: Pressing CTRL-L means you

press the CTRL key and the L key simultaneously.)

You will begin the following DIALOG:

SYSTEM: CURRENT LOGGING = mm ann

NEW LOGGING MODE:

USER: Type SF or SV and press return.

See Logging Modes below for an

explanation.

SYSTEM: NEW LOGGING FILE:

USER: Type "ann" and press return.

a = add

nn= the number of the logging file

(from 00 to 99)

Note: If you attempt this dialog without a tape in

the drive, you will receive the message:

LOGGING TAPE NOT READY: 10404.

VI-8
Part VI: Data Management

Initiating Logging

Procedures (cont.) If you get the message described in the previous

paragraph, press the CR (return) key twice to

restore the TICCIT prompt. Place the tape in the

drive and continue. You must complete this dialog

or the system will freeze.

Type NL when the System asks for NEW LOGGING

MODE to exit without logging.

* When the Dialog has been completed, take the

Console off-line by pressing the ON-LINE key and

the CMD key simultaneously. Then press the

ALPHA LOCK key. Both the ON-LINE and ALPHA

LOCK lights should go out. Continue with the day's

usual activities. As students use courseware, you

will hear the logging tape come on and off.

Logging Modes The following logging modes may be entered:

NF No logging desired

SF Log selected users (Students); include fixed

data only

SV Log selected users (Students); include fixed

and variable data

LF Log all users; include fixed data only

LV Log all users; include fixed and variable data

Changing Logging

Modes Use CTRL-L while TICCIT is UP at the DG Console

and complete the dialog above.

Deactiviating the

Logging Mode Type CTRL-L while TICCIT is UP and type NL or

shut TICCIT DOWN.

VI-9
Part VI: Data Management

Retrieving Logging Tape Data

Introduction You will conduct these procedures at the

MicroTICCIT terminal.

Creating a

Logging File Before you can print out an ITEM ANALYSIS REPORT

you must transfer the logging file from the tape to

the disk.

2 The size of a logging data file can quickly

become very large. Be sure you are collecting only

the type of data you need, e.g., student or all, and

fixed and variable plus fixed. Delete the disk file

after you have extracted your report data. You

may wish to maintain an archive file on tape.

" Log on Course 0 and select the Operator Menu.

" Select the Data Reduction Menu.

" Select TRANSFER LOG TAPE to DISK FILE

(LGXFER)

* Enter the name of the tape file, e.g. MTO:00 (nn)

" Enter a DISK FILE NAME. This file name will

store the output on the disk. You may assign any

name you want to this file. A standard approach

might be to begin with the prefix LOG and use the

current data; for example:

LOG081185 (Log for August 11, 1985)

* If you do not enter a file name, the System will

automatically assign the name DROnnn.LS. This

file is a message file which will contain error

messages related to your logging tape records.

e TICCIT creates a file with the extension ID and

stores it in the REPORT.DR when you run the item

analysis program.

Off -line Reports You may also run the off-line data reduction

programs ITEMS.SV and WEEKLY.SV.

KEEP CAREFUL RECORDS OF THE NAMES OF YOUR TAPE AND DISK

FILES.

VI-lO

w, * : ji
Part VI: Data Management

Using The COLLEGE Utility

Introduction If you list the files on your system's Master

Directory (DM0), you will find a program called

COLLEGE.SV. This program creates a file called

COLLEGE with no extension which contains the

name of the institution or MicroTICCIT Site. This

name will be printed out on TICCIT's data reduction

reports, e.g., Student Progress Reports, Item

Analysis, etc.

Procedures e Bring TICCIT down. You will be working at the

Data General console (off-line).

* At the R prompt, type COLLEGE.SV (CR).

* You will see the following prompt:

ENTER NAME OF COLLEGE:

* Type the name of your site or institution and

press return. The name cannot exceed 26

characters.

Important Various TICCIT data reduction utilities will not

work unless the COLLEGE file exists. Hazeltine

usually installs this file on your disk. The name,

however, may not match the name of your site or

institution.

VI-"I

%I %

LL't - -A.
Part V1- Dnl.iti Manaitirent

PDADUMP

Introduction You will use this *off--line" TICCIT utility when you

want to store the contents of the PDA for Course 19

or other courses on a tape. The PDA file stores the

student performance data.

Procedures e Bring TICCIT "DOWN."

0 You should see the "R" prompt at the Data

General console.

e Put a tape in the tape drive.

9 Type: Dir DM0: TREGISTER

9 Type: INIT MTO (to dump to tape).

" Type PDADUMP/V MTO: 0 01900/C

" Press the CR (carriage return) key.

MTO: 0 is the name of the tape file.

"0190 is the course number.

0000 is the students' section number.

/V means Verify file as it is being dumped. The

individual student data files with the .PD extension

will be displayed.

/C means include only files that match this course

and section.

Result The result is a list of .PD files in that section or

course.

VI-12
Part VII: TICCIT Hints

Part VII: TICCIT Hints

Table of Contents

page

1. TICCIT System Specifications and Parameters Vl1-3

2. The TICCIT System Operator (SYSOP) VII-5

3. Understanding TICCIT Modules VII-6

4. Courseware Modules Vll-8

5. The TICCIT Command Line Interpreter (CLI) VII-9

6. The TICCIT Registration Directory VII-10

7. Break Files V11-t1

8. Review Graphics VIl-12

9. Changing the TICCIT Graphics VII-13

10. Current Module Directories Vii-14

ll. Changing Module Parameters VII-15

V1ll-1

I"'

4

~Vll-I
Part VII: TICCIT Hints

N

VII-2
Part VII: TICCIT Hints

TICCIT System Specifications And Parameters

Core Memory The "core memory" is another term for Random

Access Memory (RAM). The amount of "core"

determines the size of the program or programs

that can be in memory at one time. The contents

of "core" will change as you use TICCIT

courseware. The MicroTICCIT system has a core

memory size of:

256 K (256,000 WORDS OR 512,000 BYTES)

Hard Disk Storage How much space you have to store programs and

data files on your system at one time depends on

the size of the hard (or fixed) disk. The TICCIT

System 11 has one fixed disk which stores:

50 Megabytes (50 Million Bytes)

Course Structure Each TICCIT course has certain limitations

regarding the number of units and lessons it can

have. Those limitations are:

Maximum Number of Units per course 30

Maximum Lessons Per Unit 30

Maximum Segments Per Lesson none

Course Names Every TICCIT course must be assigned a name. A

course name consists of two characters. Examples

are:

BN, IA.

Course Numbers Every TICCIT course must be assigned a course

number. This number is used to identify the course

when a user logs on. A course number may be

from one to three numbers. Legal course numbers

are from:

I to 564.

Course 0 is the name of the TICCIT course

containing the TICCIT utilities which are accessed

from the Supermenu.

Section Numbers Students may be enrolled into sections which

consist of two digits from 00 to 99. A section

number must be assigned to access class

performance data from the Student Progress

Reports menu. A student cannot be enrolled in two

sections in the same course.

VII-3
Part VII: TICCIT Hints

Screen Colors TICCIT assigns a meaning to certain colors in its

Student Progress Report menus and TICCIT maps.

The colors and their meanings are:

RED FAILED

GREEN PASSED

YELLOW IN PROGRESS

BLACK NOT STARTED YET

WHITE SUGGESTED DESIGNATOR FOR OFF-LINE

LESSONS OR UNITS

Other Color

Uses TICCIT utilities (in Course 0) also use colors in

standard ways.

RED SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES

CYAN FATAL SYSTEM ERRORS TO BE

REPORTED TO HAZELTINE

BXCOC Courseware

Colors MicroTICCIT courseware designed for 19K BNCOC

uses the standard TICCIT colors such as RED for

failed, GREEN for passed. Developers of Course 19,

the menus for the 19K BNCOC courseware, have

also chosen to use cyan in a special way:

CYAN Indicates an area where a student

may mark with his light pen.

i

VII-
Part VII: TICCIT Hints

The TICCIT System Operator: User *1

Introduction The SYSTEM OPERATOR (SYSOP) is a special user

established by Hazeltine when the TICCIT system is

installed at a site. The SYSOP is the first user in

the TICCIT authorization file. The SYSOP's mailbox

number is always I. The "default" password is

LORD (all uppercase ). You can use the SYSOP's

number and password to LOG ON with

authorization to all parts of the system in an

emergency. You can and should change the SYSOP's

password.

Important! The SYSOP and the TICCIT site

operator should not have the same user ID. That

is, the "person" acting as the TICCIT operator

should be registered in Course 0 with his own

user ID with the authorization code of SY.

Never register the SYSOP in another course.

Password You can change the SYSOP's password or any other

user's password on the system using the

Registration Editor.

All user's may have different four character

passwords but there can only be one proctor

password.

See the sections on PASSWORDS for more

information.

VII-5

I

* s
Part VII: TICCIT Hints

Understanding TICCIT Modules

What is a Module? A module is a special kind of TICCIT file which is

used to store ADAPT courseware as well as TICCIT

system programs. System modules are numbered

from I to 3999 and are stored in the TPROGRAMS

directory.

Module

Characteristics A module is a contiguous file.

It has a numeric name and no extension.

samples

120000, 701, 1001, 123987

Module Directories To store courseware you must have a module

directory which you create with the TICCIT

BUILDMD utility.

Types of Modules There are two kinds of modules:

COURSEWARE MODULES that store only data.

EXECUTABLE MODULES that are operated by

TICCIT.

Finding Module

Ranges There are two ways to get information about the

module ranges that exist on your disk and which

store courseware. If you want to know the

module range for a specific course use the

COURSELIST information. If you want to create a

new module range and need to find out which

range is open, find the current module directories

on the disk by this process:

* Log on Course 0 and select the Operator Menu.

& Select Data Base Operations Menu.

* Select Current Module Directories.

The display will appear as follows:

Home Module Dir Start End Mod

"- 0 TPROGRAMS TPROGRAMS I 3999

Sp.

TPROGRAMS is the name of the Module Directory

Q which stores the TICCIT system modules These

modules begin at number I and end at 3999.

S.S

VII-6

"~~~~~..'. % %.* - ' S . % ". *% . " * ". % .",. % .,% . . is ~" " "" % % ' . " n . . - . - .

1aa ." "S, -. . - 4 "- . . ." " • ".t 5 .- " " 4 " -. , - • 4 -" "- - -" " - "
Part VII: TICCIT Hints

Module ID To get an idea of how courseware modules work:

- Log on Course 0 and select the Operator Menu.

* Select FILE UTILITIES MENU

0 Type "17," MODULE ID.

* Press RULE.

* Type the module start and end range for a - .-. course on your system, e.g. 120000 and 129999.

The first module in that directory will be the BIT

MAP. Each module in that directory has an entry

* .in this module.

*"Press ENTER to see the contents of the next

>-, module. You will see the module number and the

TICCIT label of the courseware stored in that

module.

4. -

'- A VII-7
Part VII: TICCIT Hints

Courseware Modules

Module Location

in Core Memory A module is always loaded by TICCIT into memory

locations 4096 to 8181 (decimal). Its size cannot

exceed 4096 words.

Object Courseware Courseware modules store the object (processed)

form of the courseware. The object courseware is

what the student sees when the courseware is

accessed. Only the object form needs to exist for

the students to use the courseware.

Source Courseware The source courseware is stored separately in

regular MPOS files with TICCIT labels such as

BNOl02O1SI.CW. These files must be present to

enter the course from the ADAPT or APT editors.

V',,

}'4

VlI-8
Part VII: TICCIT Hints

The TICCIT Registration Directory

Introduction TICCIT stores binary data in octal code (base 8).

However, you ordinarily input data using decimal

(base 10). Sometimes, however, you will see a

mixture of octal and decimal data in system

output screens. The Registration Directory is an

examples.

Regsterei Users ID* Mailbox Code Password

Albert, Henry 124 20 04

System Operator 01 01 177777 LORD

ID Numbers The ID Number can be up to 9 numbers and is

displayed in decimal.

Mailbox Numbers The mailbox number is displayed in octal! The

mailbox number represents the order in which the

users were registered on the system. Henry

Albert's mailbox number (see above example) is 16

in decimal.

Security Code The security code of "04" indicates that Henry is

registered as a student. The security code is also

in octal.

System Operator The System Operator (SYSOP) is the first registered

system user. The SYSOP is registered by Hazeltine

as part of the installation process. The security

code (177777) is the highest possible security level.

NQtj The System Operator is not the same as user

types: operator or system programmer.

Passwords The password is displayed in ASCII characters.

Security Codes Every registered TICCIT user has a security code

assigned at the time that user is registered in a

course. There is only one security code per user.

Therefore, when the user is registered in another

course (or changes are made to a registration), care

must be taken to enter the desired security code.

User Categories Memonic Catesory Octal Value

ST Student I

PR Proctor 2

IN Instructor 4

OP Operator 10

SY System Programmer 20

Recordkeeping Print out a list of authorized system users on a

regular basis.

VIlI-tO
Part VII: TICCIT Hints

Break Files

Introduction TICCIT creates a separate Break file for each

terminal on the system. These files store error

reports and are useful for authors. Break files,

however, can become extremely large and take up

a great deal of space on the disk and serve no

purpose in an instructional environment. They

should be deleted at regular intervals. Break files

are stored on the Master Directory, DMO.

Check Break File

Size Check the size of the system Break Files at the

TICCIT CLI or the MPOS FILE UTILITY.

* Type DIR DMO

" Type LIST BREAIOOO.BR (Terminal 0)

" LIST BREAKOOI.BR (Terminal 1), etc.

Delete Break Files Use either the TICCIT CLI or the MPOS FILE UTILITY.

From the CLI:

* Type DELETE BREAKOOO.BR (or appropriate

name)

From the MPOS File Utility:

" Select DIR and type DM0.

* Press EXIT.

" Select DELETE and type the name of the break

file.

Print Break Files If you have a line printer, you may print Break

files using the utility on the MPOS FILE UTILITY

Menu, PRINT BREAK.

List Break Files Select LIST from the MPOS File Utilities Menu

and type BREAK000.BR. The last three numbers

Indicate the terminal number. For example,

BREAK001.BR is the file created at terminal #1.

Wildcards You can use a wildcard to list all break files on the

disk.

* Select the MPOS File Utility Menu.

* Select LIST.

" Type BREAK-.BR. - Press ENTER ENTER. (Press ENTER twice.)

Using the LIST

Command Use the LIST command to find out if a file exists

on the system. Find out the size of the file, its

attributes and other useful information. A FILE

NOT FOUND or FILE DOES NOT EXIST message may

indicate that you are on the wrong directory.

VII-If
Part VII: TICCIT Hints

Review Graphics

Introduction These instructions will help you locate graphics

stored on your MicroTICCIT system disk.

Procedures * Log on Course 0 and select the Author Menu.

* Select the Graphics Utilities Menu ('4).

e Select Display Object Graphics (*I).

You will see a prompt at the bottom of the screen

such as the following:

NGraphics 1:1

The first number is the graphics directory number.

The second number is the graphics number in that

directory.

To see the next graphic, press GO.

Missing Graphic If there is no graphic located at a specific number,

you will see "MISSING GRAPHIC" printed in the

lower right corner of the screen.

Module Number Press OBJECTIVE to see the graphic module

number. This number is the one you would use to

display the graphic in your ADAPT courseware.

Press OBJECTIVE again to return to displaying

graphics.

Graphics Directory Use the COURSELIST utility (on the Makecourse

menu) to find out the number of the graphic

module directory on which graphics from a

particular course are located.

System Graphics System Graphics such as the startup and shutdown

screens are located in Graphics Directory 0, You

can change the number of the directory or the

specific entry that you are viewing by typing the

appropriate number after the Graphics prompt at

the bottom of the MicroTICCIT screen.

VII-12

-~~ N : . .
Part VII: TICCIT Hints

Changing The TICCIT Graphics

Introduction You may wish to have a different shutdown or

startup graphic. This section includes instructions

for changing those graphics.

Select a

New Graphic Before you begin the pi ocedures below, select the

new graphic and write down the number If you

need help to find the graphics already stored on

your system, see "Review Graphics" on Page VII-12.

You may also wish to create your own display

See the Hazeltine manuals for creating graphics.

Procedures * Log on Course 0 and select the Operator Menu.

" Select Log on, Log off (Option#l).

" Select Start up, Shutdown Menu.

" Select one:

Build New Shutdown Display (#2)

Build New Log on Display (#3)

" Type number of new graphic and press EXIT to

load new graphic.

f'"

VII-13

.V *P**~"~ .- 'ro
Part VII: TICCIT Hints

Current Module Directories

Introduction The TICCIT operator needs to know the ranges of

the current module directories on the system. You

can obtain this information using a TICCIT utility.

Procedures * Log on to Course 0 and select the Operator ~Menu.

" Select Database Operations Menu (#4).

" Select Display Module Directory

Information (#9).

The current module directories will be displayed.

HOME MODULE DIR START END [NOTES]

0 TPROGRAMS TPROGRAMS 1 3999 SYSTEM MODULES

I XTRACWMODS 120000 129999 HUMRRO MODULES

2 TDMMD 950000 99999 DEMONSTRATION CW

3 TRAINMODS 110000 119999 ADAPT TRAINING

Explanation * The number (M) indicates the module directory

number where the modules are located. Use this

information when you set up a course with

Makecourse.

* Under HOME, the name of the module directory

is listed. To access modules on that directory you

could DIR TRAI[MODS.

* Under MODULE DIR, the name of the module

directory can be repeated.

* START indicates the first number of the module

directory. The first module stores the BIT MAP

for the directory, the information the system needs

to locate the remaining modules and load them into

memory for execution. START and END denote the

module ranee.

* END indicates the last number of the module

directory. For example, the last available module

in the TPROGRAMS module range Is 3999.

* Under [NOTES] is a description of the

courseware stored in a particular module range.

TPROGRAMS TPROGRAMS stores the TICCIT system modules,

(TICCIT utilities and ADAPT functions). For

example, the SRDBI function that is used to read

and write data to the student's permanent data

area file (.PD) is stored in module 701.

VII-14
Part VII: TICC,. Hint5

Change Module Parameters

Introduction The TICCIT sub-menu called "Change Module

Parameters" contains several useful utilities. You

will be changing TICCIT module parameters when

you select one of these utilities.

Procedures * Log on Course 0 and select the Operator

Menu.

* Select Database Operations Menu.

" Select Change Module Parameters (#8).

Options You will see the following list of options:

1. Set time computer waits for videotape player to

get up to speed.

2. Set page size for TICCIT printouts.

3. Set security level required for courseware

processing.

4. Set program to run when user logs on.

5. Set new proctor function password.

Options above which are important in the operation

of the 19K BNCOC MicroTICCIT site and using the 19K

BNCOC CMI System are explained in more detail in

other sections of this manual. TICCIT operators

need to be aware of these options and to explore

their uses.

Current TICCIT

Printout Settings Access option #2 and make a note of the current

settings at your site.

Start up Program Access option #4 and make a note of the program

currently set as the start up program at your site.

get Security Level Access option #3 and make a note of the current

security level required to process courseware at

your site.

Set Proctor Password Access option #5 and make a note of the current

proctor password at your site.

VII-15
Part VIII: RDOS Hints

Part VIII: RDOS Hints

Table of Contents

page

1. About RDOS and MPOS VIII-3

2. System Prompts VIII-4

3. The TICCIT System II Master Directory (DM0) VIII-5

4. RDOS Commands VIII-6

5. RDOS Files VIII-8

6. Names of I/O Devices (INPUT/OUTPUT) VIII-10

7. How to Write a Macro File VIII-11

.'

VIII-'

W"~ ~ W tr ~ W or .I'~ ~ .
Part VIII: RDOS Hints

VIII-2

-k - pfl%
Part VIII: RDOS Hints

ABOUT RDOS and MPOS

RDOS Data General's Real-time Disk Operating System (RDOS),

is the heart of the multi-user MicroTICCIT system. A

real-time operating system is one that allows several

users to feel as if they are accessing the same programs

simultaneously.

RDOS CLI The RDOS Command Line Interpreter (CLI) is a program

that lets the user interface with RDOS through simple one

word commands. TICCIT operators use RDOS for all offline TICCIT utilities and for performing system operation

and maintenance tasks such as bringing the system "UP"

and backing up the system. When you bring TICCIT "UP,"

you are turning over the disk operating chores to MPOS.

MPOS The MicroTICCIT disk operating system is called MPOS or

TICCIT. MPOS follows almost the same file naming and

file handling conventions as RDOS. When TICCIT is "UP",

the operator has access to TICCIT's "Command Line

Interpreter" nr C1I.. The TICCIT CLI, however, consists of

physically different programs which do the same tasks as

the RDOS CLI. Operators will note, however, that not all

of the RDOS CLI commands are available. One major

difference is that MPOS utilities are displayed on the

MicroTICCIT bit-mapped screen which differs greatly

from the Data General Dasher console which is textoriented. The bit-mapped screen does not scroll,

therefore, the MPOS version of the CLI does not have the

TYPE command.

TICCIT Modules A TICCIT module is a special kind of file. Modules contain

either courseware (all data) or executable modules

(programs). When several users log on to the same

MicroTICCIT course at different terminals, they each use

a small piece of the courseware at different times. Each

small piece is stored in a TICCIT courseware module. The

names of these files are all numbers and have no

extensions which makes it possible for TICCIT (i.e., MPOS)

to access them very rapidly. The module contents are

swapped in and out of core memory every time a user

makes a keypress. The contents are kept in memory at

the MicroTICCIT terminal until a new keypress occurs.

VII-3
Part VIII: RDOS Hints

SYSTEM PROMPTS

Introduction A prompt is a character that tells you the system

is ready to accept a command. You can tell which

operating system is "up" (in charge of the system)

by the prompt character. The prompt characters

that you will see as a TICCIT operator are listed

below.

? TICCIT OPERATING SYSTEM (MPOS)

R RDOS PROMPT

VIRTUAL CONSOLE

RDOS EDITOR

VIII-4

n * i. .* ,
Part VIII: RDOS Hints

THE TICCIT SYSTEM II MASTER DIRECTORY (DM0)

Introduction The Master Directory for the TICCIT 'System II is

called DMO. This directory lists all of the other

directories on the system as well as files and

programs that are stored on the Master Directory.

DIR DM0 Unless you tell it, the system does not know

which directory it is on. You can initialize (open

up for access) the master directory where most of

the files are located by typing DIR DMO from

either the TICCIT or the RDOS CLI.

MPOS When MPOS (the TICCIT Operating System) is UP

and running, it almost completely hogs the Data

General's core memory -- almost, but not quite.

There are still links to RDOS. One of those "links"

is the ability to access directory information.

GDIR If you wonder which directory you are on, you can

find out by typing GDIR from the CLI. Because of

.- the many links that have been created, you may

find yourself on a directory you did not open

yourself. For example, when you DIR a

courseware directory such as BNCW.DR you will

find yourself on TDMCW.DR. With a little

experimenting and familiarization with the system

you will get accustomed to what is where. You

will always need to begin with the master

-, directory (DMO) to find the directory and the file

you need to access.

VIII-5

L-,

.4-
Part VIII: RDOS Hints

RDOS COMMANDS (USE AT DATA GENERAL CONSOLE)

Introduction RDOS is the Data General multi-user disk operating

system. The RDOS prompt Is "R." The "-"

character is a wildcard. Consult the RDOS manual

for more information.

Directory List At the "R" prompt, type:

o DIR DM0 (Press the CR key)

* LIST/A/E -. DR (space between E and -) (Press the

CR key)

The following information will be displayed:

XTRAOBJGR.DR 512 SPDY 01/06/84 17:02

01/06/84 [0023101 0

Filename, size of file in words, file attributes, date

created, time created, date of last access, disk

sector address, use count

Controlling

the Screen Press CTRL/S (the CTRL and S keys simultaneously)

to stop the screen from scrolling. Press CTRL/Q to

continue scrolling. Press CTRL/A to abort console

operation in progress and return to the "R" prompt

File Extensions File extensions are added to the file name to

distinguish among various types of files For

example, REPORT.DR is a directory file named

REPORT. UP. MC is a macro file named UP

.DR DIRECTORY

.MC MACRO FILES

.SV EXECUTABLE PROGRAMS

.OL OVERLAY FILES

Listing File Names LIST/A/E -.- (List all files.)

LIST/A/E -. MC (List all macro files.)

switches Switches are arguments which are added to CLI

commands to qualify the command. Some of the

switches you will see are:

/A List all files, permanent and non-permanent.

/E List all file information.

/B List file name only.

/K Do not list links.

/N List only links.

/S Sort file names alphabetically.

VIII-6

.<..~~ V V, . w .* * .n .r r ~ ~ -- '.-.
M W -

Part VIII: RDOS Hints

TYPE Command The TYPE command works only with ASCII files.

Other files will produce strange results or messages

such as:

LINE TOO LONG. To "type out" the contents of the

Macro File "UP" on the screen, type:

DIR DMO (return)

TYPE UP.MC (return)

Note: In this case you will actually type the word

"TYPE."

',

.4"

a"Ir

a.°

..

"

VIII-7

ALX- - -- a -- ''-,
Part VIII: RDOS Hints

RDOS Files

RDOS Filenames A LEGAL RDOS filename consists of from 1 to 10

letters, digits, or the $ character plus a two

character extension. ORDINARILY, the TICCIT

operating system (MPOS) follows the same

filenaming conventions.

examples:

COURSELIST. (no extension)

UP.MC

COLLEGE.SV

Disk Blocks A DISK BLOCK (or sector) consists of 256 16 bit

words or 512 bytes. RDOS stores information in

blocks or sectors.

An RDOS word has 16 bits; a byte has 8 bits; a

word, therefore, contains 2 bytes.

Types of Files There are 3 major types of files on an RDOS

system. They are:

RANDOM ACCESS

SEQUENTIAL

CONTIGUOUS (A fixed number of blocks in

unbroken series of logical disk addresses.)

File Characteristics When you LIST a file, the system displays the name

of the file, its size, creation date, and other

information, such as the file's characteristics. The

characteristics and their codes are listed below.

D Random file

C Contiguous

L Link Entry

T Partition

Y Directory

File Attributes When you create a file, you assign certain

attributes. These attributes can usually be cnanged

by the system user. The file attributes are also

given when you LIST a file. The attributes are as

follows:

P Permanent

S Save File

W Write Protected

R Read Protected

A Attribute Protected

N No Link

? User Defined

& Second User Defined

VIII-8
Part VIII: RDOS Hints

Processed Graphics

File Attribute An important user defined attribute to recognize is

the one which indicates that a graphics file has

been processed. When you list the name of a

graphics file, you will see the 7 attribute when the

file has been processed. Graphics files must be

unprocessed before they are dumped.

VIII-9
Part VIII: RDOS Hints

NAMES OF I/0 DEVICES (INPUT/OUTPUT)

Introduction If you list the names of the files on the Master

Directory, you will see files that begin with the $"

character. These files are the names of the

Input/Output (1/O) devices which could be attached

to your system. Just because they are there,

however, does not mean that you have this

equipment. It means that the system has been

configured so that you could use these devices if

they did exist.

Names of 10 Devices MTO Name of magnetic tape drive

$LPT Line Printer

$TTO System Console

Related File Names $OUT Link file to SLPT

'

Vill-to
Part VIII: RDOS Hints

HOW TO WRITE A MACRO FILE

Introduction The TICCIT software that is supplied with your

system includes a few useful MACROS such as

UP.MC and DOWN.MC which you use to bring

TICCIT up from RDOS and to return to RDOS (when

you are shutting TICCIT down).

A MACRO file is a series of RDOS commands which

you ordinarily execute together. A Macro saves

you from typing them all in every time you do a

particular task.

Creating a Macro

File e Use the RDOS CLI EDITOR.

* At the R prompt, Type DM0

* Type EDIT (name of new Macro)

The RDOS editor prompt will be displayed on the

screen.

s (the Editor Prompt)

Type each CLI command with the appropriate

arguments and press return.

Type UEH$$ to return to RDOS and exit the EDITOR.

VlIl-1l1
Part IX, Revising Course 19, "19K BNCOC for Tank Commanders"

Part IX: Revising Course 19,

"19K BNCOC for Tank Commanders*

Table of Contents

page

Introduction IX-3

1. Adding a Unit IX-7

2. Adding a Lesson IX-lO

3. Adding a Segment IX-12

4. Deleting a Unit IX-16

5. Deleting a Lesson IX-19

6. Deleting a Segment IX-21

7. Deleting a Lesson Test IX-24

9. Modifying a Lesson Test IX-26

10. Modifying a Menu IX-27

11-1

.
Part IX, Revising Course 19, "1K BCC. lor T1ank Commanders'

IX-2
Part IX, Revising Course 19, "19K BNCOC for Tank Commanders"

This section of the manual provides guidelines for making revisions to

the 19K BNCOC MicroTICCIT Course 19 as changes take place in the 19K BNCOC

Course. Because the 19K BNCOC for Tank Commanders course structure is

dynamic and can change from cycle to cycle, it is essential that

corresponding changes are made to the 19K BNCOC MicroTICCIT course in

order to keep the 19K BNCOC MicroTICCIT CMI system up-to-date with BNCOC.

This part of the Manual includes general instructions and

information about 19K BNCOC and the corresponding CMI system and

addresses changes within the on-line instruction and testing of the 19K

BNCOC MicroTICCIT Course. Part X of this Manual has instructions for

making revisions to Course 20, The 19K BNCOC CMI System.

Only an experienced ADAPT programmer should attempt to

revise any part of a MicroTICCIT course.

Important: NEVER alter the BNCOC Course in the middle of an

instructional cycle. This would require you to re-

*register all students enrolled in the course, thus

destroying their current Permanent Data Areas (.PD

files) and all your records of their performance 4.

' data which have been entered and stored on the

MicroTICCIT system.

General Instructions

Modification of the 19K BNCOC MicroTICCIT course requires an

understanding of both the TICCIT (ADAPT) course structure and the 19K BNCOC

course structure and the relationship between the two.

19K BNCOC is divided into several Task Clusters, each of which

includes a varying number of Tasks. Each Task includes one or more

objective(s) or sub-task(s). Before attempting to modify the 19K BNCOC

MicroTICCIT course, programmers should become familiar with 19K BNCOC by

examining the most recent Program of Instruction (PO).

Programmers should also examine the current 19K BNCOC Master

Record which lists the tasks (or sub-tasks) which are considered testable

events. Be aware that NOT ALL BNCOC tasks included in the POI are actually

tested. (For example, none of the tasks in Task Cluster A are included on the

Master Record.) The 19K BNCOC MicroTICCIT course structure is designed to

collect information about the soldier's performance for those tasks which are

,,. actually tested and which are used as criteria for satisfactorially passing the

19K BNCOC course. In some cases, two 19K BNCOC tasks listed in the POI are

combined and scored as one testable event (i.e, in Task Cluster F, the tasks

"Install a Hasty Protective Minefield" and "Remove a Hasty Protective

Minefield" are tested as "Install/Remove a Hasty Protective Minefield"). In

other cases, sub-tasks are listed separately on the Master Record (i.e., in

Task Cluster D, the task entitled "MOPP" is divided into three subject areas:

MOPP, Initiate Unmasking Procedures, and Use M256 Chemical Detector Kit,

each of which is tested separately).

IX-3

u~r - "- * ..
Part IX, Revising Course 19, "19K BNCOC for Tank Commanders"

tht19K BNCOC MicroTICCIT Courseware consists of two ADAPT courses

that work in tandem to track student performance in 19K BNCOC. The first

course (Course number 19, Course label BN) contains the on-line instruction

and testing available for a variety of 19K BNCOC Tasks. The student uses

Course 19 when he goes on-line to receive instruction or to take tests. The

second course (Course number 20, Course label DE) is used to enter the

results of instruction and testing that have taken place off-line (i.e., in the

field). The student will not use Course 20. The primary user of Course

20 will be the person assigned to enter the off-line test results. Together,

Course 19 (on-line instruction and testing for the student) and Course 20

(data entry of off-line student test results) form the CMI system used to

record student performance in 19K BNCOC and ultimately to print the 19K

. BNCOC Master Record.

Any revisions to 19K BNCOC will necessitate revisions to both

ADAPT courses developed for 19K BNCOC. To understand how the 19K

MicroTICCIT courseware has been built, it is essential to understand first

how an ADAPT course is built.

ADAPT courses are hierarchical, beginning with the COURSE level and

descending to the UNIT, LESSON, and SEGMENT levels. Generally, the actual

instruction is placed at the segment level with menus appearing at the upper

levels. The course is divided into units; each unit is divided into lessons; each

lesson is divided into segments. Each of these levels is assigned a TICCIT label

by the courseware developer. A label of BN indicates a file at the COURSE

level. A label of BNA indicates a UNIT file; BN.I.1 references a LESSON file;

and BN.I.1.1 references a SEGMENT file. These labels are known as C.U.L.S.

(Course, Unit, Lesson, Segment) labels.

The basic authoring unit in ADAPT is the chapter. A chapter may be

- authored at any level (course, unit, lesson, or segment). Each chapter is

divided into frames; frames are divided into pages. For example, the ADAPT

file in Course 19 containing the BNCOC Course Menu (BN) is one (1) chapter

containing three (3) frames. The course menu itself is in the first frame

and consists of four pages. The student tutorial is in the second frame and

consists of three (3) pages. The third frame contains the instructor tutorial. Each page has three components: Display Construction commands, Response

Analysis commands, and a Branching Table. A variety of other components

must be authored as well, such as the Name That Frame page, symbol tables,

and, for tests, a page of Test Specifications. See the ADAPT Reference Manual

published by Hazeltine Corporation for more detailed information.

Comparison of 19K BNCOC and 19K BNCOC MicroTICCIT Courses is

restricted in this discussion to a comparison between the 19K BNCOC Course

and Course 19, BN, because the latter is used by the student and mirrors the

structure of 19K BNCOC. (Because Course 20 is primarily designed for

entering off-line test results and printing the Master Record, its structure

will not be discussed here. Refer to Part X of this Manual, Revising Course

20, for the specific information regarding how the structure of 19K BNCOC

has been translated into TICCIT structure in Course 20. Be aware,

however, that any modifications to Course 19 will, In all likelihood,

require modifications to Course 20.

IX-4
Part IX, Revising Course 19, "19K BNCOC for Tank Commanders"

The structure of the 19K BNCOC course is reflected within the

structure of TICCIT (ADAPT) Course 19 (BI). For example, each 19K BNCOC

Task Cluster for which testable events are included is represented by one

TICCIT jnt. Each 19K BNCOC Task (testable event) is represented by one

TICCIT Lesson. For example, Cluster B of 19K BNCOC corresponds to BN's Unit

2 (BN.2). Task 3 within Cluster B of 19K BNCOC corresponds to the BN Unit 2's

third lesson (BN.2.3).

Each 19K BNCOC Task may be divided into any number of TICCIT

segments. Instruction for BNCOC is placed at the TICCIT segment level (i.e.,

BN.2.3.1). Test segments are always placed at the segment level and measure

performance at the lesson (Task) level. If desired, a TICCIT test may be

segmented, with each part of the test placed within a different segment file.

For example, testing for Cluster B Task 3 might have three (3) distinct parts.

The test could be compiled by pulling together test files created at the

segment level that reflect the different parts: BN.2.3.1, BN.2.3.2, and BN.2.3.3.

TICCIT would string these files together and present them to the student as

one LESSON test.

TICCIT records no information about student performance at the

segment level. All student performance data relate to the lesson level and

above.

REP Model vs. Author Defined Model

When you are creating a TICCIT frame, you will be asked to decide

whether you wish to use the REP (Rule, Example, Practice) model or an

"Author Defined" model. Programmers need to understand TICCIT

instructional philosophy to determine why the "author defined" model will be

required for the 19K BNCOC MicroTICCIT course.

In the REP model, the TICCIT operating system is geared to make a

great many decisions by default, such as item scoring, branching, and display

of feedback to the student. A major feature of the REP model is the TICCIT

Advisor, a programming feature which causes an "Advisor" to break in at

various times. This Advisor is strongly linked to TICCIT instructional

philosophy which supports a learning environment where the student directs

and controls his own learning. He selects the topics he wishes to study and

demonstrates his mastery of instructional objectives by first reading the

RULE, then perusing EXAMPLE problems. and finally by doing PRACTICE

problems, not through pass/fail testing. It is difficult for a student to fail a

TICCIT lesson, since he can continue to see and answer the practice problems

until he correctly answers the number established for mastery. Because the

role of the Advisor is to "recommend", the student is likely to encounter

frequent interruptions on the part of the Advisor, which breaks in to

"comment" on his performance. These interruptions, in addition to being

intrusive, force the student to use the keyboard and not the light pen (the

use of the light pen has been established by the Army Research Institute as

the sole acceptable means of student response). Because the Advisor's

messages are supplied by the system (default messages), the student is

expected to respond by pressing one of the various "end of message" keys on

the keyboard (i.e., ENTER, EXIT, MAP).

IX-5
Part IX, Revising Course 19, "19K BNCOC for Tank Commanders"

Given the Army's testing criteria (a maximum of three test attempts)

and their need to direct and control student learning within BNCOC, the REP

model has been found to be inappropriate for designing BNCOC on-line

materials. The author has far greater control over the student learning

environment when s/he defines his/her own structure.

Makecourse and the Course Template

The TICCIT utility "Makecourse" creates a TICCIT course template, or

instructions to the system about the structure of a course, including the

number of units and the number of lessons per unit. No information about

the number of segments is included. The course template also includes

information about the directories where the source courseware and source

graphics are stored on the system. Makecourse creates a file called

"PDA019000" and stores it on the master directory of the hard disk. The first

three digits refer to the course number (from 1-3 digits) and the last three

digits refer to the site number. All MicroTICCIT sites are numbered "000."

In this example, "019" refers specifically to the number given the BNCOC

MicroTICCIT course.

When each student is registered in a course, a unique file is created

for him using the course template. The file name is a ten digit number with

the extension ".PD". The file name (e.g., 0000002200.PD) consists of the

student number (up to nine digits) and a number indicating the order in

which the student was registered in that course in relation to other courses.

In the example, "2200 tells us that the student's ID number is 220. The

last number (0000002200.PD) indicates that this is the first course into which

that student was registered. The last number can be from "0" to "9."

Students can be registered into a maximum of ten (10) courses.

You cannot determine from the file name which course the file

corresponds to; however, this file stores all the information about the

course and the student's performance in that course. To determine which

course a particular .PD file corresponds to, check the registration directory.

The courses are listed in the order in which the student was enrolled.

The .PD file is created when the student is registered into the course.

The file is destroyed and/or recreated if any changes occur in registration,

i.e., if the student is dropped or his status within the course is changed.

The PDA019000 (course template) is destroyed and re-created whenever

changes are made using the Makecourse utility. Students who were

registered in the earlier version of the course must be re-registered in order

to access any new units or lessons added to the course structure.

Ng: Students will still be able to access units and lessons existing in

the former course structure. This is because their .PD file has information

required to access the former structure, but not the new structure.

9'

I-
Part IX, Revising Course 19, "19K BNCOC for Tank Commanders"

Adding A New Unit (Task Cluster)

Introduction The course template, PDA 019000, for Course 19 (as

of 11/85) has eleven units. Each unit corresponds to

one 19K BNCOC Task Cluster. These instructions

allow you to add a new (additional) unit to Course

19. Adding a new unit requires you to modify the

course template.

Recommendation It is easier to add a unit to the end of a course

than to insert one in the middle. The latter

requires you to revise the lesson information for

each unit following the new one you would add.

Renumbering units is a complex and problemridden undertaking that requires the debugging of

all units following the new one. For example,

adding a unit in the middle of currently existing

units would necessitate renaming all files to reflect

the new course structure, as well as locating and

changing all branching commands that reference

the old units' and lessons' number. Therefore,

you should add UNITS to BNCOC only after

the last existing unit.

Revise the

Course Template * Log on Course 0 and select the Author Menu.

* Select Makecourse.

* Select Modify an Existing Course, Item #1.

* Enter Course Number "19" and the Course Map

will appear.

* Modify the existing Course Map (which shows

eleven (11) units or clusters) to conform to your

intended revisions. For example, if you are adding

a UNIT at the end, type a "k" in block 12.

e Advance through the UNIT maps until you reach

the map of the unit you have added. (Press GO

until the appropriate UNIT map appea-. s)

* Enter the number of lessons for the new unit

by typing a "K" in the number of blocks for which

you will have lessons .

* You do not need to change the remaining course

information. Use the SKIP key until you come to

the end. Then press EXIT to record the new

template.

* You will see a message telling you that PDA

019000 has been created. This file completely

replaces the previous PDA 019000 file.

IX-7

V .- % *,, - , .
Part IX, Revising Course 19, "19K BNCOC for Tank Commanders"

Revise DNCOC

Course Menu Add the title of your new unit (Cluster) to the

BNCOC Course Menu (located at BN.S). You may

need to reformat the current page to make room

for the new cluster title or add a new page through

A'TTN function 13.

* Add response analysis commands to process a

student mark in this area;

* Add response analysis commands to branch the

student to the new cluster's menu when he marks

that option.

Create a Menu

for the New Cluster * From the ADAPT Courseware Editor, type the

appropriate TICCIT label. For example, if your new

cluster is Cluster M (Unit 12), the label would be

BN.12.S. Type "I" in the Further Instructions

box (for Create/Add).

*The ADAPT Environment display appears. You can

only select a value of "3" for entry into the first

box of this display. In the second box, you should

enter "" for "Design Supplied by Author."

* The Name that Frame display will appear.

Currently, frame labels for Cluster menus are

mnemonics for the Cluster title. For example,

Cluster C is Land Navigation and the frame label

for its menu is LNAV. Similarly, the label for

Cluster E (Military Communications) is MLCOM.

* Create your menu page. * Access the Color Palette (option 19 on the

ATT'N menu) and enter the values detailed in Part

XI of this Manual. Each existing menu page makes

use of these altered color palette values.

* If your menu has more than one page,

make use of already established icons. These

include: a GO ON arrow box, a BACK arrow box, a

MENU box and a HELP box (designated by the

symbol "?"). Consult Part XII of this Manual for

macro definitions of these icons. Macros have been

used so that icon positioning on the screen is

consistent.

IX-8
Part IX, Revising Course 19, "19K BNCOC for Tank Commanders"

Creating a Menu

page (continued) * If some of the lessons listed on the new

Cluster menu have no on-line instruction, place a

page in the cluster frame that tells the students

that the instruction and testing for the task will be

provided by their instructors. Do NOT place this

message at the TICCIT label level appropriate for

the task (i.e., if Task 2 of Cluster 12 is all off-line,

don't place this message at BN.12.2.S. Place it

within the BN.12.S file and branch the student

there using a base page label such as NOLSN (no

lesson). The rationale for this is that at a later

time you may wish to add on-line instruction and

it is easier to create a BN.12.2.S file where none

exists than it is to delete a NOLSN message at that

level and replace it with the new material.

* See the instructions for "Adding a New Lesson"

and "Adding a New Segment of Instruction" for how

to proceed.

Process the Files Process all new files. Try them out by registering

a "dummy" student in your course and accessing

the new files under this dummy student's ID. Only

then will you see what students will see.

Accessing the Revised

Course To access the new unit, you must do these things:

* Load (or create) the courseware for the new

unit;

" Process the new courseware, and

* Register (or re-register) users in the course.

~IX-9

NI-

%%
Part IX, Revising Course 19, "19K BNCOC for Tank Commanders"

Adding A New Lesson (BNCOC TASK)

Scenario Within an already existing Task Cluster, you wish

to add a new Task. For example, under Cluster E,

Military Communications, there are presently four

(4) lessons. You might wish to add a fifth.

In Course 19, A TICCIT unit corresponds to a

BNCOC Cluster; a TICCIT lesson corresponds to a

BNCOC Task.

ote. If you are adding a new lesson to a new

Cluster (in other words, the Cluster does not

already exist), you must first follow the

instructions for "Adding a New Unit."

Recommendation Do NOT add the lesson in the middle of an existing

unit. Add the new lesson at the end. In this way,

no changes will need to be made to branching

commands of currently existing files. ,p.

In any case, you will be adding a lesson here at the

end of the existing lessons. Revising the order of

lessons within the course as the students see them

necessitates revising the labels of each existing

TICCIT lesson.

Revise the Course

Template o Log on Course 0 and select the Author Menu.

S Select Makecourse.

* Select Modify an Existing Course, Item *1.

* Type the course number "19" and the course map

will appear showing the existing units in the

course.

* Press GO to move from the Course Map and into , the maps for the units (Clusters) until you find the

Unit/Cluster to which you wish to add the new

lesson. Enter a "K" in the next available empty

lesson cell of this Cluster map.

_ Press SKIP until you reach the last display (the

Extended Data Areas), then press EXIT.

I

IX-10
Part IX, Revising Course 19, "19K BNCOC for Tank Commanders"

Revise the Task

Menu 0 Access the ADAPT Editor through the Author

Menu.

* Access the appropriate file, i.e., to add a lesson

(task) to Cluster E, Military Communications, you

would access the file BN.5.S.

* To this menu, add the title of the new lesson.

Remember to include: (a) display construction

commands to color this option cyan, red or green

depending on the student's status within that

lesson; (b) response analysis commands to process a

student mark in this area; and (c) response

analysis commands to branch the student to a

lesson menu if one will exist. See the description of

the macro PUTCO in Part XI1 of this Manual.

* If adding the new title requires that you

reformat the existing screen, remember to change

the window definitions in the display construction

section which color the lesson's title, and also in

the response analysis section under the

"compare/areas/input" command.

Create a Menu

for the New Lesson * If on-line instruction or testing will be available

for your new lesson, you will need a lesson menu

to present these options to the student. From the

ADAPT Courseware Editor display, create the menu

file by typing in the appropriate TICCIT label. For

example, in adding a fifth lesson to Cluster E,

Military Communications, you would create the

menu file with the label BN.5.5.S.

* If on-line instruction will exist for your new

lesson, the lesson menu should list the titles of the

segments of instruction available. This should be

done as the other menus are: The titles should be

colored to reflect the student's status. If he has

never entered the segment, the color of the title

should be cyan. If he has failed the segment, the

title should be red, and if he has passed, the title

' should be green. Examine the actual courseware

files of Course 19 for more information.

0 Include response analysis commands to analyze

student marks on the titles of available segments of

instruction and to branch the student

appropriately.

Process the Piles Process all new files. Try them out by registering

a "dummy" student in your course and accessing

the new files under this dummy student's ID. Only

then will you see what the students will see.

l--l4
Part IX, Revising Course 19, "19K BNCOC for Tank Commanders"

Adding A Segment

Introduction TICCIT segments are parts of TICCIT lessons. In

Course 19, the 19K BNCOC MicroTICCIT course, a

segment will correspond to an activity or sub-task

for a BNCOC task.

Task Cluster = TICCIT unit

Task z TICCIT lessons

Activity = TICCIT segment

You will not need to use Makecourse when you add

a new segment. Only units and lessons are

recorded in the TICCIT course template, PDA

019000.

Two possible scenarios will be discussed: (1) Adding

a segment of instruction where other segments for

that lesson already exist; and (2) Adding a segment

of instruction for a lesson where no instruction is

currently on-line.

Scenario I To a Cluster and Task that already exist in the

BNCOC Course, you wish to add a segment of

instruction. For example, in Cluster C, Land

Navigation, Task 8 (Terrain Analysis) currently has

five (5) segments of instruction. You might wish to

add a sixth segment.

Revisions

to the Course

Structure You do not need to revise the course template (PDA

019000) when you add a segment to an existing

lesson.

If you wish to create a segment ot instruction for

which no unit or lesson exists in the course

template, you must create the UNIT and LESSON

(cluster and task) first using the Makecourse

utility. See the directions for "Adding a New Unit"

and "Adding a New Lesson."

IX-12

U.
Part IX, Revising Course 19, "19K BNCOC for Tank Commanders"

Revise the

Lesson Menu * Access the existing Lesson menu to add the title

of the new segment of instruction. In the example

presented in the Scenario above, you would access

the file BN.3.8.S. , a menu that already lists

existing segments of instruction.) When adding the

new title, remember to include (a) display

construction commands to color the title cyan, red,

or green depending on the student's status within

that segment; (b) response analysis commands to

analyze a student mark in this area; and (c)

response analysis commands to branch the student

to the segment of instruction you are adding. (See

Part XII for instructions or examine existing menu

files for examples.)

* To reformat the Lesson Menu to add the title of

the new segment, change the existing window

definitions in both display construction and

response analysis to conform to the titles' new

positions on the screen.

Create the New

. Segment * From the ADAPT Courseware Editor, create the

new segment by typing the appropriate TICCIT

label. In the example presented in the scenario

above, the label would be: BN.3.8.6.S.

- Name your frames. Current frames of

instructions have labels of: OBJCT (Objective),

INSTR (Instruction), REVUE (Review), IHELP

(Instruction Help), PRAC (Practice), PHELP (Practice

N. Help), and STEST (Student Test). Notice that these

are not REP frames.

a In current segments of instruction, the first page

the student sees is the objective (OBJCT) for the

segment. Page 2 is a menu for the segment that

lists the following options: receive INSTRUCTION,

REVIEW instruction, get some HELP, do some

PRACTICE problems, take the TEST, and QUIT.

Students access the frames by marking one of these

options with his light pen. By placing the menu

within the file, branching to the different frames is

simplified. You would alter this menu to conform

to the options you want to make available to the

student. For example, if you decide not to provide

a HELP frame, eliminate that option from the

menu.

_ Consult Part XI for additional information.

Also study the existing version of Course 19 to

see the contents and set-up of currently existing

segments of instruction.

IX-13
Part IX, Revising Course 19, "19K BNCOC for Tank Commanders"

Scenario 2 You wish to add segments of instruction for an

existing BNCOC cluster and task that previously had

no on-line instruction. For example, in Cluster E,

Military Communications, Task 3 (Hot Loop Wire)

has no on-line instruction or testing. Courseware

has been developed and you wish to add it to

Course 19. These instructions explain how to add

a segment of instruction.

Revisions to the

Course Template The course template does not need to be revised if

the unit and/or lesson already exist as part of the

course template. The course template does not

store information about the number of segments in

a lesson.

If you wish to create a segment of instruction for

which no unit or lesson exists in the course

template, see the directions for "Adding a New

UNIT" and "Adding a New LESSON."

Revise the

Cluster Menu If a task has neither on-line instruction or testing,

no lesson menu exists in Course 19. The task is

listed on the Cluster menu. When the student

marks that menu item, the program branches the

" student to a NOLSN (no lesson) message within that

file. You must change these branching

instructions to take the student to a Lesson Menu

listing the segments of instruction available for

that task (see "Create a Lesson Menu" below).

Using the example presented in "Scenario 2," the

response analysis branching commands on the

Cluster Menu should be changed from "Go To

NOLSN" to "Go CHAPT 5,3."

Create a

Lesson Menu If there is currently no on-line testing or

instruction for the task, you must create a lesson

menu. In the scenario's example, this menu

would be placed at BN.5.3.S. The menu should list

the segments of instruction available for the lesson.

Remember to include display construction

commands to color the segment titles cyan, red, or

green depending on the student's status within the

segment, (b) response analysis commands to

analyze a student mark on each segment title, and

(c) response analysis commands to branch the

student to the appropriate segment. (See Part II

of this Manual for instructions.)

IX-14

- . l~4U .e /s " 
Part IX, Revising Course 19, "19K BNCOC for Tank Commanders"

Create the Segments

of Instruction F Prom the ADAPT Courseware Editor create

the new segment(s) by typing the appropriate

TICCIT label(s). In the scenario's example, segments

would be created at BN.5.3.1.S and BN.5.3.2.S.

* Name your frames. Current segments of

instruction have frames labeled: OBJCT (Objective),

INSTR (Instruction), REVUE (Review), IHELP

(Instruction Help), PRAC (Practice), PHELP (Practice

Help), and STEST (Student Test). Notice that these

are not REP frames. Use of the REP model has been

avoided for the reasons outlined in the Introduction

of this section of the Manual. It is better to make

these frames author-defined.

* In currently existing segments of instruction,

the first page the student sees is the objective for

the segment. Page 2 is a menu for the segment that lists the following options: Receive

INSTRUCTION, REVIEW instruction, get some HELP,

do some PRACTICE problems, take the TEST, and

QUIT. The student accesses the frames by marking

one of these options with his light pen. He does not

use the keys that correspond to these typical TICCIT

frames (i.e., pressing the PRACTICE key to see the

practice items). By placing the menu inside the

file, branching to the different frames is simplified.

You would alter this menu to conform to the

options you want to make available to the student.

For example, if you decided not to provide a HELP

frame, you should eliminate that option from the

segment menu.

* Consult Part XII of this Manual for more

-information. Check the existing courseware to see

the contents and set-up of currently existing

segments of instruction.

Process the Files Process all new files. Try them out by registering

a "dummy" student in the revised course and

accessing the new files under this dummy student's ID. Only then will you see what the

students will see.

IX-15
Part IX, Revising Course 19, "19K BNCOC for Tank Commanders"

Deleting A Unit

Scenario The Army decides to eliminate Cluster E, Military

Communications, from the BNCOC Course. BNCOC

would then consist of only ten (10) Clusters (units).

Your task is to delete the courseware associated

with Cluster E.

Recommendation Do not revise the course template when you delete

a unit from the course. Eliminating a unit from

the course template, particularly a unit in the

middle, would require you to renumber the units

that follow and make complex and extensive

revisions through all files pertaining to those units.

Debugging the new courseware would be a major

task.

A better avenue of revision would be to alter the

course on the surface, i.e., the options the students

see on the menus. If you removed the Task Cluster

option fromthe BNCOC Course Menu, the students

would not be able to access that Cluster's material.

In fact, they would not even know the Cluster

existed. Beneath the surface, of course, nothing

would have changed: the Course template would

remain the same and the Cluster's materials would

still exist, but no extensive debugging would be

necessary. Steps involved in "deleting" a unit in

this fashion are outlined below.

Revising the Course

Template No revision to the course template is necessary, if

the Cluster is merely "deleted" on the surface. You

would not use the Makecourse utility if you follow

this set of instructions.

Revise the BNCOC

Course Menu * Access the source version of BN.S and erase the

title of the Cluster to be "deleted." Reformat the

page if necessary.

Y.* Redefine the windows in which the remaining

cluster titles now appear.

* Redefine their areas in the response analysis "Compare Areas Input" command so that student

marks can be analyzed using the titles' new

positions on the screen.

~IX-16 4"i
Part IX, Revising Course 19, "19K BNCOC for Tank Commanders"

Revise the BNCOC

Course Menu (con't) * Remove the area coordinates defined for the

Cluster title you have "deleted." The "Compare

Areas Input" command should now only reference

window coordinates for the remaining cluster

titles.

0 L.rcate the response analysis command that

provides branch instructions for the Cluster you

want to "delete." Remove the command entirely.

Leave all others as they are. Remember, you are

not actually deleting the Cluster, so you will not

need to alter the labels assigned to other clusters.

The only portion of these branching commands that

must be changed is the "Go If W=(n)." Because

you have removed the area assigned to your

"deleted" Cluster from the "Compare Areas Input"

command, the number assigned by WHICHMATCH

to other inputs may need to be changed.

For example, response analysis commands in the

old Course Menu might read:

Compare Areas Input = ACLUS ! BCLUS ! CCLUS ! DCLUS

Compute Calc W - WHICHMATCH

Go If W=1

CHAPT 1

Go If W=2

CHAPT 2

Go If W=3

CHAPT 3

Removing BCLUS would result in the following:

Compare Areas Input = ACLUS ! CCLUS ! DCLUS

Compute Calc W - WHICHMATCH

Go If W=I

CHAPT I

Go If W=2

CHAPT 3

Go If W=3

CHAPT 4

Now a student mark in the area of Cluster C's title

would be assigned a value of 2, not 3 (the value

loaded into W via WHICHMATCH). Branching,

however, remains the same, because Cluster C is

still the third unit in the BNCOC Course template.

IX-17

I * ~N~~~, , ~ a ' ~ ~ ~ a .
Part IX, Revising Course 19, "19K BNCOC for Tank Commanders"

Revise Other Menus All Cluster Menus following the Cluster you have "deleted" will require minor modifications. For

example, if you "delete" Cluster E, as In the case

presented in the scenario, Clusters F-K would have

to be relettered to conform to the new structure

the students will see. The Cluster F menu would

need to be changed to identify it as the Cluster E

menu and so on. Additionally, lesson menus that

shoot off from Cluster Menus should be checked to

ensure they are identified as belonging to the new

Cluster. A lesson menu under Cluster F, for

example, might be entitled "Cluster F Task 1" and

this would need to be changed to "Cluster E, Task

1." Again, char.ges are made only on the surface

(the object mode the student sees). In actuality, the

structure of BNCOC will not have changed.

Therefore, it is essential that thorough

documentation be maintained as to the changes

being made, so confusion in the future is avoided.

Other Revisions Other revisions should not be necessary. For

example, there is no need to delete the modules

associated with the "deleted" Cluster. The students

can not access this Cluster so for all intents and

purposes, it no longer exists. While this may seem

a "messy" way of eliminating a Cluster, it is by far

the simplest and also allows the materials to be

"reinstated" if the "delete" decision should be

reversed. Deleting courseware is time-consuming

and tricky. With the method laid out above, there

is no need to actually erase the Cluster from

memory.

Process the Piles Process all new files. Try them out by registering

a "dummy" student in your course and accessing

the new files under this dummy student's ID. Only

then will you see what your real students will see.

Make sure that marking a Cluster title results in a

branch to that Cluster's menu.

1

11-i8
Part IX, Revising Course 19, "19K BNCOC for Tank Commanders"

Deleting A Lesson

Scenario Within Cluster C, Land Navigation, the Army might

decide to eliminate the lesson on "Determine

Location" (Task 6). Cluster C would then only

consist of eight (8) tasks or lessons. Your task is to

delete the lesson from Course 19.

Recommendation Do not change the course template. Eliminating a

lesson (task) from the course template (map),

particularly a lesson in the middle, would

renumber the lessons that follow and require

complex and extensive revisions through all files

pertaining to those lessons. Debugging the new

courseware would be an overwhelming task and

one best avoided.

A better approach is to alter the course on the

surface, i.e., the options the students see on the

menus. If the option of selecting a Lesson were

removed from the appropriate Cluster Menu, the

students would have no way of accessing that

Lesson's material. In fact, they would not even

know the Lesson existed. Beneath the surface, of

course, nothing would have changed: the Course

template would remain the same and the lesson's

materials would still exist, but no extensive

debugging would be necessary. Steps involved in

"deleting" a lesson in this fashion are outlined

N1 below.

Revise the

Course Template Changes to the course template are not necessary

if the Lesson is merely "deleted" on the surface. It

is strongly recommended that any revisions to the

course template using the Makecourse be avoided.

Revise the

Cluster Menu * Access the source version of the appropriate

Cluster menu (in the scenario's example, the

Cluster menu would be in the file BN.3.S) and erase

the title of the lesson to be "deleted." Reformat the

page if necessary and remember to redefine the

windows in which the remaining lesson titles now

appear. Also redefine their areas in the response

analysis "Compare Areas Input" command so that

student marks can be analyzed, given the titles'

new positions on the screen. Be sure to remove the

area coordinates defined for the lesson title you

have "deleted." The "Compare Areas Input"

command should now only reference window

coordinates for the remaining lesson titles.

11-19

'II A.& LA . . . . .....
Part IX, Revising Course 19, "19K BNCOC for Tank Commanders"

Revise the Cluster

Menu (continued) * Locate the response analysis command that

provides branch instructions for the lesson you

want to "delete." Remove the command entirely.

Leave all others as they are. Remember, you are

not actually deleting the lesson, so you will not

need to alter the labels assigned to other lessons.

The only portion of these branching commands that

must be changed is the "Go If W=(n)." Because you

have removed the area assigned to your"deleted"

lesson from the "Compare Areas Input" command,

the number assigned by WHICHMATCH to other

inputs may be changed. (See "Deleting an Existing

UNIT" for how these commands appear before and

after deleting a unit. The concept is identical for

deleting a lesson.)

Revise Other Menus All Lesson Menus following the lesson you have

"deleted" will require minor modifications. For

example, if you "delete" Task 6, as in the case

presented in the scenario, Tasks 7 and 8 would

have to be renumbered to conform to the new

structure the students will see. The Lesson 7

menu would need to be changed to identify it as the

Lesson 6 menu and so on. Additionally, segment

menus that shoot off from lesson menus should be

checked to ensure they are identified as belonging

to the new lesson. Again, changes are made only

on the surface (the object mode the student sees).

In actuality, the structure of BNCOC will not have

changed. Therefore, it is essential that thorough

documentation be maintained as to the changes

being made, so confusion in the future is avoided.

Other Revisions Other revisions should not be necessary. For

example, there is no need to delete the modules

associated with the "deleted" lesson. The students

can not access this lesson so for all intents and

purposes, it no longer exists. While this may seem

a "messy" way of eliminating a lesson, it is by far

the simplest and also allows the materials to be

"reinstated" if the "delete" decision should be

reversed. Deleting courseware is time-consuming

and tricky. With the method laid out above, there

is no need to actually erase the lesson from

memory.

Process the Piles Process all new files. Try them out by registering

a "dummy" student in your course and accessing

the new files under this dummy student's ID. Only

then will you see what the students will see.

Make sure that marking a lesson title results in a

branch to that lesson's menu.

11-20
Part IX, Revising Course 19, "19K BNCOC for Tank Commanders"

Deleting A Segment

Scenario Within Cluster C, Land Navigation, Task 8

currently has 5 segments of instruction. The Army

might decide to eliminate the third segment. The

new organization for Task 8 would then consist of

only 4 segments of instruction.

Recommendation Do not actually delete the segment from the course.

Eliminating a segment, particularly one in the

middle, would require renumbering the TICCIT

labels of the segments that follow and require

complex and extensive revisions through all files

pertaining to those segments. Debugging the new

courseware would be an overwhelming task and

one best avoided.

A better method is to alter the course on the

surface, i.e., the options the students see on the

menus. If the option of selecting a segment were

removed from the appropriate Lesson Menu, the

students would not be able to access that

segment's material. In fact, they would nnt even

know the segment existed. Beneath the surface, of

course, nothing '.ould have changed: the segment's

materials would still exist, but no extensive

debugging would be necessary. Steps involved in

"deleting" a segment in this fashion are outlined

below.

Revising the

Course Structure It is not necessary to revise the course template

when you add or delete a course segment. The

template established by Makecourse does not

include information about course components at

the segment level.

Revise the

Lesson Menu * Access the source version of the appropriate

Lesson menu (in the scenario's example, the Lesson

menu would be in the file BN.3.8.S) and erase the

title of the segment to be "deleted." Reformat the

page if necessary.

* Redefine the windows in which the remaining

segment titles now appear. Also redefine their

areas in the response analysis "Compare Areas

Input" command so that student marks can be

analyzed, using the titles' new positions on the

screen.

IX-21
Part IX, Revising Course 19, "19K BNCOC for Tank Commanders"

Revise the

Lesson Menu (conlt) * Remove the area coordinates defined for the

segment title you have "deleted." The "Compare

Areas Input" command should reference window

coordinates only for the remaining segment titles.

* Locate the response analysis command that

provides branch instructions for the segment you

want to "delete." Remove the command entirely.

Leave all others as they are. Remember, you are

not actually deleting the segment, so you will not

need to alter the labels assigned to other segments.

The only portion of these branching commands that

must be changed is the "Go If W=(n)." Because

you have removed the area assigned to your

"deleted" segment from the "Compare Areas Input"

command, the number assigned by WHICHMATCH to

other inputs may need to be changed. (See the

instructions under "Deleting a UNIT" for

information about the way these commands appear

before and after deleting a unit. The concept is

identical for deleting a segment.)

Revise Other Menus All Segment menus following the segment you have

"deleted" will require minor modifications. For

example, if you "delete" Segment 3, as in the case

presented in the scenario, Segment Menus 4 and 5

may need to be edited to conform to the new

structure the students will see. Again, changes are

made only on the surface (the object mode the

student sees). In actuality, the structure of BNCOC

will not have changed. It is essential that thorough

documentation be maintained as to the changes

being made, so confusion in the future is avoided.

Other Revisions * Check your Test Control (TC) files for tests

constructed at the segment level. If a test exists

for the lesson (combining the segment tests stored

in separate files at the segment level), the TC

Mastery Box may need to be changed. Access the

TC file for the lesson in question (in the example,

this file is located at BN.3.8.TC, accessed through

the APT editor), and examine the values in the

Mastery Box. If they include the number of the

segment you have "deleted", remove the segment's

number and leave all others the same. Remember:

Segments 4 and 5 are still Segments 4 and 5,

according to all existing file labels, regardless of

what appears to be true on the surface. If you

have strung together a segmented test via this TC

file, TICCIT will include only those segment tests

that it is instructed to include. You need to remove

the "deleted" segment from the instructions it uses

to string the test together.

IX-22

* .
Part IX, Revising Course 19, "19K BNCOC for Tank Commanders"

Other Revisions

(Con't) 0 Other revisions should not be necessary. For

example, there is no need to delete the modules

associated with the "deleted" segment. The

students can not access this segment so for all

intents and purposes, it no longer exists. While

this may seem a "messy" way of eliminating a

segment, it is by far the simplest and also allows

the materials to be "reinstated" if the "delete"

decision should be reversed. Deleting courseware is

time-consuming and tricky. With the method laid

out above, there is no need to actually erase the

segment from memory.

Process the Piles Process all new files. Try them out by registering

a "dummy" student in your course and accessing

the new files under this dummy student's ID. Only

then will you see what your real students will see.

Make sure that marking a segment title results in

a branch to that segment's menu and instruction.

4'-

4

,4.

5 1X-23 V7
Part IX, Revising Course 19, "19K BNCOC for Tank Commanders"

Deleting A Lesson Test

Scenario The Army re-writes a currently on-line test (i.e.,

Conduct Performance Counseling with a Subordinate, Cluster B, Task 2). In its new form,

it is no longer suitable for on-line conduct and you

want to remove the old test from MicroTICCIT.

Revise the

Lesson Menu Access the appropriate lesson menu. In the

example presented in the scenario above, the menu

is stored in file BN.2.2.S. In the response analysis

commands for this menu page, you will need to

change the branching instructions so that a student

marking the title of Task 2 will NOT be branched to

the next lowest file (BN.2.2.1.S). Since no test will

be available on-line, the student will not be

branched to another menu where he marks an

option to take the test on that task. He would be

branched instead to a message page telling him

there is no instruction or testing on-line (if that is

indeed the case).

Other Revisions The following files would need to be deleted (erased)

from MicroTICCIT Course 19: ?r".

- The TC file for the test. In the example

provided here, the TC file exists at BN.2.2.TC and is

accessed through the APT Editor. To delete the file,

type in the TICCIT label and select "2" (Delete this

file) in the Further Instructions box. Note: If the

TC file instructs MicroTICCIT to string this test

together with other segment tests in order to

present a segmented lesson test, you MUST NOT

delete the TC file. Rather, erase the value filled in

for the segment test you are deleting and allow the

values representing the other segments to remain.

* The Test (T) File. In the example provided

here, the test file is located at BN.2.2.1.T. Delete a

file by typing the TICCIT label into the ADAPT

Courseware Editor and typing "2" (Delete this file)

in the Further Instructions box.

- The Explanation (W) file. In the example

provided here, the Explanation file exists at

BN.2.2.E. Delete the file by typing the TICCIT label

into the ADAPT Courseware Editor and typing "2"

(Delete this file) in the Further Instructions box.

IX-24
Part IX, Revising Course 19, "19K BNCOC for Tank Commanders"

Process the Files Process all new files (in this case, the lesson menu).

Try the file(s) out by registering a "dummy"

student in your course and accessing the new files

under this dummy student's ID. Only then will

you see what the students will see. Make sure

that marking a lesson title that would have

previously taken students to a lower level and on

to a test does not do so now.

4

I1-25

, *9*'I" ° A, " " -" " - " 
Part IX, Revising Course 19, "19K BNICOC for Tank Commanders"

Modifying A Lesson Test

Introduction Because it is difficult to predict what sort of

revisions the Army might want to make to an

existing test, guidelines for test modification will

not be provided here. Rather, the reader is

referred to the documentation provided in Part XII

of this Manual, TICCIT Tests which summarizes

how the on-line tests were constructed. The most

helpful documentation would be the printouts of

actual test files. These show the symbols used, the

base page displays and the accompanying command

sections. See Part XII for information about symbols

used in test files. Part XI describes TICCIT test

development. A thorough examination of this

wdocumentation should supply the information

necessary to modify an existing test.

Testing

New Courseware The only way to see what the real students will

,* encounter in taking an on-line test is to register a

"dummy" student in BNCOC and try your modified

test using the dummy student's ID. If you take the

test as an author in student mode (option 5 on the

ADAPT Courseware Editor display) or as a student

rV registered under your ID in BNCOC, the test file will

not always behave the same way as it would for a

person registered on MicroTICCIT only as a student.

To be sure that your modified test functions as it

should, be sure to try the test as the "dummy"

student.

IX-26
Part IX, Revising Course 19, "19K BNCOC for Tank Commanders"

Modifying A Menu

Scenario A BNCOC Cluster or Task title has been changed.

You need to change the appropriate menu.

Revising the Course

Template The modifications here assume that you are not

changing the structure of the BNCOC course (i.e., no

cluster or task is being dropped or added). The

only modifications discussed here will be those of a

typographical nature.

Revise the BNCOC

Course Menu The Course Menu is located at BN.S. If your

modifications are to a Cluster title, access the

source version of the file and make your changes.

For example: The title of Cluster B "Duties and

Responsibilities of an NCO" is changed to "NCO

Duties and Training."

* Type the new text.

" Adjust the window definitions for the title so that

all letters are colored (these commands are in the

display construction section).

* Change the response analysis "Compare Areas

Input" command to account for any difference in

the size of the title between the old and new

versions.

* Process the file and enter the course as a student

to make sure the changes appear.

Revise the

Cluster Menu If your modifications involve changing a Cluster

title, you will also need to access the source

version of the Cluster menu and make the menu's

title agree with the title on the Course Menu. No

changes in window definitions will be necessary.

If the modifications you are making require

changes in the titles of Tasks within the Cluster,

you will have to make sure that window

definitions that put the color In tthe Task titles are

changed to agree with the length of the new title

(these window coordinates appear in the display

construction section under "Color always"

commands and in the response analysis "Compare

Areas Input" command). Process your files and

enter the course as a student to make sure that the

changes appear.

IX-27
Part IX, Revising Course 19, "19K BNCOC for Tank Commanders"

Revise the

Lesson Menu If your modifications were in Lesson titles (and you

have revised their appearance on the Cluster

menu), you must also revise the Lesson menu to

conform to the new title. (If your revisions do not

extend to the Lesson level, then ignore this step.)

Make sure to adjust window coordinates to account

for a longer or shorter title: the display

construction "Color Always" command, as well. as

the response analysis "Compare Areas Input"

command, will need such an adjustment. Process

your files and enter the course as a student to

make sure that the changes appear.

IX-28

4,.z
Part X: Revising Course 20

Part X: Revising COURSE 20

Table of Contents

page

List of Figures X-3

Introduction X-5

1. Adding a New Task Cluster X-9

2. Adding a New Task X-18

3. Deleting a Cluster X-22

4. Deleting a Task X-27

5. Using Course 20 With A Course Other Than Course 19 X-31

I-1
Part X: Revising Course 20 4

A

$4

9*4

4'

4'

4'

t

ii

.4'

1-2
Part X: Revising Course 20

List of Figures

page

1. Course 20 File Labels and Contents X-7

2. Values Assigned to VLIST(0), VLIST(l), X-36

VLIST(2), and SC Array Elements in Course 20

X-3
'S

Part I: Ruvising Count 20

4.

N'

V

9

1-4

4-..~ kV ' - Pt .-. -- 4
Part X: Revising Course 20

Introduction

Course 20 has been developed so that off-line student test results can

be entered and stored on MicroTCCIT. Course 20 also enables an instructor

to print out the BNCOC Master Record, a record of how each student

performed in BNCOC. Most revisions to Course 19 will require revisions to

Course 20, so that all BNCOC testable events can be accurately recorded and

printed.

Recommendation

Only an experienced ADAPT programmer should attempt to revise any

part of Course 20. The CMI System is intricate and modifying any portion of

its operation requires a full understanding of both MicroTICCIT and the

ADAPT authoring language. The documentation provided below is not

intended to be a step-by-step instruction in how to make modifications to

Course 20. Rather, the documentation Is provided as a guideline to making

*revisions and is directed at a person with working knowledge of ADAPT as a

programming language as well as a courseware development system.

Overview of Course 20

Course 20 has 3 units. Unit 1 recreates the structure of 19K BNCOC:

the 11 lessons in Unit 1 represent the 11 Clusters in BNCOC. Unit 2 consists of

the programs that create and print the Master Record and a second report

that reports the total NOGOs each student received during the course. Unit 3

includes the programs that create the Master Record File and CMI Roster.

Figure 1 below lists all files contained in Course 20, as well as each file's

contents.

Description of Unit 1

Unit 1 of Course 20 contains the 19K BNCOC course structure. The file

labeled DE.1.S contains the BNCOC Course Menu listing all the task clusters.

The Cluster Menus are housed in lesson files ranging from DE.l.l.S to

DE.I.II.S, a file per cluster. Marking a task title on any cluster menu leads to

one of three places: DE.I.1.I.S, DE.I.I.2.S, or DE.I.1.3.S., where identical offline data entry pages are stored. Here the student test results are entered

and the program writes the data to the appropriate memory location in the

student's perma-ent data file (.PD) associated with Course 19.

Description of Unit 2

Unit 2 has two lessons and contains the software that prints the

BNCOC Master Record. The Print Menu for BNCOC reports is located at

DE.2.S. Four options presently exist on this menu. Option 1, Create and print

first Master Record, performs the same operation as Option 3, Create and

print updated Master Record. That is, they both collect test data from the

.PD files of students registered in a particular course and section and write

the data to the Master Re,:ord. Option I Is listed to make sure that the user

puts data into the Master Record at least once during a BNCOC cycle. This

ensures that he can use Option 2, Print existing Master Record. Option 4

creates a list of the number of NOGOs scored by each student registered in a

particular course and section.

X-5
Part X: Revising Course 20

The print routines for the Master Record are located at the segment

level in files DE.2.1.l.S (Diagnostic Tests), DE.2.1.2.S (Clusters B-D), and

DE.2.1.3.S (Clusters E-K). Each print routine creates a separate file to be

printed: results of the Diagnostic Tests are printed from a listing file called

MRCCCSS.DS; results for Clusters B-D are printed from a file called

MRCCCSS.Ll; and results from Clusters E-K are printed from a file called

MRcccss.MRCCCSS.L2. (Note: "CCC" is the 3-digit course number and SS is

.the 2-digit section number.)

The print routine for the list of NOGOs is located at DE.2.2.1.S (for

Clusters B-D) and DE.2.2.2.S (for Clusters E-K). The total number of NOGOs is

collected from information contained in each student's .PD file but does not

include NOGOs for the Diagnostic Tests. The listing file for the list of NOGOs

is named NOGOCCCSS.LS. The printed result has three columns of

information: student name, student ID number, and total number of NOGOs.

Description of Unit 3

Unit 3 contains the software that produces the CMI Roster and the

Master Record File. The CMI Roster lists all students registered in a

particular course and section. The Master Record File uses this list and

creates arrays that will help locate each student's .PD file and access test

data on all BNCOC testable events.

Before you can create the CMI Roster using Course 20, a TICCIT Roster

file must first be created using Course 0. The TICCIT Roster file is created

through a TICCIT on-line procedure accessed from the Student Reports Menu.

Software located at DE.3.S uses this file (name: CCCSS.RO) and another TICCIT

file, REGISTER.AF, to create a roster of students registered for a designated

course and section. The Master Record File is then created by using

information from the CMI Roster. The Master Record File has the name

MRCCC.SS. The first word of the Master Record File stores the total number

of students listed on the CMI Roster; subsequent words store the ID number

A, and name of each student on the CMI Roster.

Summary

Course 20 is used in the following way. The TICCIT operator first

registers students and creates a TICCIT Roster File for each course and

section. The operator then can log on Course 20 to create a CMI Roster and

to create the first Master Record file. Then instructors or other designated

personnel can use Course 20 to enter off-line student test results. Course 20

permits these results to be printed as the BNCOC Master Record.

X-6
Part X: Revising Course 20

Figure 1: Course 20 File Labels and Contents*

Course Unit Lesson Segment Contents of File

DR Main Menu for Course 20

Software for Identifying Course

and Section Number of Students

Software: Reviewing CMI Roster

DR I BNCOC Course Menu, listing

current BNCOC Clusters

DR 2 Print Menu,listing 4 print options

DE 3 Software for using the CMI

Roster to Create/Update Master

Record File

DR 1 1 Cluster L Menu**

DE 1 2 Cluster B Menu

DR 1 3 Cluster C Menu

D 1 4 Cluster D Menu

DR 1 5 Cluster E Menu

D 1 6 Cluster F Menu

DR 1 7 Cluster G Menu

DE 1 8 Cluster H Menu

DR 1 9 Cluster I Menu

DR 1 to Cluster J Menu

DR 1 11 Cluster K menu

DE I I I Data Entry Page: Diagnostic Tests

DE 1 1 2 Data Entry Page: Clusters B-D

DR 1 1 3 Data Entry Page: Clusters E-K

DR 2 1 1 Print routines: Diagnostic Tests

DR 2 1 2 Print routines: Clusters B-D

DR 2 1 3 Print routines: Clusters E-K

DR 2 2 1 Collect NOGOs from Clusters B-D

DR 2 2 2 Collect NOGOs from Clusters E-K;

also print NOGO list

DIR 3 1 Tutorial for Course 20

* Combining the Course, Unit, Lesson, Segment information provided here

. identifies the file label you should use to access the material of your choice.

For example, access file DE.3.1.S to see the source version of the Course 2C

Tutorial.

** Cluster L is the Diagnostic Tests/Remedial Training cluster. It has been

designated as Unit I in the MicroTICCIT courseware because the tasks in

Cluster L are considered prerequisites for BNCOC training.

X-7

rev
Part X: Revising Course 20

'.X-

'V-'

11-s
Part X: Revising Course 20

Adding a New Task Cluster

Introduction Adding an entirely new Cluster to the currently

existing BNCOC course requires modifying the

instructional template established for Course 20

using Makecourse. As recommended in Part IX

*(Revising Course 19), it is much easier to add a

cluster at the end of the instructional template

than to insert a cluster in the middle. The

following discussion assumes that you will

add the new cluster to the course template

after the last existing cluster, regardless of

where the cluster is inserted into 19K BNCOC.

Revise the

Course Template 0 Log on to Course 0 and access the Author

Menu. Select Option 4, Author Utilities Menu; then

select Makecourse.

* Select option 1, Modify an Existing Course.

* Type in the BNCOC Course Number to be

modified (20) and the instructional template for

Course 20 will appear.

" Press GO and the Unit 1 map will appear. Unit

I contains 11 lessons, one for each BNCOC cluster.

You will add your new Cluster by adding a

lesson to Unit 1. For example, if BNCOC has

added a twelfth cluster, add a "K" in Block 12 of the

Unit 1 map.

* There is no need to change the information on

the remaining pages of Makecourse. Move through

the pages by pressing the SKIP and EXIT.

Result The system will display a page which states at the

bottom that "PDA020000" has been created. Your

modified BNCOC course is now reflected in the

structure of Course 20.

rJ Accessing the

Revised Course All users registered in Course 20 will have to be reregistered in order to access this new course

template.

-_.

.,

F, x-9

".s -,,, " " - ,'j " "" " " .,' P "" b . . . .. - "."" "- % % "" F .%/F .I A - %".. ." ."%"..". - ..- . % , -
Part X: Revising Course 20

Revise the BCOC

Course Menu * You will need to modify the BCOC Course

Menu stored in the file DZ. 1.5 so that the new

course menu will list the title of the new BNCOC

Cluster. The BNCOC Course Menu not only allows a

user to select a Cluster for which to enter off-line

test data, it also assigns values to variables used by

the system to update a student's .PD file. These

response analysis commands will also need to be

added. Each of these revisions is discussed below.

0 Through the Author Menu, access the ADAPT

Courseware Editor display and type in the CULS

label D.I.S. The BNCOC Course Menu will appear.

Add the title of the new Cluster at the end

of the Course Menu. Add response analysis

. commands to interpret a mark in this area and

branch the user to the Cluster Menu. Do NOT,

however, change the values loaded into the

%. variables VLIST(0) or VLIST(1) for any of the

commands currently on the page.

Add the window coordinates of the cluster title to

the end of the Compare/Areas command. That

way, you do not have to change any of the

Go/If/W=? commands. You should only add one at

the bottom to branch the user marking the new

Cluster title. Be sure that branching commands

place the user at the correct location, i.e., the

correct cluster menu.

Course 20 menus should parallel the menus of the

course for which it is used to enter off-line data.

When Course 20 is used with Course 19, the course

and cluster menus should be identical in both

Course 19 and 20.

.,.~ * Adding the variables to update a student's .PD

afile is essential. Response analysis commands on

the Course Menu assign a value to VLIST(0) and

* :- VLIST(l), as can be seen in the example commands

on the following page.

X-10
Part X: Revising Course 20

Command go DaFe

Compare Areas (5 5, 5 38) 1 (7 5,7 27) ! (9 5, 9 27)

Compute Calc W- WHICHMATCH

Go If W=

Calc VLIST(o). 676; VLIST(i)- 1

CHAPT 1,1

Go If W=2

Calc VLIST(0).- 678; VLIST(I).- 2

CHAPT 1,2

Go If W=3

Calc VLIST(o).- 680; VLIST(i)- 3

Each Cluster has its own unique VLIST(0) value

which tells the CMI system where the test data is

to be stored. The first Cluster always has the

value 676 assigned to VLIST(O). The second Cluster

assigns 678 to VLIST(o), the third assigns 680, and

so on. (See Figure 2 for a list of the values assigned

to VLIST(0) for each task cluster.) You must add

commands to assign a value to the new

Cluster by adding 2 to the previous value

assigned to VLIST(O). If you have added a

twelfth cluster, this value would be 698.

0 In addition, the course level variable VLIST(1) is

assigned a value dependent upon the Cluster. The

first cluster assigns a value of I to VLIST(1). The

second cluster assigns a value of 2, the third a

value of 3 and so on. Add commands to assign a

value to VLIST(I) for the new Cluster. For

example, if you have added a twelfth cluster, you

would assign VLIST(i) a value of 12. Figure 2 lists

the values assigned to VLIST(I) for each current

task cluster.

Create the Kew

Cluster Menu o Create a cluster menu to list the tasks associated

with the newly added BNCOC Cluster. As with the

Course Menu, you will also need to assign values to

variables used on the cluster menus.

0 Access the ADAPT Courseware Editor display

(via the Author Menu) and type in the CULS label

for your new Cluster Menu file. Since you have

added the cluster at the end of those listed in the

course template (see Revise the Course Template

above), this file will probably have the CULS label:

DE.1.12.S. In the option box for Further

Instructions, type a "1" for "Create/Add."

X-ll
Part X: Revising Course 20

Create the New

Cluster Menu [cont.] * Complete the "Name That Frame" display with

the name of your choice and press 60 to edit the

frame. You will list the tasks associated with the

new cluster on a base page using the Color Palette

information listed in Part XII of this manual.

Examine the current Cluster Menu files using the

ADAPT editor for more information about

programming the Cluster Menu page to branch the

user appropriately (this will most likely be to the

data entry page you will also need to create - see

below).

* It is useful to add a HELP PAGE in this frame

that lists information a Course 20 user might need

to know, such as which tasks in this Cluster are

on-line (presented in Course 19). The user accesses

this page by marking the 7 icon on the Cluster

Menu.

* Assign a value to the course level variable

VLIST(2) for each task of the new cluster.

The value assigned for each task listed on the

cluster menu reflects its position on the page. For

example, Task 1 assigns a value of 1 to VLIST(2),

Task 2 assigns a value of 2, Task 3 a value of 3,

and so on. The following commands are taken

from the Cluster B menu as an example. (In the

first command, the variables TaskI, Task2, etc.

actually appear in the software as window

coordinates of the task titles. They are listed here

with names to clarify what they reference.)

Command Mod Fiel

Compare Areas Taskil Task 21 Task31 Task4I

Task5

Compute Calc W- WHICHMATCH

Go If (W x 1) and (W s 5)

Calc VLIST(2)'- W

CHAPT 1,1,2 (the user is branched to

the data entry page for

Cluster B)

Revise the Data

Entry Pages * Adding a Cluster to BNCOC requires that you add

programming to the Data Entry pages so that test

results for all tasks associated with the new

Cluster can be entered and stored through Course

20.

X-12
Part X: Revising Course 20

Revise the Data

Entry Pages (cont.] * Because of the memory constraints for a segment

(4096 words), 3 separate displays exist to enter the

off-line test data. Each display appears to be

Identical to the user and essentially is

programmatically except for several minor

differences. Be sure that a task selection from the

cluster menu branches to a data entry page.

* Currently the Data Entry pages are located at:

DE.1.I.l.3, DR.l.l.2.3., and DE.1.l.3.3. Off-line

data is entered for the Diagnostic Tests, Clusters BD, and Clusters E-K, respectively.

* If new Clusters are added to the present 19K

BNCOC structure, it is suggested that a new

segment be added to Unit 1, Lesson I of Course 20.

This will result in off-line data entry pages existing

at the three locations listed above and at DE.I.1.4.S.

DE.1.1.4.S would be used to enter off-line test data

for the new Cluster(s). It will contain the same 4

frames as the other data entry pages.

* Access the ADAPT Courseware Editor display via

the Author Menu and use option 4 on the Editor to

copy an existing data entry file (i.e.,

DR..1..I). Give the new file the name of

DE.I.1.4.S. Process. Then make the following

changes to the new file.

* The symbol TC displays the Cluster letter on the

data entry page. The cluster letter is indexed from

the value assigned to VLIST(1) (see Revise the BNCOC

Course Menu above), using the following commands:

Command Md. Fld

Show Remark Show the Cluster letter.

Calc TCmVLIST(l): ?, L, B, C, D,

E ...

Window 3 22, 3 24

Data TC

Locate the single page in Frame 2 of DE.I.I.4.S. Go

to the Show/Calc data field of the command shown

above (in the display construction) and add the

letter of the new Cluster behind the existing

Cluster letters. This will command the display

of the cluster letter on the data entry page when

the user selects to enter data for that cluster.

X-13
Part X: Revising Course 20

Revise the Data

Zntry Pages [cont.] * Go to the macro EVZMT. Symbol values for

VLIST(i) and VLIST(2) are used here to assign a title

for each task within the new cluster to the

variable TITLE.

Example commands in EVENT (taken from

DE.I.I.I.S, for the Diagnostic Tests) are as follows:

Command Mod Daaield

Compute If VLIST(I)=i & VLIST(2)=1

Calc TITLE.- Six Digit Grid

Compute If VLIST(I)zl & VLIST(2)=2

Cale TITLE.. Operate Radio Set

Compute If VLIST(I)=l & VLIST(2-3

Calc TITLE- Communicate Using

Visual Signals

* You will need to add commands that check the

value of VLIST(i) and VLIST(2) for your new Cluster

and accordingly assign titles for each task to TITLE.

If you've added a twelfth cluster, example

commands would be:

Command M4 D

Corpute If VLIST(i)=12 & VLIST(2)=l

Calc TITLE.- (the title of the first

task)

Compute If VLIST(i)=12 & VIIST(2)=2

Calc TITLE.- (the title of the second

task)

Titles for all subsequent tasks in this new cluster

are assigned in the same manner.

Revise Current

Print Routine Pages Adding a new cluster requires you to revise the

definition of the array BC in the print routine

software. This software is located in files

DE.2.1.1.S, DE.2.1.2.S, and DE.2.1.3.S.

Currently, SC is defined as having 61 positions

available to hold student performance data (one

position for each BNCOC testable event). When you

add a new cluster, you are adding testable events

to BNCOC, and you must expand SC to Include an

equivalent number of positions. Take the following

steps to add positions to SC.

X-14

''S *
Part X: Revising Course 20

0 Access each of the print routine files. Press

ATTU and type I to enter the Symbol Editor.

* Type in the name SC and press ENTER. The

current definition of SC should appear. The Value

Field should contain the number "60.* Change this

number to include more positions. For example, if

your new Cluster has 5 tasks, change the Value

Field from 60 to 65. Repeat for all three print

routine files.

* You must also change one branching command in

the file DE.2.1.3.S. In response analysis of the

second page, the GO command reads: GO/CHAPT/2.

Change this command to read: GO/CHAPT/2, 1, 4.

Create a New

Print Routine File If new clusters are added to BNCOC, create a new

Print Routine file. This will result in print routine

files existing at the three locations listed above and

at DE.2.1.4.S. DE.2.1.4.S would be used to collect and

print student test data for the new cluster(s). It

will contain the same commands as the other print

routine files with minor revisions to make it

specific to the new cluster(s).

* Access the ADAPT Courseware Editor via the

Author Menu and use option 4 to copy an existing

print routine file (suggestion: use DE.2.1.l.S). Give

the new file the name of DE.2.1.4.S. Process. Then

make the following changes in the new file.

9 The Listiny File Name. At present the Master

Record is printed in 3 segments: Diagnostic Tests,

Clusters B-D, and Clusters E-K. Each segment is

held in a separate listing file, respectively called

MRCCCSS.DS, MRCCCSS.LI, and MRCCCSS.L2. These

listing files are created in the print routine

software. Because you have created a new print

routine file by copying an old one, you must change

the command naming the listing file to create.

The command creating MRCCCSS.DS reads:

Command Mo= D

Compute Calc MAST- ; MR 4 & COURSE &

SECT & .DS 4

Change the 4 .DS 4 part of the data field to read:

4I I 4 Thus, the listing file for printing student

data for your new Cluster would be MRCCCSS.L3.

1-15
Part X: Revising Course 20

- Th ader. Some of the headers used in

printing the Master Record will stay the same. For

example, commands producing a header such as

OBNCOC 19K Division" would not need revision.

However, other headers are specific to the cluster

information being printed. Because you have copied

a file designed for printing another cluster,

remove header commands relating to the old

cluster and add commands specific to the new one.

See the description under the symbol HEAD in Part

XII of this manual for how the headers are created

to reflect Cluster-specific information.

* The SCORE macros. In the 3 print routine files,

each cluster has a separate macro called SCORE (see

description in Part XII). SCORE collects student

performance data from memory and holds this

information in the array SC for eventual printing

of the Master Record.

You must create a SCORE macro for your new

cluster. Between clusters, this name varies

slightly (see Figure 2). For example, Cluster B's

SCORE macro is called SCOR2, while Cluster K's is

called SCRII. If you are adding a 12th cluster, name

your SCORE macro SCR12.

Copy the commands used in the other macros.

Make sure you have preceded SCORE with the TEE

macro, so that when the system executes SCORE, it

can determine the correct starting position to read

from (see description of TEE in Part XII of this

manual). The parameter for TEE's execution for

your new cluster would be the number of your

cluster (in this example, 12).

* Also within SCORE is the variable E. This

variable identifies what positions in the array SC

to load student test data into. Positions 0-60 are

presently holding data on the Diagnostic Tests and

Clusters B-K. You need to specify that E will begin

at 61. This will instruct the system to load student

status on the first task in your new cluster into

SC(61), the second task into SC(62) and so on.

* Other ChArMe. The print routine commands

string together the data held in the array SC and

print it as one line of student information. An

example of this is taken from the Diagnostic Tests:

1-11
Part X: Revising Course 20

Command Mo Daield

Compute Calc LS(l)- ID(n) & NAME(n) & SC(O)

& SC(1) & SC(2) ... &

SC(17)

Compute Calc BWRIT (CHAN, LS(i), 0, $ERP,

ECD)

Change the position indicator to string together the

positions in SC storing data on your new Cluster.

If you have started loading these data into SC(61)

and there are 5 tasks, you would:

Compute Calc LS(l)- ID(n) & NAME(n) & SC(61)

& SC(62) & SC(63) & SC(64)

& SC(65)

One final change is the GO command at the bottom

of the print routine file. Instead of GO/CHAPT/2,1,?,

the command should read GO/CHAPT/2.

Revise the NOGO

List Files Add commands to the software that produces the

list of the number of NOGOs received by students in

BNCOC, so that student performance within your

new cluster will be included in the tallies of

NOGOs. The files are located in DE.2.2.1.S and

DE.2.2.2.3.

* Access DE.2.2.2.8 and add a TEE and SCORE

macro to read data on your new cluster.

(See descriptions of both of these macros in Part XII

of this manual.)

Nt.J The SCORE macros used in producing the list

of NOGOs are not the same as the SCORE macros

used in the print routine files.

Copy commands from a SCORE macro used In the

NOGO files. TEE is identical in both sets of

software. However, be sure to specify the number

of your new cluster (in the examples included in

this section, it would be 12) as the PARAMS mod for

TEE's execution.

Reminder Process all files at the highest level possible.

X-17
Part X: Revising Course 20

Adding a New Task

Introduction Adding a new task to an existing BNCOC Cluster

requires changes in the corresponding Cluster

Menu, so that a Course 20 user selecting that title

will be branched to a data entry page that shows

the task number and title. Values will need to be

assigned to variables so that student data can be

recorded for the new task.

Revise the

Cluster Menu e In Course 20, cluster menus are located in files

DE.l.1.S through DE.I.Ii.S. Access the cluster

menu associated with the cluster being

modified. For example, if a task has been added

to Cluster B, access the menu stored in DE.1.2.S.

9 Add the title(s) of the new task(s) to the

bottom of the Cluster menu base page. Add

response analysis commands to load the

appropriate value into the variable VLIST(2).

Each task within the cluster is assigned a

sequential VLIST(2) value from 1 to n. This value

corresponds to where the task appears on the

cluster menu. For example, VLIST(2) is assigned a

value of 1 for the first task on the menu and a

value of n for the last task (n is the number of

tasks in the cluster). Because you have added the

task title at the bottom of the page, you will avoid

having to renumber the values assigned to VLIST(2)

for the already existing tasks. Just assign your

new task a VLIST(2) value of the next available

number.

Revise the

Data Entry Pages A Access the data entry pages used with the

cluster for which you are adding a task. For

Cluster L (Diagnostic Tests/Remedial Training), this

file is located at DE.I.I.I.S. For Clusters B-D, this

file is DE.I.I.2.S. For Clusters E-K, this file is

DE.I.I.3.S.

* Enter the macro EVENT. Symbol values for

VLIST(i) and VLIST(2) are used here to assign a title

for each task within the cluster to the variable

TITLE. Add a command to assign your new task a

title. Instructions for writing this command are

included with example commands under "Adding a

New Task Cluster: Revise the Data Entry Pages."

X-18
Part X: Revising Course 20

Revise Current

Print Routine Pages Several revisions must be made to the print

routine software located in files DE.2.1.l.S

(Diagnostic Tests), DE.2.1.2.S (Clusters B-D) and

DE.2.1.3.S (Clusters E-K). These revisions are listed

below.

* The Array SC. Adding a new task requires you

to revise the definition of the array SC in all three

print files.

Currently, SC is defined as having 61 positions

available to hold student performance data (one

position for each BNCOC testable event). When you

add a new task, you are adding a testable event to

BNCOC, and you must expand SC to include that

event. Take the following steps to add a position to

SC for each new task you add to BNCOC.

a From within each print routine file, press ATT°N

and type 1 to enter the Symbol Editor.

* Type the name SC and press ENTER. The

current definition of SC should appear. The value

field should contain the number "60." Change the

number to include one more position for each task

you have added. For example, if you are adding 1

task, change the value field from 60 to 61.

Repeat for all print routine files.

* The SCORE macros. In the 3 print routine files,

each cluster has a separate macro called SCORE (see

description in Part XII of this manual). SCORE

collects student performance data from memory

and holds this information in the array SC for

eventual printing of the Master Record.

You must make one minor revision to the SCORE

* macros used to gather data on all clusters that

follow the one to which you have added a task.

This revision is to the variable called E. E

identifies what positions in the array SC to load

student test data into. Positions 0-60 presently hold

data on the Diagnostic Tests and Clusters B-K. The

system loads SC positions in the order of the tasks

within the clusters. If you have added a task to a

cluster in the middle, you must redefine the

starting position for E for the clusters that

follow.

-i L - *%J
Part X: Revising Course 20

As an example, you have added one task to Cluster

B. SCOR2 presently loads task data from this

cluster into SC18) through SC(22). Test data for the

new task will be loaded into SC(23). However, the

next cluster's SCORE macro specifies to begin

loading SC at position 23. You will need to access

this SCORE macro and change E (or E) to 24, so

that data from the first task in this cluster will

not be loaded on top of of the data for the task you

added to the last cluster. Do this in all SCORE

macros for clusters followinr the one to which you

have added a task. See Figure 2 in this section of

the manual for the SCORE macro name for each

cluster and the file where it is located.

0 The Headers. The Master Record produced

through Course 20 contains a header identifying the

cluster and task. Student test results are printed

beneath this header. The header for each task

takes the form of the Cluster letter and the task

number. (For example, the 5 tasks in Cluster B

appear in the header as B1 B2 B3 B4 B5.)

Go to the header command for that cluster and add

an identifier for the new task. Adding a task to

Cluster B, for example, would require you to add

"B6" to Cluster B's header command. You do not

need to change the commands for the other

clusters. (See the description of HEAD in Part XII of

this manual.)

* Other Chanees. The print routine commands

string together the data held in the array SC and

print it as one line of student information. An

example of this is taken from the Diagnostic Tests.

Command o Dat il

Compute Calc LS(1). ID(n) & NAME(n) & SC(0)

& SC(1) & SC(2)... & SC(17)

Compute Calc BWRIT (CHAN, LS(l), 0, $ERP,

ECD)

For the cluster to which you have added a task,

you will need to add one more "& SC(n)" to the

command stringing the task results held in SC

together. For example, if you have added a task to

the Diagnostic Tests, you would add "& SC(18)" to

the command shown above.

1-20
Part X: Revising Course 20

.This revision, however, requires that you revise

the commands that string together other task data.

Using the example above, you would have to access

the next print routine file (DE.2.1.2.S) and go to the

command that strings the SC positions together for

printing. Take out the first SC position specified

(which should be identical to the one you added in

the other print routine file). Add a position at the

end of the command. For example, task results in

Clusters B-D are currently held in and printed

from SC(18) - SC(39). Change the command to print

SC(19) - SC(40). Also access DE.2.1.3.S (which prints

results from Clusters E-K) and make appropriate

changes there.

Reminder Process all revised files at the highest level possible.

I-.2

4

.

X1-21
--

Deleting a Cluster

Introduction When a Cluster is deleted from the 19K BNCOC

curriculum, changes must be made to menu pages

in Course 20.

Recommendation No revision to the course template should be

made using Makecourse. Eliminating a unit

(cluster) from the template, particularly a unit in

the middle, would force the renumbering of all

units that follow. This would require complex and

extensive revisions through all files pertaining to

those units.

Therefore, it is best to alter Course 20 on the

surface, i.e., change the options presented to the

user. For example, if the option of entering offline data for Cluster B were removed from Course

20 menus, the user would have no way of

accessing this material and Cluster B would appear

to be "deleted" to the student.

Revise the

BNCOC Course Menu These instructions assume that the Cluster to be

"deleted" has not been dropped from the course

template established for 19K BNCOC using

Makecourse.

0 In order to delete a cluster "on the surface," use

the ADAPT Courseware Editor display to access

the BCOC Course Menu, located in file

DE.I.S. Remove the title of the cluster to be

deleted and reformat the page, if necessary.

Remove response analysis commands that would

branch a user to that Cluster's menu. Identify this

command by the value assigned to VLIST(1): the

first cluster assigns a value of 1, the second 2, the

third 3, and so on. If you are deleting the sixth

cluster from BNCOC, the branching command to be

removed assigns VLIST(1) a value of 6.

"fS i-X2

''-22
Part X: Revising Course 20

Revise the

BUCOC Course Menu

(con't) 1mrtant: No changes should be made to the

variable VLIST(O) used in this chapter (DE.1.S).

However, the values assigned to VLIST(l) for the

clusters following the one you have "deleted" must

be renumbered. If you have dropped Cluster F (the

sixth cluster), the value assigned to VLIST(1) for

Cluster G (the seventh cluster) must be changed

from 7 to 6. Likewise, Cluster H should now assign

a value of 7 (instead of 8) to VLIST(i), and so on,

until the last cluster has been renumbered. This

number is used to display the cluster letter on the

data entry page. If you do not change the VLIST(I)

value for the clusters following the one you have

"deleted", the wrong cluster letter will be

displayed. You will also need to make identical

changes to the data entry pages (see "Revise the

Data Entry Pages" below).

Revise Other

Menus Because you are dropping a BNCOC Cluster *on the

surface", you will have to modify the Cluster

menus that follow. For example, if BNCOC has

*" dropped Cluster C, Land Navigation, Cluster D will

appear to become Cluster C, E will appear to become

D, and so on.

: Access all cluster menus that follow the

cluster to be *deleted.* These menus are

located in files ranging from DE.I.I.S to DE.I.II.S.

Your revisions will be typographical: change the

cluster letters identified on menu base pages to

reflect the new BNCOC cluster order.

X-23

4 (
Part X. Revising Course 20

Revise the Data

Entry Pages o Revise the data entry pages associated with the

cluster you are "deleting" and all clusters that

follow. In *Revise the BNCOC Course Menuo above,

you were instructed to change the VLIST(I) value

assigned to the clusters following the one you are

"deleting." Now adjust the data entry pages to

reflect those revisions.

e The data entry pages are as follows: for Cluster

L, Diagnostic Tests/Remedial Training, DE.l.1.l.S; for

Clusters B-D, DE.I.I.2.S; for Clusters E-K, DE.I.I.3.S.

Let us say that you have decided to udelete" Cluster

C. You would need to access the data entry page at

DE.1.1.2.S. and remove commands from the macro

EVENT that reference Cluster C. (These are

commands that contain the statement

"Compute/If/VLIST(l)=3. ) Then you must revise

commands using "VLIST(I)=4" to say "VLIST(l)=-3" (to

reflect revisions made at the Course Menu).

o Access any data entry pages used for Clusters

followlng the one you have "deleted" and reduce the

values of VLIST(l) by 1. In this example, you would

also access the data entry page located at DE.I.I.3.S

and change all *Compute/If/VIST()=n" commands

to check for a VLIST(I) value of "n-l." Because

Cluster H now appears on the surface as Cluster G,

it has a new VLIST(i) value, and the old command

in EVENT will not work.

X-24
Part X: Revising Course 20

Revise Current

Print Routine Files The 3 print routine files are located at: DE.2.1.l.S

(Diagnostic Tests), DE.2.1.2.S (Clusters B-D) and

DE.2.1.3.S (Clusters E-K). These files collect and

print student "score" data on all BNCOC testable

events. Revisions must be made so that the Master

Record that is produced does not show the "deleted"

cluster. Make the following changes.

The Heaers. The Master Record produced

through Course 20 contains a header identifying all

clusters and their tasks. Student test results are

printed beneath the header. The header for each

task takes the form of the Cluster letter and the

task number. For example, the 5 tasks in Cluster B

appear in the header as B1 B2 B3 B4 B5.

Revise the header identifiers as needed. If you

have "deleted" Cluster B, for example, you must

remove the header command that prints BI-BS.

Then revise the header commands for Clusters C-K,

so that they reflect their new designations. For

example, the header for the 9 tasks within Cluster

C should not read CI-C9, because Cluster C now

appears on the surface as Cluster B. Change the

header command to BI-B9. Repeat for all clusters

whose letter designation has been changed by your

"deleting" of a cluster. (See the description of HEAD

in Part XII of this manual.)

* The SCORE macro. In the 3 print routine files,

each cluster has a separate macro called SCORE (see

description of SCORE In Part XII of this manual).

SCORE collects student performance data from

memory and holds this information in the array SC

for eventual printing of the Master Record.

No data need to be collected about the cluster you

have "deleted." Figure 2 in this section of the

manual includes the specific name of the SCORE

macro for your cluster and the print routine file

where it is located. Remove the command that

includes this macro. For example, you might drop

Cluster B. Cluster B's SCORE macro is called SCOR2.

Remove the "Include/Macro/SCOR2" command.

Now, no data will be collected or printed about

your "deleted" cluster. Leave commands including

the SCORE macro for other clusters intact.

X-25
Part X: Revising Course 20

Revise Current

Print Routine

Files [cont.] * The Print Command. In the printing of the

Master Record, student data are extracted from

memory and loaded into the array SC. SC is then

strung together and loaded into a variable called

LS(). The contents of LS(I) is written to a file as a

single line of data for each student.

After all data are collected and written to the

appropriate file, a TICCIT menu will appear for

each file created as a result of the Print command.

MRCCCSS.DS, MRCCCSS.L1, and MRCCCSS.L2 are

presently the 3 files created which contain results

for the Diagnostic Tests, Clusters B-D, and Clusters

E-K respectively. If no printer exists or you desire

to print the file later, press XXIT.

Because you are no longer collecting or printing

student data from the "deleted" Cluster, remove all

references to the SC positions associated with that

cluster. For example, you have "deleted" Cluster B.

Currently, Cluster B data are collected in and

printed from SC(18) - SC(22). Find the command

that loads SC into LS(n) and remove all reference to

these positions. Leave references to all other

positions intact. Now the system will not print

any information about your "deleted" cluster.

Important Because you have not revised the course template

established through Makecourse , you will not

change any other references to the locations in

memory where the system reads or writes student

test data. As far as the system is concerned, your

"deleted" cluster still exists. Student data will still

be read from and written to the same places in

memory as before, and the space associated with

your "deleted" cluster will be blank.

Result Course 20 will not branch the user to the "deleted"

cluster's materials. Subsequent clusters have

been relettered. On the surface, the Cluster

appears to be deleted.

X-26
Part X: Revising Course 20

Deleting a Task

Introduction If a task is deleted from the 19K BNCOC course,

changes to its cluster's menu and to certain Course

20 variables must be made.

Revising the

Cluster Menu * Access the cluster menu to which the task

to be deleted belongs. The cluster menus are

located in files DE.I.I.B through DE.I.11,S. As an

example, if a task is deleted from the second

cluster (Cluster B), access DE.1.2.S.

9 Remove the task title from the cluster menu

base page. If the task to be deleted is located in

the middle of other tasks, you will probably want

to close the gap created on the base page by

compressing the list of remaining tasks. In

response analysis, branching commands for a user

mark in this area should be removed and the

window coordinates for the other task titles

revised, if necessary.

* Each task listed on the Cluster menu is assigned

a VLIST(2) value, starting with 1 for the first task,

2 for the second, and so on. When you remove any

task but the last one, you must renumber the

VLIBT(2) values assigned to the tasks that

follow the deleted one in that cluster. For

example, if in Cluster B (which has 5 tasks) you

decide to delete the second task, Task 3 becomes

Task 2, Task 4 becomes Task 3, and so on. Change

the VLLST(2) values to reflect these tasks' new

positions on the screen.

X-27
Part X: Revising Course 20

Revise the Data

Kntry Pages Currently the data entry pages are located at:

DE.I.I.I.S (Diagnostic Tests), DE.I.I.2.S (Clusters B-D),

and DE.I.I.3.S (Clusters E-K). Access the data

entry page pertaining to the cluster from

which you are deleting a task.

* Go to the macro VERT. Symbol values for

VLIST(l) and VLIST(2) are used here to assign a title

for each task within the clusters covered by the

data entry page. Example commands in EVENT

(taken from DE.I.I.2.S for Cluster B) are as follows:

Command Mod

Compute If VLIST(I)=2 & VLIST(2)=l

Calc TITLE- Duties/Responsibilities of

an NCO

Compute If VLIST(I)=2 & VLIST(2)=2

Calc TITLE- Conduct Performance

Counseling with a

Subordinate

Compute If VLIST()=2 & VLIST(2)-3

Calc TITLE- BTMS

Remove commands assigning a title to your

deleted task. Using the example presented above,

you would remove the second command. Then, you

must revise the Cluster B commands that follow, so

that the VLIST(2) values correspond to the revised

assignments made when you revised the Cluster

Menu (see above). For example, In the third

command, the Compute/If/VLIST(2)-3 would become

Compute/If/VLIST(2--2. Do not alter any commands

relating to other clusters, only those pertaining to

the cluster from which you are deleting a task.

X-20
Part X: Revising Course 20

Revise Current

Print Routine Piles Deleting a task requires you to make revisions to

the print routine files. These files are currently

located at: DE.2.1.1.S (Diagnostic Tests), DE.2.1.2.S

(Clusters B-D), and DE.2.1.3.S (Clusters E-K). Make

the following changes.

0 The SCORE macros. In the 3 print routine files,

each cluster has a separate macro called SCORE (see

description in Part XII of this manual). SCORE

collects student performance data from memory,

converts it to GO, NOGO, or No Attempt, and holds

this information In the array SC for eventual

printing of the Master Record.

You must make minor revisions to the SCORE

macros that gather data on all clusters following

the one from which you have deleted a task. This

revision is to the variable E. E identifies the

starting position in the array SC to begin loading

student test data into. Because you have deleted a

task, the position of SC used to hold data on that

task will now be used to hold data on another task.

This shifts the positions into which all task data

following your deleted task are loaded. You need to

redefine the value of K in all SCORK macros

following the one to which your deleted task

belongs. See Figure 2 in this section of the

manual for the SCORE macro name assigned to each

cluster and the file where it is located.

As an example, you have deleted Task 2 from

Cluster B. E Is designated as beginning at 18.

Because there are currently 5 tasks in Cluster B,

SC positions for this cluster are SC(18) - SC(22).

Deleting a task will result in using only positions

SC(18) - SC(21). The macro for Cluster C, however,

starts loading data at SC(23). You would need to

access that macro and revise E to 22. Similar

changes would need to be made in the SCORE

macros pertaining to Clusters D-K.

X-29
Part X: Rwvisirg Courae 20

Revise Current

Print Routine Files

(cont) T ea.rtsi. The Master Record produced

through Course 20 contains a header identifying the

cluster and task. Student test results are printed

beneath this header. You will need to so to the

header command and remove the identifiers for the

number of tasks you are deleting.

Using the same example as above, you decide to

delete Task 2 from Cluster B. The header for this

Cluster is "Bi B2 B3 B4 B5." You now have one less

task in this cluster, so you would remove "B5"

from the header command. (See the description of

HEAD in Part XII of this manual.)

* Other Chanes. The print routine commands

string together the data held in the array SC and

print it as one line of student data. An example of

this is taken from the Diagnostic Tests.

Command Md Daaiel

Compute Calc LS(1)4- ID(n) & NAME(n) &

SC(o) & SC() & SC(2)

& SC(17)

Compute Calc BWRIT (CHAN, LS(I), 0, $ERP,

ECD)

For the cluster from which you have deleted a

task, you need to remove the last SC position

designated for printing. In all other SC commands

following the one you have altered, you need to

adjust the SC positions to agree with the revisions

you made in the data entry files (see "Revise the

Data Entry Pages" above). Commands to print

positions of SC for each cluster should be identical

to the positions specified in each cluster's SCORE

macro.

Using the commands above as an example, you

would remove the "& SC(17)" from the first

command. Then you would find the commands

stringing together positions of SC for Cluster B and

make sure that the first position to be printed was

"SC(17)". You would also remove the final position

specified and make sure that this became the first

position printed in Cluster C, and so on through all

the clusters that follow.

Reminder Make sure you process all files you have altered at

the highest level possible.

X-30
Part X: Revising Course 20

Using Course 20 With A Course Other Than Course 19

Introduction The 19K BNCOC CMI System, Course 20, was

developed to manage The 19K BNCOC for Tank

Commanders program, Course 19 on MicroTCCIT.

The System could be modified to manage other

BNCOC courses which use MicroTICCIT to present

part of the instruction.

Because it is impossible to predict the exact nature

of the new course to be managed by Course 20,

these instructions provide only general guidelines.

More specific instructions are found in the other

sections of this part of the Manual; however, only

a person who thoroughly understands how Course

20 works should attempt to modify the course

beyond those specific instructions that are included

in the preceeding sections of Part X.

When to Modify

Course 20 The TICCIT System's built-in courseware

management capabilities allow MicroTICCIT users to

track student performance data through the

Student Progress Report utility. The 19K BNCOC CMI

System, Course 20, was developed for three major

reasons. They are:

* A significant part of the 19K BNCOC instructional

program is conducted "off-line", i.e., not on

MicroTICCIT. This situation will continue

indefinitely because much of the instructional

program requires students to perform outside of

the classroom using actual M-1 tanks and other

equipment.

* The Army Research Institute (ARI) which initiated

the MicroTICCIT project required that MicroTICCIT

courseware be light pen driven. This requirement

precludes use of the built-in TICCIT maps and use

of the MicroTICCIT function keys.

* MicroTICCIT does not provide the means to create

specialized report formats or to modify the reports

produced by the Student Progress Report utility.

If a course were conducted primarily on-line and if

course managers were willing to use reports

produced by the Student Progress Report utility,

then the time required to modify The 19K BNCOC

CMI System's Course 20 would not be justified.

X-31

L?
Part X: Revi~ing Courtv 20

Who Should Modify

Course 20 The documentation is included in this Manual has

been prepared so that both Course 19 and Course 20

can be modified as changes occur in the 19K BNCOC

program. Changes may also include additional

MicroTICCIT courseware development.

The documentation can also be used to modify

Course 20 so that the CMI System can be used to

manage another course with a similar structure;

that is, a program with Task Clusters divided into

Tasks with those Tasks being the "testable events"

within the program.

Ideally, Course 20 should be modified by persons

who are experienced ADAPT programmers, not

merely ADAPT courseware developers. These people

must be very knowledgable of the TICCIT operating

system as well as RDOS. In addition, the people

who modify the System need to understand the

testing policies of the Army with respect to the

new course to be managed. The people who set out

to modify the System need to be very familiar with

the structure of the new course and MicroTICCIT

courseware to be managed.

User Interfaces Any new course to be managed by the CMI System

should follow the general guidelines established by

the Army Research Institute (ARI) for MicroTICCIT

courseware development. That is, the courseware

should be menu-driven using a light pen as the

primary input device. The TICCIT "map" requires

use of the MicroTICCIT keyboard and is inconsistent

with the courseware developed for 19K BNCOC

including The 19K BNCOC CMI System, Course 20.

Course Structure Because the CMI System was designed to manage

the 19K BNCOC course, it assumes that the course is

divided into Task Clusters which correspond to

TICCIT units and that each Task Cluster consists of

tasks which are scored as GO or NOGO. These

tasks correspond to TICCIT lessons.

X-32
Part X: Revising Course 20

TICCIT Tests TICCIT only allows testing at the course, unit, or

lesson levels: the CMI System assumes all tests will

be placed at the lesson level. Therefore, the new

course to be managed by the CMI System must

place all "testable events" at the lesson level.

TICCIT allows a student to take a test as many as 7

times. BNCOC policy, however, allows a student to

take a test only 3 times. The CMI System, as it is

currently designed, matches BNCOC philosophy and

assumes that a student will take a test no more

than 3 times. Any course to be managed by the

CMI System will have this feature unless extensive

modification of the program is performed.

Creating a

New Course * The first step to be taken in the creation of any

course is to create the course template using

Makecourse. The course structure should match

the proposed BNCOC course to be managed by the

CMI System. This course will correspond to Course

19, the course which contains the MicroTICCIT

instructional materials for 19K BNCOC.

'0 To modify Course 20 so that it can manage this

new course, first identify the number of units

(Task Clusters) in the new course; then identify the

number of lessons (Tasks).

* The "Task" level material should be developed at

the TICCIT "lesson level." It is important that

developers follow the instructions provided

elsewhere In this Manual for developing TICCIT

tests.

X--

X-33
Part X: Revising Cours 20

Changing Course 20 No changes will be required for the Course 20

structure unless the new course has more than 11

Task Clusters: however, it would be advisable to

make a copy of the complete course, renaming and

renumbering it, before beginning to modify the

course. Changing Course 20 so that it can manage

another course will result in its being unable to

manage 19K BNCOC.

The major change that will be required is

modifying the menus in Unit I so that they match

the titles of the new course. Instructions provided

pin this part of the Manual provide the information

needed to make these changes.

Revise Unit 1 Unit 1 of Course 20 contains the 19K BNCOC course

structure. The file labeled DE.I.S contains the

BNCOC Course Menu listing all the task clusters.

The Cluster Menus are in lesson files ranging from

DE.I.I.S to DE.I.IL.S, a file per cluster. Marking a

task title on any cluster menu leads to one of three

places: DE.I.I.I.S, DE.I.I.2.S, or DE.1.I.3.S., where

identical off-line data entry pages are stored. Here

the student test results are entered and the

program writes the data to the appropriate

memory location in the student's permanent data

file (.PD) associated with Course 19.

You would need to revise each of the files in Unit I

starting with the Course Menu which should list

'A the Task Clusters in the new course. Cluster Menus

in each lesson file should be revised so that Menus

list the appropriate Tasks.

The off-line data entry pages would not need to be

revised; however, the variables which store the

names of Tasks and place them on these pages

would need to be revised so that the correct names

would be displayed.

•X-34

A' . 1) " 2%'-5-
Part X: Revising Course 20

Revise Unit 2 The print routines for the Master Record are

located at the segment level in files DE.2.1.I.S

(Diagnostic Tests), DE.2.1.2.S (Clusters B-D), and

DE.2.1.3.S (Clusters E-K). Each print routine creates

a separate file to be printed: results of the

Diagnostic Tests are printed from a listing file

called MRCCCSS.DS; results for Clusters B-D are

printed from a file called MRCCCSS.LI; and results

from Clusters E-K are printed from a file called

MRcccss.L2. (Note: "CCC" is the 3-digit course

number and SS is the 2-digit section number.)

The print routine for the list of NOGOs is located at

DE.2.2.l.S (for Clusters B-D) and DE.2.2.2.S (for

Clusters E-K). The total number of NOGOs is

collected from information contained in each

student's PD file but does not include NOGOs for

the Diagnostic Tests. The listing file for the list of

NOGOs is named NOGOCCCSS.LS. The printed result

Orl has three columns of information: student name, student ID number, and total number of NOGOs.

Assuming that the new course includes Prerequisite

Tasks and Diagnostic Tests and other Tasks grouped

by Task Cluster associated with the course, place

all Prerequisite Tasks in the first Task Cluster

(unit).

Header files will also need to be revised to match

the name of the new course.

Unit 3 Unit 3 should not require revision as these

programs produce the Master Record using data

collected according to instructions which are

included in Units I and 2.

X-35
Part X: Revising Course 20

F 16URE 2:

VALUES ASSiED TO VLIST(O), VLIST(I), VLIST(2), MID SC ARRAY

ELDENIS M COURSE 20

0ff--lie Data Entry Pap: DE..1.1.5.

Print Rport loation: DE2.1.

Listing File: MRcmssDS

- Custer Tak Co. Lint Lin Maoro* ,LI.T SC*

(0) (1) (2)

; L:,Diagm.stis Tose! / 1: Sbc Digit Grid ON 1 I SCRE 676 1 1 0

Remeial 2: Operate Ratio ON 1 2 SCORE 676 1 2 1

Traidhg

3: Communicate BN 1 3 SCORE 676 1 3 2

using Yistal Signals

4: Reoognize BN 1 4 SCORE 676 1 4 3

, Friemndl/Threat

Armored VYedole

-) 5: Establish Tank BN 1 5 SCORE 676 1 5 4

Fking Positions

6: APRT ON I 6 SCORE 676 1 6 5

7: I AlMO BN 1 7 rORE 676 1 7 6

8: Load Main GunO 8 SCR 676 1 8 7

9: Loader's I lsfbe BN 1 9 SCORE 676 1 9 8

10: Oreelock ON 1 10 SCORE 676 1 10 9

S11 :Si*equnt N 1 11 SCORE 676 1 11 10

Fire Commnd

12:DrierStation BN 1 12 SCORE 676 1 12 11

13:1-240 ON 1 13 SCORE 676 1 13 12

14:"M-2 ON 1 14 SCORE 676 1 14 13

The macro listed in thds coumn is boated in the sam file as the Print Report

listed at ttw top of a*v pae.

*'SC array elemtu .

X-36

-'-x11-
Part X: Revising Course 20

0fr-** Data Entry Pap: DE.l..1 S.

ProitrtLocatio: DE2.1. 1.

Llg Fib: MRo o s

ckstr Tas Co. U.t Lsn Macro T Sc

(0) (1) (2)

L (cnt.) 1 5:4unrsMisfie ON 1 15 SRCE 676 1 15 14

16: PrepR 9N 1 16 SCnE 676 1 16 15

Oumwrs Station

17: PrecuoFire 9N 1 17 SCOK 676 1 17 16

18: Battstation 9N 1 18 grn 676 1 18 17

Off-** Data Entry Pap: DE.I.1.2.S.

Print Report Location: DE.2.1 .2.S

Lidg File: MASTEIU.I

Ckister Task Co. Lnt Lsn Macro YLIST SC

(0) (1) (2)

*: CUDntins I: Dutles/Rhponsi- ON 2 1 ;CCrn?2 678 2 1 18

and ERspmssi- blitles of an NCO

2:CmowtPor 914 2 2 CR2 679 2 2 19

4 muo, Cws ltng

with a Subordinate

3:BTMS N 2 3 GCOR2 678 2 3 20

4: PhVsioal Fftnes BN 2 4 ECOR2 678 2 4 21

kwtfaton

5:MILES BN 2 5 SCOR2 678 2 5 22

C:Lad I: Marginalf 9O4 3 1 OWN 680 3 1 23

2:ArAhnuth/Baok N 3 2 C 680 3 2 24

3:FildExpee ON 3 3 SCR3 680 3 3 25

4: Iftnti Torran BN 3 4 nr3 680 3 4 26

Fe atu-3

1-37
Part X: Revi~ing Cour5c 20

Off-**i, Data EnB"j Pap: DE.1 .1 2.S.

Print Report Location: DE2.1.2.9.

Listig File: MRCCCSSII

ClIster Task Co. Lnt L Micro LIST SC

(0) (1) (2)

C: Lmd bv

(co0t 5:0rtoNVMap IN 3 5 SCOR3 680 3 5 27

6:DetermineLooaflo Bn 3 6 SCOR3 680 3 6 28

7: bwsection & ON 3 7 SCOR3 680 3 7 29

8: Terrain Analysis IN 3 8 SCOR3 680 3 8 30

9: Nav%& from ON 3 9 SCOr 680 3 9 31

AtoB

D:MCDffms. I:NBC-RPAIMt BN 4 1 SCCR4 682 4 1 32

2:lNC-4 Iports ON 4 2 SCOR4 682 4 2 33

3:I4-174 Series 1N 4 3 SCOR4 682 4 3 34

Radlaciter

4:Re.ad/Rport 1N 4 4 SCOI4 682 4 4 35 RM Dtionm

5:Prepar, C SW 4 5 SCR4 682 4 5 36

Attack

6:MOPP 11 4 6 SCOR4 682 4 6 37

7:rM256Cmhmnuial ON 4 7 SCOR4 682 4 7 38

Detector Kit

8:httlate 1N 4 8 SCOR4 682 4 S 39

rmmk" ProowuS

X-38
Part X: R-vioing Couroe 20

Off-** Data Entry Page: )E.1.1 .S.

N Print Report Location: DE.2.1 Z3S.

Listing Fft: MRCCCSS.L2

Clster Task Co. Unt Lsn Macro !.IST SC

(0) (1) (2)

E:Hilitar I:CEOI BN 5 1 r MR5 684 5 1 40

Cummulsatlsms

2: RoogniuECM BN 5 2 SCOR 684 5 2 41

& knpkment ECC1

3: Hot-Loop V" BN 5 3 SCORS 684 5 3 42

4: ConductField BN 5 4 SCORS 684 5 4 43

Expedient Antena

F: Mim Varfare 1: Prpar/Sudlmt ON 6 1 SCOR6 686 6 1 44

Standad shen

Mortaring and

Bwbing Report

2:Irstal/Rfvea BN 6 2 SCOR6 686 6 2 45

Hasty Protective

Mine Field

9: Tactis 1 :Pr 'pa ssue SN 7 1 SCOR? 688 7 1 46

Oral Operations Report

2:lrectConsollda- BN 7 2 SCOR? 688 7 2 47

tion & ReorWanation

n the Objective

H:Hantemame I :InspectDAForm BN 8 1 SCORS 690 8 1 48

2408-4 for Acuracy

2:SupervseMat- BN 8 2 SCORe 690 8 2 49

te on TO&

Equxwnt

I: TC Statml 1 : Cal for Fire SN 9 1 SCOR9 692 9 1 50

Tank Swmmr'

2: SAWet Frg SN 9 2 SCOR9 692 9 2 51

Position

3: Esttnate Rage BN 9 3 C 692 9 3 52

4: Training Devices SN 9 4 SCOR9 692 9 4 53

'-39

.%
Part X: Rwvming Courow 20

Off-TWr Data En"r Pap: DE. I.I Z.S.

Pr*WtReW rLocatio: DE.2.1 .

L"skb Ff1.: MASTRJ2

CatrTask Co. Um~ Lsn Macro YIT s

(0) (1) (2)

1(cent.) 3: mlCVS ON4 9 5 SC39 692 9 5 54

6: MI T*/M* m 19 6 ~09 692 96 55

7: M2 M&Amofwm 31 9 7 GCORS 692 9 7 56

8: Dfiot Main Ow w1 9 8 9 R 692 9 8 57

9: Dqap Twapt 914 9 9 SC9 692 9 9 58

fro CwS

- ~ J: TaetioI l:FTX 914 10 1 SCRIO 694 10 1 59

Field Tra"b

Exeos"

K: Sitmathsul 1:STX"- en 11 1 SCR11 696 11 1 60

Trab

Exe is

* X-40
Part XI: Creating a TICCIT Test

PART XI. Creating a TICCIT Test: Guidelines For MicroTICCIT

Developers

Table of Contents

page

List of Figures XI-3

Introduction X1-5

1. Test Dvelopment Requirements XI-15

2. Creating the APT Test Control (TC) File XI-16

3. Creating the ADAPT Test Explanation (E) File XI-19

*4. Creating the ADAPT Test (T) File XI-22

MI-1
Part XI: Creating a TICCIT Tebt

11-2

( / ' ~~~~~L 0 *
Part XI: Creating a TICCIT Test

List of Figures

1. MicroTICCIT Courseware Projects and

Corresponding TICCIT Labels XI-8

2. ADAPT Test Files XI-1O

3. Steps in Test Construction 11-11

4. Test Result Codes on Master Record XI-12

11-3
rest # XT: Cn"2uHS t TICCIT Twbt

11-4
Part XI: Creating a TICCIT Test

Introduction

The instructions presented in this section of the Manual were written

to insure that MicroTICCIT courseware developed by other MicroTICCIT

projects will properly interface with the 19K BNCOC CMI system, Course

20, The 19K BNCOC CMI System. MicroTICCIT courseware will be placed in

Course 19, 19K BNCOC for Tank Commanders. Two major considerations

impact on the 19K BNCOC CMI system:

1. Placement of the courseware in the appropriate unit/lesson level of

the 19K BNCOC course; and

2. Placement of an ADAPT test file and other related files required to

access that test at the appropriate TICCIT course locations.

BNCOC Course Structure and MicroTICCIT Course Structure

BDCOC Instructional Organization

The 19K BNCOC Program of Instruction (POI) divides instruction into

Task Clusters (e.g., Land Navigation, Military Communications, etc.). Each

Task Cluster is sub-divided into tasks and sub-tasks. Testable events (tasks

listed on the BNCOC Master Record) isually correspond to primary tasks;

however, this is not consistent. In some cases tasks are combined into one

u"testable event." In other cases the testable event corresponds to a sub-task.

The 19K BNCOC course structure is dynamic and changes from cycle to cycle.

Changes will also result from current TTFA projects. For example, the Land

Navigation Cluster included eleven testable events in previous cycles, but will

be reduced to nine testable events as a result of the MicroTICCIT Land

Navigation development.

MicroTICCIT 191 BNCOC Course Structure

A TICCIT course (created through the Makecourse utility) consists of

units and lessons. Segments are no defined as part of the course structure.

The CMI System is based on a decision to place all testable events at the

TICCIT Lesson Level in order to most efficiently produce the BNCOC Master

Record. Thus, the 19K BNCOC TICCIT course (Course 19) corresponds to the 19K

BNCOC Program of Instruction as follows:

" TICCIT UNIT * BNCOC Task Cluster

" TICCIT LESSON • BNCOC Task (or testable event)

" TICCIT SEGMENT e BNCOC Sub-Task

11-5
Part XI: Creating a TICCIT Test

19K BCOC Course Structure on MicroTICCIT

Course 19, 19K BNCOC for Tank Commanders, contains menus for the

19K BNCOC course. The course begins with a light pen driven course menu

listing all the Diagnostic Tests and Remedial Lessons and all of the 19K BNCOC

task clusters. The course also includes light pen driven menus for each task

cluster listing all of the tasks associated with that cluster. All MicroTICCIT

developers are currently developing courseware for tasks (lesson level

courseware in the TICCI- environment). MicroTICCIT courseware eventually

will be "inserted" within the 19K course structure at the appropriate lesson

level. This courseware may have its own menus as well as instructional

material; however, developers will not need to develop menus at the course

level or the unit level which are required by TICCIT to access material at the

lesson level. The course template for 19K BNCOC will be created at the Ft.

Knox site using Makecourse. The course will provide the structure required

to insert all appropriate (Menu) courseware as well as instructional

courseware developed by the CMI project (Diagnostic tests and remedial

activities), Land Navigation lessons, and other lessons developed by other

MicroTCCIT developers.

TICCIT Course Structure at Development Sites

Each courseware site must create a TICCIT course template using

Makecourse in order to begin development. If more than one developer is

working on a project, each person will probably create a duplicate TICCIT

• course on the system, even though these *courses" will be combined when

the project has been completed. . I

For example, the Land Navigation Task Cluster (Unit 3) includes nine

Tasks (Lessons). At the development site, a course might be created

containing one Unit and nine Lessns (one lesson for each task). Duplicate

copies of this course structure might be created for each person working on

the project. APT Map Files could be created temporarily to move through

the courseware in student mode for debugging purposes; however, these files

would not be transferred to Ft. Knox and in fact would cause problems if

they were installed at the receiving site. MicroTCCIT developers will need

to create a separate stand-alone version of their courseware for

demonstrations and contractual requirements; however, to archive the

courseware for transfer to Ft. Knox and inclusion in the 19 BNCOC course,

developers should DUMP only the courseware files at the Lesson Level and

below.

Each courseware development site could be given a copy of Course 19

so that they can understand exactly how the system works and perhaps use

appropriate ICONS or ADAPT programming sequences in their development

efforts.

The sample TICCIT Labels below indicate the levels at which

MicroTICCIT developers will create Task-Related courseware for 19K BNCOC.

BN.S (Course menu)

BN.I.S (Task Cluster menu)

BN.I.I.3 (Menu listing choices related to Task I of Cluster 1)

BN.1.2.S (Menu listing choices related to Task 2 of Cluster 1)

BN.1.2.1.3 (Segment one of instruction for Task 2)

BN.1.2.I.T (Test file for Task 2)

a tX?2.m0 -' 1
Part XI: Creating a TICCIT Test

Eventually, all pieces of the course will be combined into one TICCIT

course. MicroTICCIT courseware developed by each MicroTICCIT project must

then fit into the 19K BNCOC course structure provided by Course 19. The

reasons for combining all parts of the 19K BNCOC course into "one TICCIT

course" is so that we can store student performance data into one TICCIT

Permanent Data Area (PDA) and produce one 19K BNCOC Master Record.

Although each site will create its own course (or courses) for

development purposes, the TICCIT operator at Ft. Knox will need to insert the

various pieces of 19K BNCOC courseware in place. Developers at each

MicroTICCIT site and the Ft. Knox operators, therefore, need to see how the

courseware they are producing fits into the 19K BNCOC course structure.

Figure 1, MicroTICCIT Courseware projects, and Corresponding TICCIT Labels,

below lists each project and its location in Course 19.

-.

1I-7
Part XI: Creating a TICCIT Tczt

Figure 1: MicroTICCIT Courseware Projecis

and Corresponding TICCIT Labels

MicroTICCIT Project Corresponding TICCIT Labels Test Piles

Instruction

lK BNCOC Course Structure

Course Menu BN.S

Unit I Menu (Prerequisite Tasks) BN.I.S

Unit 2 Menu (NCO Duties & Responsibilities) BN.2.S

Unit 3 Menu (Land Navigation) BN.3.S

Unit 4 Menu (NBC Defense) BN.4.S

Unit 5 Menu (Military Communications) BN.5.S

Unit 6 Menu (Mine Warfare) BN.6.S

Unit 7 Menu (Tactics) BN.7.S

Unit 8 Menu (Maintenance) BN.8.S

Unit 9 Menu (Tank Commander's Station) BN,9.S

Unit 10 Menu (FTX) BN.10.S

Unit 11 Menu (STX B-C) BN.I1.S

Diagnostic Testing and Remedial Training

Operate a Radio Set BN.1.2.1.S BN.l.2.I.T

Communicate Using Visual Signals BN.I.3.I.S BN.l.3.I.T

Recognize/Identify Friendly/Threat

Armoured Vehicles BN.1.4.l.S BN.1.4.I.T

Establish Tank Firing Position BN. 1..1.S BN.1.5.1. T

Land Navigation

Azimuth and Back Azimuth BN.3.2.1.S off-line

Field Expedient Methods BN.3.3.1.S BN.3.3.1.T

* Identify Terrain Features BN.3.4.1.S off-line

Orient Map BN.3.5.1.S BN.3.5.1.T

Determine Location BK.3.6.I.S BN.3.6.I.T

Intersection and Resection BN.3.7.l.S BN.3.7.1.T

Terrain Analysis BN.3.8.l.S BN.3.8.1.T

Navigate From A to B BN.3.9.1.S

7Military Communications CEOI Bbl.5.1.I.S BN.5.1.1.T

Tank Commander's Station/Tank Gunnery Call for Fire BN.9.1.I.S BN.9.1.1.T

19K BNCOC on-line tests

Conduct Performance Counseling BN.2.2.S BN,2.2.1.T

Select Firing Position BN.9.2.S * BN,9.2.I.T

Estimate Range BN.9.3.S = BN,9.3. 1.T

SAll possble segment leve chapters are not listed on this chart.

Every ADAPT Test Pile will have a correspondlng APT Test Control (TC) file.

Test Result data must be entered using the CM] System's Off-Line Data Entry System. * Sub-menu and Instructions only, No instructional material provided on-line

XJ-8

kA
n. -. ,- .- 

- -rr-rPart XI: Creating a TICCIT Test

CMI and BNCOC Reporting Requirements

Performance Data Requirements

The 19K BNCOC Master Record which records performance data for

soldiers on each BNCOC task (created by Course 20) requires two kinds of

information:

" Test Result (GO/NOGO)

" Test Attempt (Maximum of 3)

Other Test Requirements

All 19K BNCOC Tests must be restricted; that is, the student will not be

allowed to take the test without PROCTOR intervention. Developers must

indicate that the test is restricted in the APT Test Control File (TC). When

creating the APT TC file, developers are asked "How many times a student

may take a given test without Proctor Intervention." To make a test

completely restricted, the correct response is 0 (zero).

Students will be allowed to take the test a maximum of three times.

Developers must include that information using ADAPT in the ADAPT Test

File.

Developers must also include an ADAPT Test Explanation File at the

lesson level (e.g., BN.I.I.E.) This requirement is related to the use of ADAPT

Menus and light pen responses in place of TICCIT APT map files and keyboard

commands. Although the APT TEST Control (TC) file offers the option to

include test explanation pages, choose the ADAPT Test Explanation (E) file

because ADAPT files allow you to use a light pen and an APT file does not.

* Other Kinds of TICCIT Data and Reports

TICCIT stores other kinds of data when instruction and/or tests are

conducted on-line; such as the test score, time spent on the test, etc.

However, such data are not required for the BNCOC Master Record. If the

logging tape is activated, TICCIT also stores item data which can be used to

produce a TICCIT Item Analysis Report. These TICCIT data and system

utilities are available to ARI personnel or MicroTICCIT developers for

evaluation purposes, but are not part of the CMI System itself. Instructions

for collecting item analysis data and producing Item Analysis Reports are

included in Part Vl of this Manual.

TICCIT Student Progress Reports

On-line TICCIT Student Progress Reports (viewed on the screen or as

printed reports) are available to users. These reports will provide ARI,

MicroTICCIT Developers, or 19K BNCOC personnel with a variety of data

regarding student perforriance; however, they too are separate functions

from the 19K BNCOC Master Record report.

p

XI-I

.- ~ -. 5 - ~*5,. 5 p. *9
p-.-.

Part XI: Creating a TICCIT Test

Data Collection and the TICCIT Course

When a student completes a TICCIT instructional activity or a test online, TICCIT automatically inserts a variety of data into a TICCIT file called

the PDA (Permanent Data Area). "rICCIT creates a course template (PDA file)

when the course is created using the Makecourse utility. TICCIT also creates

a separate data file for each student registered for the course (.PD file).

TICCIT stores both "Lesson" and "Test" data at the course, unit and lesson

levels. To create a "rlCCIT test, the developer must use an ADAPT TEST FILE

(T) in order for test data to be entered into the student's data file. For

instruction, the developer uses an ADAPT STANDARD FILE (S). ADAPT Test

results may be used at three levels:

COURSE (When all unit tests are passed, the system records that the

student has passed the COURSE),

UNIT (When all lesson tests are passed, the system records that the

student passed the UNIT),

LESSON (When all segment tests are passed, the system records that

the student passed the LESSON).

MicroTICCIT developers would, therefore, place their LESSON level

tests (19K BNCOC Testable events) at the SEGMENT Level, one for each

Segment if desired. See Figure 2, ADAPT TEST FJLES, below for examples.

To understand the location of TEST Files, developers must understand

the way TICCIT courseware is structured and how "TICCIT thinks."

Segment level activities relate to the Lesson topic; therefore, a Lesson test

must be placed at the segment level even though TICCIT records the test

result at the Lesson Level. TICCIT records no information related to segment

level activities. Since the CMI System expects only LESSON TESTS, all 19K

BNCOC Tests must be placed at the SEGMENT Level.

Figure 2: ADAPT TEST FILES

BN.I.T Tests Course Level (When all Tests at this Level are

BN.2.T completed TICCIT records that the student has passed

the course).

BI. 1.1.T Tests Unit One (When all Tests at this Level are

BN.I.2.T completed, TICCIT records that the student has passed the

Unit).

BN. 1.1.1.T Tests Unit 1, Task 1 (When all Tests at this Level are

BN.I.I.2.T completed, TICCIT records that the student has passed

the Task).

TEST SUB-DIVISIONS: Tests at any level may also be divided into up to

nine sub-sections. A student would, therefore, pass the test when all subsections are completed. Such a division might be desirable if the test

4 contained different groups of items such as a group of multiple choice,

matching, or true or false items.

)11

p.

~xI-t
Part XI: Creating a TICCIT Test

TICCIT Maps and APT Files

All 19K BNCOC MicroTICCIT instruction is expected to be light pen

driven; that is, students will enter responses and move through the

courseware without using the keyboard. This requirement eliminates the

use of TICCIT's APT map files. Underneath, however, at the operating system

level, TICCIT continues to "think" in terms of map boxes and colors. When a

test has been passed, therefore, it records the color GREEN; when failed, it

records the color RED, etc. Thus, even without creating APT map files,

instructors can see results of student performance In the on-line utility,

Student Progress Reports, in the appropriate TICCIT colors.

The CMI system completely eliminates the use of APT map files, but

not APT test control files which are required by the TICCIT operating system

whenever you create an ADAPT test file. The Test Control file also allows

you to create a restricted test. APT files, however, do not allow students to

use a light pen to advance to the next screen; for that you must have an

ADAPT file. For that reason, an ADAPT Test Explanation (E file) must be

included in the development. See Figure 3, Steps in Test Construction, below

for the required components of each 19K BNCOC test.

Figure 3: STKPS IN TEST CONSTRUCTION

step 1: Create menus using ADAPT standard (S) files

to advance to the appropriate lesson level. BN.I.1.S

Stop 2: Create an APT TC file at the Lesson Level. BN.I.1.TC

Indicate that no tests may be taken without Proctor

intervention. Also indicate that the test explanation

will be provided in an E file.

Step 3: Create an ADAPT E file at the Lesson Level. BN.I.I.E

Step 4: Create an ADAPT T file at the Segment Level. BN.1..l.T

'I-Il

i ! ~
Part XI: Creating a TICCIT Test

BDCOC Master Record

The current BNCOC Master Record lists tasks in no special order

(possibly according to the order in which they are taught in the BNCOC

schedule). The BNCOC Master Record created by Course 20 will list tasks

according to the order in which they are listed in the 19K BNCOC Program of

Instruction (POI). The CMI system will print a label for each task (as

opposed to the name of the task) Indicating the corresponding Task Cluster

and Task Number. The test result code will indicate both the pass/fail

status and the attempt number for that task. See Figure 4 below, "Test

Result Codes on Master Record."

Figure 4: TEST RESULT CODES ON MASTER RECORD

NR No result

GI Passed (GO) on first attempt

G2 Passed on second attempt

G3 Passed on third attempt

NI Failed (NOGO) on first attempt

N2 Failed on second attempt

N3 Failed on third attempt

Entering Off-Line Test Results

Although the off-line test results system will not directly affect

MicroTCCIT developers, it is useful to present a brief overview of how this

system will work. TICCIT's primary purpose is to deliver on-line

courseware. The 19K BNCOC course, however, is largely conducted off-line.

Even though additional portions of the 19K BNCOC course may be put on-line,

the nature of the instruction clearly requires that instruction will continue

to be conducted In the field rather than in a classroom setting. The 19K

BNCOC CMI system includes a second TICCIT course designed to allow BNCOC

instructors or ARI personnel to enter off-line test results into the Permanent

Data Area (.PD files) of students registered for the 19K BNCOC TICCIT course.

Instructors will access the appropriate task cluster and task from a light pen

driven menu and will then enter the test results. The ADAPT function which

permits this system to operate is the SRDBI function which permits direct

address of a PDA associated with a specific course and student ID number.

This "separate" TICCIT course, Course 20, allows instructors to obtain a

printed 19K BNCOC Master Record and other BNCOC reports.

11-12
Part XJ: Creating a TICCIT Test

Off-line BUCOC Courseware

*Off-line* courseware for 19K BNCOC includes any instructional

material that is not delivered via the MicroTICCIT system. Test results

from such material must be entered using the off-line data entry system

which is part of Course 20.

An example of off-line "computer-assisted instruction" developed for

19K BNCOC is the material created by Decisions and Designs, Incorporated (DDI)

titled Advanced Terrain Representation (ATR). DDI courseware will be

delivered on a modified MicroTICCIT terminal but will function independently

of the Data General computer (the MicroTICCIT host) and the TICCIT operating

system. ATR corresponds to Unit 3, Lesson 9 in the 19K BNCOC ADAPT course

environment. The student progress data, however, will not be entered into

the TICCIT environment (e.g., the Permanent Data Area). Results will not be

reflected in the Student Progress Reports.

To Interface this material with the 19K BNCOC CMI System, ARI

personnel or BNCOC instructions must treat this instruction as though it

were conducted off-line in the same manner as they would treat test results

obtained in the field. In actual use instructors must be able to record test

results obtained by students using the ATR material (GO or NOGO and Test

Attempt). DDI may need to store test results on their floppy disks so that

instructors can retrieve results when students have completed the materials.

The TICCIT environment provides a means to restrict students from taking

tests without Instructor (proctor) intervention. BNCOC allows students to

attempt a test a maximum of three times. TICCIT also records that kind of

information.

Internal Consistencies and Communications Among MicroTICCIT

Developers

In addition to interfacing with the 19K BNCOC CMI system, there is a

need to establish and maintain a method of communications among

MicroTICCIT developers. MicroTICCIT courseware for 19K BNCOC can be

produced more efficiently and certainly more appropriately if MicroTICCIT

courseware developed at various sites is consistent with respect to the course

menus, icons, and student interfaces. Portions of ADAPT chapters created for

NCourse 19 could easily be transported among developers to achieve this goal.

Meetings where information was shared would be particularly valuable in as

much as MicroTICCIT developers are designing materials with similar

features: Light pen driven courseware, Menus replacing TICCIT maps, use of

videodisc materials, etc. At the present time documentation from Hazeltine

related to these innovations either does not exist at all or is very spotty.

1-13

-. . . . . . . . . - - ~ ~4_ .~ -
Part XI: Creating a TICCIT Test

Icons and Student Interfaces

A consistent use of icons and student interfaces (e.g., menus) among all

MicroTICCIT courseware developed for 19K BNCOC serves several purposes.

First, development time and cost would be reduced. Second, the resulting

courseware would be easier for both student and instructor users of the

courseware.

An icon is a visual symbol which appears on the screen. It may be a

rectangle which contains the word MENU which the student is expected to

mark with the light pen in order to return to the previous menu. Clearly,

this icon could have a variety of meanings; also other words could have been

used other than "menu." In some cases the icon does not include a word; it

may be an arrow pointing to the left to indicate the student can return to

the previous screen by marking there.

See Part XII of this Manual, Courseware Documentation, for

information about setting the color palette, creating course icon macros, and

other symbols used in test development files.

11-14
Part XI: Creating a TICCIT Test

Test Development Requirements

Introduction This section presents instructions for creating a

MicroTICCIT test which will interface with the 19K

BNCOC CMI System (Course 20) and comply with

the test requirements of ARI and BNCOC. Two

major assumptions have been made:

s MicroTICCIT tests will be light pen driven.

Students will not use the keyboard.

* MicroTICCIT tests will be lesson-level tests

which will assess student mastery of BNCOC tasks

which are recorded on the BNCOC Master Record.

Test Location within

19K BUCOC Course 19 The only BNCOC tests on-line will be lesson (task)

tests. For example, the test on "Select Firing

Position" relates solely to determining whether or

not the student has mastered the objectives in the

task "Select Firing Position." The student's status

within the Cluster (Cluster 1: Tank Commander's

Station/Tank Gunnery) is determined by his status

on the individual tests of tasks within the cluster,

not by a test at the Cluster (Unit) level. If he

passes all tasks within the Cluster, he passes the

Cluster. BNCOC, however, does not currently

require information related to a particular Cluster

for their recordkeeping.

Piles Needed

to Create a Test Three types of MicroTICCIT files are created to

form a complete MicroTICCIT test. The system will

string these files together when presenting the test

to the student. These files are:

BN. * . . TC (created through the APT editor)

BN. * . . E (created through the ADAPT editor)

BN. * . . .T (actual test file, consisting of TINT,

QUES, and TRES frames; also contains Test

Environment Specifications; created through the

ADAPT editor)

Replace the astericks () with the numbers specific to the

unit/lesson/segment for which you are designing a

test.

I-15
Part X1. Cr ethtig a TICCIT Test

Creating the APT Test Control (TC) File

Creating the TC Pile The first file you should create is the APT Test

Control (TC) file. The steps are as follows:

9 From Supermenu, select "I" (Author Menu).

* From Author Menu, select "2" (APT Courseware

Editor).

* Type the MicroTICCIT label that corresponds to

the unit and lesson you are working with.

Note This will always be at the lesson level (e.g.,

BN.9.2.TC).

Your completed display (using numbers specific to

the course/unit/lesson you are working with)

should look similar to this:

H,, MicroTICCIT Label: a.,.2 . TC /.

Location File Func/Pg/Cmd

(C.U.L.S.)

-. Further Instructions (Optional): [1] (for Create/Add a File)

, Press ENTKR. The following display should

appear. Fill in the responses contained in the E ].

(These responses are explained on the following

two pages.) H,'

Mastery Boxes:

Test Explanation will be supplied: [ J

1. in this file

2. in ADAPT E file

3. by system

Show explanation before testing each box?: [ ]

No. of attempts before password needed: [ ]

You should complete the TC boxes as described in

the following pages.

,

H,

Xl-16

.4
Part XI: Creating a TICCIT Test

Mastery Boxes The numbers you enter into "Mastery Boxes" will

indicate to the system the test files to be included

in the mastery test you are creating. MicroTICCIT

tests can be one part or multi-parts (segmented).

When authoring a multi-part lesson test, separate

test files are created at the segment level. For

example, let us say that Instruction for the lesson

"Select Firing Position" (BN.9.2) is presented across 3

segments (BN.9.2.l.S; BN.9.2.2.S; and BN.9.2.3.S). You

wish to create a lesson test testing the concepts

contained in these segments. You could create 3

separate test files (BN.9.2.1.T; BN.9.2.2.T; and

BN.9.2.3.T). MicroTCCIT would string them

together and present them to the student as one

multi-part lesson test, depending on what you

entered in "Mastery Boxes" in the TC file.

However, this is not recommended for the reason

described below.

Creating a segmented test has one major pitfall.

You can not suppress the system's display that

appears when the student completes each segment.

This display cannot be light-pen driven; it requires

the student to press a key on the keyboard to

continue to the next segment. Therefore, you

should not create a segmented test.

Instead, enter a value of "1" in the Mastery Box

and place your entire test in one T file. This

T file must have a designation of "1" for the

segment (e.g., BN.9.2.1.T). When TICCIT collects the

parts of the test, it will pressent the contents of

the segment identified in "Mastery Boxes."

Test Explanation Test Explanation will be suoDlied: f J. Enter a

value of "2" (in an ADAPT E file) in this box.

The ADAPT E file is selected principally because the

light pen can be used to exit from this Explanation

file into the test itself. If an explanation is

provided in the TC file (option 1) or by the system

option 3), the student can only advance through

the pages and into the test by using the keyboard.

I

Xl-17

Oj
Day t Yt - 'r ,,>'irig a 'I'( V' T -t

Shi,,v Txplaialoa Sbow explanation bfo~re t...,ta P'.rb, box?: f 1.

Enter an N for No.

In a segmenLed (znulti-parL) test, you have the

option of presenting the test explanation (specified

in the step above) only at the beginning of the test

OR after the student completes one part and is

ready to begin the next part. Since you will not be

creating a segmented test, respond N to this

question.

Number of Attempts No. of attemots before Dassword needed: [ 1.

Enter a value of "0" (zero). This restricts the

student from taking the test without permission.

Test Restriction All MicroTICCIT tests should be restricted. In other

words, the student should not be able to access the

test without authorization from the proctor. A

value of zero means that the student can never

take the test without the proctor intervening to

enter that day's password.

* Press ,XIT, after you have entered values into

all boxes in this TC file.

* Process the file, as follows:

When the APT Courseware Editor display

reappears,

" TAB to the "Further Instructions" box.

" Type a value of "10" (process the file).

" Press ENTER.

* Press GO. This will result in the processing of

the TC file.

t xI-18

'.- o" . . . . .,. -, . . , . . . - , . / . , . ' ,' ", ." .,,
Part XI: Creating a TICCIT Test

Creating the ADAPT Test Explanation (E) File

Introduction The purpose of the ADAPT Test Explanation (E) file

is to provide a brief explanation about the test the

student is about to take. The E files for on-line

tests developed for BNCOC Course 19 consist of one

page that presents the title of the test enclosed in a

gold box. The system will display this box before it

intervenes to request proctor authorization. After

authorization has been entered, the system will

redisplay the E file. For this reason no lengthy

explanation has been included in the E file, just a

simple identifier.

Creating the E File Steps for creating this file are as follows:

* Log on to Course 0.

* From Supermenu, select "I" (Author Menu).

* From Author Menu, select "I" (ADAPT Courseware

Editor).

* Type the MicroTICCIT label.

Note. This will always be at the lesson level (e.g.,

BN.9.2.E).

Your completed display (using numbers specific to

the course/ unit/lesson you are working with)

should look similar to this:

MicroTICCIT Label: BM.9.2 . /

(C.U.L.S.) Location File Func/Pg/Cmd

Further Instructions (Optional): [1] (for Create/Add a File)

Xl-19
Part XI: Creating a TICCIT Test

Creating an 1 File

(con't) * Press ENTER. The following display will appear:

ADAPT Environment

Level for Editing File: [ ]

Instructional Template: [ ]

1. None - design supplied by author

2. REP

3. Future option

4. Organizational

* Type "3" in the first box (level for editing file).

This is the only legal entry. TAB to the second box.

0 Type "I" in the second box (instructional

template). You wish to supply your own design.

0 Press GO to edit the frame. The "Name That

Frame" display should appear.

* Type the name you would like this frame to

have. As a suggestion: EPILE.

& Press 60 to edit the frame. A blank base page

will appear.

* Type the title of the test onto the base page.

Make sure you put a GO ON arrow box in the

lower right corner so that the student can proceed

to the next page.

* Press 60 and type the display construction

commands for this page (RBOX, INPUT, etc.).

* To proceed to the response analysis command

page, press OBJ'CTIVE. The following prompt

appears at the bottom of the screen:

"Branch to: C.U.L.S.: EFILE/I/D."

Move the cursor to the right (using the arrow

keys) until it covers the "D." Type "R" over the

"D" and press ENTER. You will then be on the

response analysis page and can enter the

commands you need to interpret the student's

responses and branch him correctly. This will

include the system symbol START (see below).

XI-20
Part XI: Creating a TICCIT Test

Creating an K File

(conet) * Press EXIT. The ADAPT Courseware Editor

display should appear.

" TAB to the "Further Instructions" box and type

a value of "10" (process the file).

" Press ENTER.

" Press GO. This will process the E file.

Using "START" To branch the student from the E file into the test,

you must use the system symbol called "START."

When you are entering the response analysis

commands for your E file, do the following:

" Press ATT'N.

" Type "2" for the "External Symbol File."

" Press ENTER.

" In the first box of the display that appears, type

"TEST."

" TAB to the second box and type "CH" for chapter.

" Press ENTER. You will be returned to the place

in the E file where you were initially.

a Response analysis commands on the E file page

should include a command to branch the student

out of the E file when he touches his light pen to

the GO ON arrow box. This command is:

Go To START.

I,

1l-21

"' "-w_ " - ' " T - ", ' ,r " " " "," -. *
Part XI: Creating a TICCIT Test

Creating the ADAPT Test (T) File

Introduction The test itself is generally composed of three

separate frames: TINT (Test Introduction), QUES

(Questions), and TRES (Test Results). Note that,

although the REP (Rule-Example-Practice) model is

available for creating tests, none of the tests

currently on-line were authored using REP

(identified with a "theta", as in eTINT). All

frames were creating using a design defined by the

author in order to eliminate unwanted actions

taken by the computer as part of the REP model

(i.e., the intervention of the MicroTICCIT ADVISOR).

* . .Not: The test file is created at the segment level

(e.g., BN.9.2.1.T), although it evaluates mastery for

the lesson (or task).

Creating the

TINT Frame e Log on to Course 0.

* From Supermenu, select "I" (Author Menu).

Press GO.

* From Author Menu, select "I" (ADAPT Courseware

Editor). Press GO.

& Type the MicroTICCIT label.

Note: This will always be at the segment level

(e.g., BN.9.2.1.T).

Your completed display (using numbers and letters

specific to the course/unit/lesson you are working

with) should look similar to this:

MicroTICCIT Label: BN.9.2.1 .T /

Location File Func/Pg/Cmd

(C.U.L.S.)

Further Instructions (Optional): [ I I (for Create/Add a File)

" Press ENTER. The ADAPT Environment display should appear.

" Type "3" in Box I of the ADAPT Environment display. TAB to

Box 2.

e Type "1" In Box 2.

* Press GO. The "Name That Frame" display should appear.

*XI-22
Part XI: Creating a TICCIT Test

Creating the TINT

Frame (con't) The first frame in the test file should be the Test

Introduction or TINT frame. The TINT frame in

the tests already on-line generally consists of 5-7

pages presenting: the number of questions on the

test, how many must be answered correctly in

order to pass, the time limit for the test, and how

the student is expected to mark his answer. You

will create this file now.

* Type "TINT" in the box on the "Name That

Frame" display. (Do NOT use eTINT).

* Press GO to edit the frame. A blank base page

appears.

Begin by entering the information you want the

first page of the TINT frame to contain. To add

pages, press ATT'N and type "13" (to add a page

AFTER the current one) or "12" (to add a page

BEFORE the current one).

From anywhere within the TINT frame, you will

also access the Test Environment Specifications display and tell the system how you want test

items to be scored and sequenced. The steps are

outlined below.

Setting the Test

Environment

Specifications 0 Press ATT'N. . Type a value of "18" (edit item scoring and

sequence) and press ENTER. The Test

Environment Specifications display vill appear.

* TAD through the boxes, entering the values

shown below (if an asterick [*] appears in a box,

refer to the discussion below to determine the

proper value to fill in).

1 1 Mastery (=author coded)

[ ] value

[ ] must answer

1] Interrupt (l=author coded)

"S [ ) value

-" [ ] must answer

[ 3 ]Point Assignment ( Item Sequencing

by author? (N]

Backing up ok? N] Enable test review? [N]

Reanswering ok? [N] Color this box? [ ]

Show feedback? [ N ] Color others? [ N ]

XI-23

/%V '
Part XI: Creating a TICCIT Test

Test Environment

Specifications (con't) Point assignment ovtions are: author-coded, point

per item, and point per part. A value of "2" has

been entered for tests currently on-line (meaning

each item is scored as one point and has no parts).

If your test items are each separate questions (and

no parts exist within a question), enter "2." If

your questions have many parts with each part to

be scored separately, enter "3" in this box. If you

wish to score the items yourself, enter a value of

"1." Refer to the ADAPT Reference Manual for more

information.

Item seauencine options are: -source file; 2-

shifted; 3-shuffled; and 4-random. Two of the tests

currently on-line have a value of "3" (shuffled) in

this box. One test has a value of "1" (source file).

If the items can be presented in any order, select

'3". If the items should be seen in a specific order,

select "I" (source file). Be sure that when you

create the QUES frame and enter the question text,

you order the questions as you want them to

appear to the student.

Do NOT select option "4" (random order).

* Press EXIT when you have entered values in the

Test Environment Specifications display as shown

above. You will return to the TINT frame.

Note: The Test Specs govern administration of the

entire test, not just the TINT frame. You can

change these specifications from anywhere in the

test file itself (e.g., BN.9.2.1.T). To access the specs

for editing:

0 Press ATT'N.

" Type "18" and press ENTER. The Test

Environment Specifications display will appear and

you can make changes as needed. Remember to

process at least part of the test file in order to

process the changes you have made in the specs.

- Press EXIT to leave the TINT frame. The ADAPT

ICourseware Editor display should appear.

, TAB to the "Func/Pg/Cmd" box and erase the text

that appears there.

* TAB to the "Further Instructions" box and type "10" (process the file).

* Press ENTER.

a Press GO to process the TINT frame and create

the test file (e.g.,BN.9.2.l.T).

XI-24
Part XI: Creating a TICCIT Test

Hints for Creating

the TINT frame o Label the base pages in the TINT frame

sequentially, with labels such as INTI, INT2, INT3,

and so on. Labeling the pages this way makes

branching commands more understandable.

Remember that if you add a page in the middle of

the frame you will need to renumber the base page

labels.

* Use the right and left lower corners of the screen

for the GO ON and GO BACK arrow boxes. The

student is expected to mark in these boxes to

advance or reverse through the TINT pages.

* Make sure the entire screen is an RBOX

(response box). Provide feedback to the student (via

IFFDBK and TOFDBK mods) when he marks an

area other than the NEXT or BACK box.

Creating the

QUK, Frame * From the ADAPT Courseware Editor display,

reenter the test file by typing in its MicroTICClT

label (e.g., BN.9.2.l.T).

From the TINT frame, you will now add the QUES

frame.

* Press ATT'N.

* Type "3" (add frame at end of chapter).

" Press ENTER. The "Name That Frame" display

will appear.

* Type "QUKS." (Do NOT use eQUES.)

* Press 60 to edit the frame. A blank base page

will appear.

Enter the components neded to build the display

and score actual test questions (see Hints below).

fNi The Test Environment Specifications you

defined in the TINT frame govern the QUES frame

as well. There is no need to define specs in the

QUES frame if you have already done so in the

*- TINT frame.

-I-25
Part XI: Creating a TICCIT Test

Creating the QUES

Frame (con't) After entering the base pages and the commands

you want the QUES frame to have, process the file.

* Press EXIT to leave the QUES frame. The ADAPT

Courseware Editor display will appear.

* TAB to the third box (Func/Pg/Cmd) and erase the

text that follows ":QUES". (In other words, the box

should nly contain" :QUES".)

& TAB to the fourth box (Further Instructions) and

type "10" (process the file).

" Press ENTER.

" Press 60 to process the QUES frame.

Hints for Creating

the QUKS frame * Because the test you are creating is NOT a REP

test, you are responsible for tracking many

variables such as the item number. Consult the

ADAPT Reference Manual to see what system

variables are still available for use in non-REP

tests.

* Three different versions of each test should be

available. If the student fails the first test attempt

and retakes the test, he should not see an identical

test. Tests currently on-line have QUES frames

with three (3) identical base pages using different

display construction commands. Although the test

items are the same from test version to test

version, the way in which the option text is

displayed on the screen will vary. For example,

Option A of a test question in Version I might

appear as Option D in Version 2 and as Option C in

Version 3. In this way, the test looks different to

the student each time he takes it. He is branched

to a different QUES base page depending on the

number of his test attempt.

XI-26
Part XI: Creating a TICCIT Test

Creating the

TRKS Frame The TRES (Test Results) frame is where the student

receives his results (how many questions he

answered correctly and whether he passed or

failed the test). It should follow the QUES frame

and be the last frame in the test file.

* From the ADAPT Courseware Editor display,

reenter the QUES frame of the test file (e.g.,

BN.9.2.I.T:QUES).

From inside the QUES frame you will now add the

TRES frame.

* Press ATTN.

* Type "3" (add frame at end of chapter).

0 Press ENTER. The "Name That Frame" display

will appear.

" Type TRES. (Do NOT use eTRES.)

" Press GO to edit the frame. A blank base page

will appear.

Enter the text you want this page to contain and

the commands for display construction and

response analysis.

EgtL Add pages to the TRES frame by pressing

ATTNM and typing "13" (to add a page AFTER the

current one) or "12" (to add a page BEFORE the

current one). At present, all on-line tests contain

only one page in the TRES frame.

Ngt. The Test Environment Specifications you defined in the TINT frame govern the TRES frame

as well. There is no need to redefine specs in the

TRES frame if you have already done this in the

TINT frame.

Once you have entered the base pages and commands you want the TRES frame to contain,

you will process the file.

0 Press EXIT to leave the TRES frame. The ADAPT

Courseware Editor display will appear.

* TAB to the third box (Func/Pg/Cmd) and erase the

text that follows ":TRES". (In other words, the box

should only contain ": TRES".)

XI-27
Part XI: Creating a TICCIT Test

Creating the TRES

Frame (con't) e TAB to the fourth box (Further Instructions)

and type a value of "10" (process the file).

" Press ENTER.

" Press GO. This will result in the processing of

the TRES frame.

Hints for Creating

the TRES Frame 0 The system wants to supply its own results

pages, but these are not only too general, they also

require the use of the keyboard. It is better to

design your own display. To shut down the

system's intervention, use the system symbol

"NORESULTS." From the display construction

command page in the TRES frame, call in

NORESULTS as follows:

6 Press ATT'N.

* Type "2" (External Symbol File).

a Press ENTER.

# In the first box of the display that appears, type

"TEST".

a TAB to the second box and type "CH" for chapter.

* Press ENTER. Nothing will appear to have

happened. You will be returned to the display

construction page you were initially on.

* Type the command:

Compute Calc NORESULTSf-True.

This prevents the system from displaying the first

of its own Results pages. To branch the student

around the system's second Results page, include

an EXIT box in the lower right hand corner of the

Results page you designed. The student marks

this box to leave the test file and return to the

menu. For response analysis commands of a

student mark in this EXIT box use:

GO CHAIPT 9,2

(Substitute your specific unit/lesson numbers).

* It is also advisable to enter the next two

commands, both of which use system symbols

called in through the External Symbol File "TEST"

(as is NORESULTS, described above). Since you

have already called the symbols stored in TEST

into use in the step above, you do not have to do

this again (unless you have exited the TRES frame

and are returning to enter more commands).

XI-28

K1M
Part XI: Creating a TICCIT Test

TRES Frame Hints

(con't) Type the following commands:

Compute Cale NORIVIEW-True

Compute Calc TZBTDON - True

The first command prevents the student from

reviewing the test.

The second tells the system that the test is over.

This command is very important. Because you

have created an author-defined test and have used

Test Environment Specs that do not identify for the

system when mastery/interrupt will occur, YOU

must define when the test is done and tell the

system.

Final Notes On

Creating A

MicroTICCIT Test * Every time you enter any part of the test and

make changes, you MUST reprocess that particular

file (or the entire test, if need be) for t z changes to

appear in object (or student) mode.

6 It is useful to take the test in Student Mode. This

is an option on the ADAPT Courseware Editor

(option 5). However, some aspects to the test file

will not be evident In this mode and bugs can be

overlooked.

Register a dummy student in the course and take

the test as that student. This is different from

selecting Option 5 from the ADAPT Courseware

Editor. When you take the test as a student

registered in the course (as opposed to an author

using student mode), you will find the bugs an

actual student would encounter.

XI-29
Part XI: Courseware Documentation

PART XII: Courseware Documentation

Table of Contents

page

Introduction XII-3

1. Color Palette XII-5

2. Introduction to Test Symbols XII-10

3. Symbols in Course 19 XII-11

4. Symbols in Course 20 XII-45

4|

.4

- p

p

'Il-I
Part Xii: Courseware Documentation

4

4.

4%

N

A

S

- r vs - -4:~j-*: 4s~)~%-t~ '.~ ).
Part XII: Courseware Documentation

Introduction

This section of the Operator's Manual includes documentation for

Course 19, 19K BNCOC for Tank Commanders, and for Course 20, The 19K

BNCOC CMI System, dealing with the special color palette settings and symbols

defined in the ADAPT symbol table. This information will assist TICCIT

operators and ADAPT programmers in making revisions to existing

courseware or adding additional instructional segments on MicroTICCIT.

-...

a".'.

- )' 11-3
Part XII: Courseware Documentation

MW
Part XII: Courseware Documentation

Color Palette

About the Color

Palette The Color Palette is a MicroTICCIT feature that

allows you to choose your own foreground and

background colors for use on an ADAPT page. The

CMI developers at InterAmerica and HumRRO have

altered the default color palette values assigned by

TICCIT in favor of more muted colors against a

gray background. In the event that ARI should

develop new courseware to add to the present 19K

BNCOC CMI (Course 19 and Course 20) system, it

is suggested that these altered color palette values

be used in order to maintain consistency across

materials.

Accessing the

Color Palette * Access the color palette through the ATT'N key.

* Select Option 19. Eleven pages will be presented

to you; each page represents the values assigned to

produce the particular color appearing in the

square box labelled "Current Color."

* Advance through these eleven pages and alter the

values described below in order to change the

default colors to the shades used by the developers.

Follow the steps presented below.

Adjust the

First Color Redefining the first color (red) to the specifications

set by the developers involves one more step than

altering the other colors so it is discussed

separately. This step specifies a gray background

to be placed on the screen. Specify this background

only once (on the first display, "Define Color 1").

MicroTICCIT automatically transposes this

background information to all other color

definitions.

Log on Course 0 and select the Author Menu.

• Select the ADAPT editor.

Type the TICCIT label of the courseware chapter

you want to edit or create.

* Enter the chapter in change mode (option 1).

* From the base page you are editing or creating,

press ATT'N and type "19." Press ENTER. The

"Define Color 1" display should appear and the

"Current Color" box will show red.

XII-5

4L
Part XII: Courseware Documentation

Adjust the

First Color * The cursor will be located at the bottom right of

the screen in the space following "option." Type "6"

for "screen" and press ENTER. You have told the

system you want to define option #6 - the screen -

and the cursor will move to the "screen" box.

* Type "4" and press ENTER. This will tell the

system to place a dark gray background on the

base page you're creating.

* The cursor should return to the "option" box

automatically. If it does not, press the SKIP key

(at the top of the right keypad). This will move the

cursor back to the "option" box, so that you can

select the next option to be altered.

* Type "3" and press ENTER. The cursor will

move to the "Hue" box of option #3 (redefining hue,

intensity and saturation).

; The "Hue" definition will not be altered (it is

predefined as 0 and will remain so). Press the TAB

key to move the cursor to the "Intensity" box

directly below. Change the "100X" default value to

"87X." Press ENTER. Notice that values appearing

-4 in other boxes on the screen will automatically

change. The color of red appearing in the "Current

Color" box will also change.

* You are now ready to alter the remaining color

values.

Adjust the

Remaining Colors * Press GO. The "Define Color 2" (green) display

will be presented to you for editing.

For this and all remaining colors, you will change

values only in the Hue, Intensity, and Saturation

boxes (option #3). In each case, the steps are the

same. Rather than outline a series of repetitive

actions, the altered values for each color's hue,

intensity, and saturation boxes are presented

below, as well as general guidelines for how to

move through the Color Palette displays until all

colors have been altered in accordance with

current CMI materials.

XII-6
Part XII: Courseware Documentation

Adjust the

Remaining Colors

(con't) 0 TAB between the Hue, Intensity and Saturation

boxes, changing the default values to the redefined

values (presented below for each of the ten

remaining colors). When you have changed these

4A values for one color, move to the next color by

pressing GO. The cursor should appear

automatically in the "Hue" box of this next color. If

it does not, press SKIP to move the cursor to the

"option" box. Type "'3" and press ENTER to move

the cursor to the "Hue" box.

0 NoJe The values held in other boxes on the

screen will automatically change as you redefine

the Hue, Intensity, and Saturation boxes.

" Define Color 2: Green

Hue: [ 24 1

Intensity: ( 87 ]

Saturation: [ 62 ]

" Define Color 3: Yellow

Hue: [ 16 ]

Intensity: [ 80 ]

Saturation: [ 67 1

" Define Color 4: Blue

Hue: [ 60 1

Intensity: [ 87 ]

Saturation: [ 62 1

" Define Color 5: Black

No changes necessary. Press GO to move to the

next color.

* Define Color 6: Cyan

Hue: [ 45 )

Intensity: [ 87 1

Saturation: ( 100 1

* Define Color 7: White

Hue: [ 45 1

Intensity: [ 73 1

Saturation: C 0 1

XII-7
Part X1I: Courseware Documentation

Adjust the

Remaining Colors

(con't) e Define Color 8: Background of Gray

Hue: [ 45 )

Intensity: [ 53 ]

Saturation: [ 0]

* Define Color 9: Background of Black

No changes necessary. Press GO to move to the

next color.

" Define Color 10: Background of White

Hue: [35]

Intensity: [80]

Saturation: [0]

, Define Color 11: Background of Dark Gray

Hue: [ 0 ]

Intensity: [ 27 1

Saturation: [ 0 ]

.4....

.II-8

,.d
Part XII: Courseware Documentation

Exit and Save

Color Palette

Changes * When you have finished with the "Define Color

11" display, press EXIT and return to the base page.

The base page should now have a dark gray

background. Type on this page should show muted

colors instead of the brighter default TICCIT colors.

0 Colors and background for each new base page

will need to be redefined In the manner described

-. above. Instead of accessing the Color Palette and

.-. changing the values for each new base page you

create, do the following to save time and effort.

Redefine the Color Palette for first page of the new

courseware you are developing. Make a text

temporary of the blank, newly defined page. This

is done by pressing the PRACTICE key, typing in a

name (i.e., your initials, followed immediately by

"basepg"), and pressing ENTER. In this way, you

have stored the standard base page In a text

temporary.

Redisplay this base page on each new base page you

create. Press RULE. Type in the name of the text

temporary you created. Press HARD. The

redefined base page will now be displayed on your

new page. This saves you the trouble of accessing

the Color Palette and redefining the color values

every time you create a new page. 'V.

",f

*1,

'p

XII-9
Part XII, Courseware Documentation

Introduction to Test Symbols

The purpose of this documentation is to provide an explanation of the

symbols used in the following three on-line tests:

" Conduct Performance Counseling with a Subordinate

(Cluster B, Task 2)

" Select Firing Position (Cluster I, Task 2)

" Estimate Range (Cluster I, Task 3).

In the event that the Army should decide to place more BNCOC paper

and pencil tests on MicroTICCIT, this explanation can provide a more

thorough framework for authoring the tests in ADAPT than the printouts of

test files themselves.

A brief description of the test files' organization is provided below as

an orientation to their structure.

1. Exiplanation File (E File). When the student indicates he wishes to

take the test, the E file is presented to him. This file is nothing more than

the title of the test.

2. The system breaks in, requesting a proctor password as permission

for the student to take the test. Once the proctor has entered the password,

the student proceeds into the test.

3. The E file is presented again. When the student exits this page, he

goes directly into the Test File itself (designated by the file type "T").

4. Test Introduction (TINT) frame. The pages of the TINT frame

explain the criteria for passing the test, how the student should mark his

answers, and any time limits involved in taking the test. The student can

review these pages again before receiving the test questions themselves, but

once he has left the TINT frame, he cannot return there.

5. Question (QUES) frame. The test questions are presented in the

QUES frame. The student advances to the next question by answering the

one presented to him. He can neither skip questions or review questions

already answered. The QUES frame is the only part of the test that is timed.

If the student runs over the time limit, he is not stopped, but sees all the

questions.

6. Test Results (TRES) frame. Once the student has answered all

questions, he goes into the TRES frame, where his results are presented to

him and a feedback message as to his GO/NOGO status. He exits the test from

the TRES frame.

The following pages contain thorough descriptions of the symbols used

to drive the tests. Use these explanations as a guideline to further test

development.

X II-10

. .... ---- - . -N -
Part XII, Courseware Documentation

Symbols in Course 19

Introduction The following symbols are used in Course 19, 19K BNCOC

for Tank Commanders, and in the menu chapters for

Course 20, The 19K BNCOC CMI System.

Symbol Description of Use

'4.

ABOX ABOX refers to the area defined by the cyan colored box marked

"A" which appears on the page where the test questions are

displayed (frame: QUES; base page labels: TPRBI, TPRB2, and

TPRB3).

The student choosing A as the answer to a test question would

touch his light pen in the cyan colored "A" box. The computer

accepts a mark in this area (and one row beneath it, in case the

student's mark Is slightly inaccurate) as a mark in the area

ABOX, and treats it as an "A" response.

TM In response analysis, this input is converted into a number by

use of a system function called WHICHMATCH and is matched

against the correct answer to determine if the student answered

... correctly. Below is an example of how ABOX is used in Response

Analysis.

Command Mod Data Field

Compare Areas Input= ABOX ! BBOX

CBOX ! DBOX

Compute Calc W - WHICHMATCH

The exclamation point (1) is interpreted by the system to mean

"or." These commands can be read as follows: "If the student

marks in the area of ABOX, assign this input a value of I, to be

held in the variable W. If he marks in BBOX (see definition of

BBOX) this input is assigned a value of 2; a CBOX mark receives

a value of 3; a DBOX mark receives a value of 4." If the student

did not mark in any of those areas, his input is assigned a value

of mO." The assigned value, stored in W, is then compared

against the correct answer stored in the string variable called

4.. ANSRI, ANSR2, or ANSR3, depending on the test attempt number.

If the two numbers match (W=ANSRI, 2, or 3), the student's

response is scored as a correct answer.

Parallel Symbols: BBOX, CBOX, DBOX. (All these variables are

areas and function in the same way.)

-. P.-il

N: .' ' -4..:..<...- - -.- . ... - -/ .--.2 /
Part XII, Courseware Documentation

Symbol Description of Use

AC AC is a variable integer and stands for "Answers Correct." Its

value is incremented by one every time the student answers an

item correctly. This symbol is defined by the system and made

available to authors for tracking the student score. It is called

into use through the External Symbol File called "Advisor."

If you have specified "point per item" or "point per part" in the

test specs, the system automatically increments AC whenever

response analysis determines that the student's input was a

correct answer (Commands: If W=ANSRI, Result +). A specific

command to increment AC is not necessary unless you specified

"author defined" scoring. In this case, you would need a

command such as AC - AC + 1, everytime the student answers

correctly.

Related Symbols: AT

ANSCO ANSCO stands for "Answers Correct" and is defined as a variable

integer. It is used in the response analysis of each test's QUES

frame, as well as in the display construction of the TRES (Test

Results) frame.

Use of ANSCO is necessary when the student has run over the

time limit allotted for answering the questions. Although he is

allowed to continue answering questions after time has elapsed,

the number of correct answers he has given must be fixed at

the point where he ran out of time. When the computer

determines that time has elapsed, it loads the value of AC (also

Answers Correct) into ANSCO.

The system continues to increment AC (a system variable) each

time the student answers correctly, but ANSCO remains fixed

at the value AC had when time ran out. QUES frame response

analysis commands are as follows:

Command Mod Data Field

Compute If (TIME Z 42) & (AC S N)

Calc TESTF True; ANSCO AC;

OVRTM - 1

Not. OVRTM is set to I and used to prevent the system from

returning to these commands a second time and resetting the

value of ANSCO.

X-

-i. 11l-12

SJ
N

Part XII, Courseware Documentation

Symbol Description of Use

ANSCO

(con't) Use ANSCO in display construction of the TRES frame to make

sure that the right results message is displayed to the student.

One command reads: "If the student was over the time limit

AND the value of ANSCO was less than the criteria for passing

AND the flag TESTF has been set to true, then show him the

message stored in FAIL." A second command reads: "If the

student was over the time limit AND the value of ANSCO was

equal to or greater than the criteria for passing AND the flag F

has been set to false, show him the message stored in TIMEP."

Related Symbols: AC

ANSRI These three symbols are defined as frame level item strings

ANSR2 (frame: QUES, where the test questions are presented). They

* ANSR3 store the correct answer to each question so that the computer ,, can check to see if the student responded correctly.

ANSR1 holds the correct answers to the items presented in TEST

ATTEMPT ONE. Respectively, ANSR2 holds the correct answers

to items presented in TEST ATTEMPT TWO, and ANSR3 to TEST

- ATTEMPT THREE.

Each string holds the answers corresponding to the questions on

each test attempt. The possible values stored in ANSR are: 1, 2,

3, or 4, representing respectively A, B, C, or D. The reason the

values are numeric (and not a letter) is because the student's

input (an area he touches with his light pen) is converted via

WHICHMATCH to a number. This number is matched against the

value held in ANSR and the correctness of the response is

determined.

Command Mod Data Field

Compare Areas Input = ABOX ! BBOX!

CBOX ! DBOX

Compute Calc W-WHICHMATCH

Go If W = ANSRI

Result +

To JJJc

If W equals the value held in ANSRI for that particular test

question, the result is positive (+) and the system scores the

student response as a correct answer and increments AC

(Answers Correct) by one. The next item is presented, and the

process of student response and matching begins again.

Related Symbols: WHAT, RESPI, RESP2, RESP3, RESP4

See also: ABOX, W.

I, 111-13

. . r* 4 ~ ~''I"
Part XII, Courseware Documentation

Symbol Description of Use

AT AT stands for "Questions Attempted" and is used to keep track of

the number of items the student has answered. It is a system

defined symbol called into use through the External Symbol File

"Advisor." The system automatically increments AT's value by

1 every time the student responds to an item. Therefore, no

specific command to increment AT is needed.

Commands using AT appear in the TRES (Test Results) frame

display construction. Here the system is instructed to display

the value of AT on the screen for the student to see how many

items he attempted. These commands are:

Command Mod Data Field

Show Window 7 33, 7 33

Data AT

Related Symbols: AC

AWIN AWIN stands for "A Window" and refers to the rectangular area

between the first and second white lines drawn on the QUES

frame pages labeled TPRBI, TPRB2, and TPRB3.

The text of Option A in the test problems is displayed in AWIN.

(Similarly, text for Option B is displayed in BWIN, text for Option

C in CWIN, and text for Option D in DWIN.)

Display construction commands are as follows:

Command Mod Data Field

Show Window AWIN

Data RESPI

These commands are interpreted as: "Place in the area assigned

to window AWIN the text held in RESPI."

Notj: RESPI stores the text associated with Option A of the

particular question being presented.

Parallel Symbols: BWIN, CWIN, and DWIN. All function

identically as windows where option text is displayed. Their

only difference is the area they are defined on the screen.

Ill-14

,'...
Part XII, Courseware Documentation

symbol Description of Use

BBOX BBOX refers to the area. defined by the cyan colored box marked

"B" (plus one row beneath it) on the page (TPRB) used to display

the test problems.

The student choosing "B" as the correct answer to a test

question would touch his light pen in the cyan colored "B" box.

The computer accepts a mark in this area (and one row beneath

it, in case the student's mark is slightly inaccurate) as a mark

in the area BBOX and treats it as a"B" response.

For an explanation of the response analysis given this student

mark, please refer to the description presented under the

symbol "ABOX."

Parallel Symbols: ABOX, CBOX, and DBOX. All function

identically as an area where the student might mark a response

to a test question.

BKARW BKARW stands for "Back Arrow" and is a macro commanding

the display and coloring of a box showing a backwards arrow

(pointing to the left). The macro commands place the BKBX

. symbol (described below) in the lower left corner of the screen

(16 1,16 3) and color the background of this area white. The

student marks in this area to return to the previous page.

Commands relating to the macro BKARW are used only in the

TINT (Test Introduction) frame of each test. These commands

are:

Command Mod Data Field

Include Macro BKARW

Params BKBX

Parallel Symbols: GOARW

Related Symbols: BKBX, GOBX

ll-15

V. %."NAbk . 5
Part XII, Courseware Documentation

Symbol Description of Use

BKBX BKBX stands for "Back Box" and corresponds to a text page

storing the symbol of a backwards arrow. This symbol is used

in conjunction with the macro BKARW which displays the BKBX

on the screen and colors it in a background of white.

The student marks the BKBX symbol with his light pen when he

wants to reverse to the previous page. This backing up is only

permitted in the TINT (Test Introduction) frame.

Parallel Symbols: GOBX

Related Symbols: BKARW, GOARW

BWIN BWIN stands for "B Window" and refers to the area between the

second and third white lines drawn on the QUES pages labeled

TPRBI, TPRB2, and TPRB3.

The text of Option B in the test problems Is displayed in the area

(window) BWIN.

For an explanation of how the system uses BWIN, see the

description under AWIN. Both AWIN and BWIN (as well as CWIN

and DWIN) function identically. Their only difference is that

they define different areas.

Parallel Symbols: AWIN, CWIN, and DWIN

CBOX CBOX refers to an area defined by the cyan colored box marked

"C" (plus one row beneath it) on the page where the test

questions are displayed (frame: QUES; base page labels: TPRB1,

TPRB2, and TPRB3).

The student choosing "C" as the correct answer to a test

question would touch his light pen in the cyan colored "C" box.

The computer accepts a mark in this area (and one row beneath

it, in case the student's mark is slightly inaccurate) as a mark

in the area CBOX and treats it as a "C" response.

For an explanation of the response analysis given this student

mark, refer to the description presented under the symbol

ABOX.

Parallel Symbols: ABOX, BBOX, and DBOX. All function

identically as an area where the student might mark a response

to a test question.

111I-16

P6a-L- n hIA M L .
Part XII, Courseware Documentation

Symbol Description of Use

CWIN CWIN stands for "C Window" and refers to the area between the

third and fourth white lines drawn on the QUES pages where

the questions are presented to the student.

The text of Option C in the test problems is displayed in the area

(window) CWIN.

For an explanation of how the system uses CWIN, see the

_ .description under AWIN. Both AWIN and CWIN (as well as BWIN

and DWIN) function identically. Their only difference is that

they define different areas on the screen.

Parallel Symbols: AWIN, BWIN, and DWIN

DBOX DBOX refers to the area defined by the cyan colored box marked

"D" (and one row beneath it) on the page where the test

questions are displayed (base page TPRB of the QUES frame).

The student choosing "D" as the correct answer to a test

question would touch his light pen in the cyan colored "D" box .- that appears on the screen. The computer accepts a mark in

this DBOX area (and one row beneath it, in case the student's

mark is slightly inaccurate) as a "D" response.

For an explanation of the response analysis given this student

mark, please refer to the description provided under the symbol

"ABOX."

Parallel Symbols: ABOX, BBOX, and CBOX. All function

identically as an area where the student might mark a response

to a test question.

111-17

%IVN
Part Xlf, Courseware Documentation

Symbol Description of Use

DIPT DNPT stands for "Dlid not Rass lest" and refers to a text page

that stores a message to the student that he did not pass the

test. When the student finishes the test and proceeds to the

TRES frame (Test Results), he can receive one of four different

messages regarding his pass/fail status. The DNPT message is

displayed to him when his performance matches these

conditions:

* He completed the test in under the time limit, AND

* He scored less than the number of answers correct needed

to pass the test.

Using the test on "Select Firing Position" as an example, the

commands to display this message are as follows:

Command Mod Data Field

Show If (AC s 5) and (TIME - 419)

Window 11 1,16 43

Data DNPT

The message that appears when the student has met the above

conditions Is: "The criteria for passing this test was 6 items

correct out of 7. You have NOT passed the test. You must

report for counseling before taking this test again." (The exact

message held in DNPT differs depending on the criteria for

passing the test in question.)

'V Parallel Symbols: FAIL, TIMEP, and PSDTS. (All of these

symbols are text pages that store a message about the student's

test results. Together, these three messages and the one

contained in DNPT comprise the feedback messages the student

receives about his performance.)

4 111-18
Part XII, Courseware Documentation

Symbol Description of Use

DWIN DWIN stands for "D Window" and refers to the area between the

fourth and fifth white lines drawn on the page where the test

questions are displayed (QUES pages labeled TPRBI, TPRB2, and

TPRB3). 4.

The text of Option D in the test problems is displayed in the area

assigned to DWIN. For an explanation of how this works, please

see the description provided under the symbol AWIN. Both AWIN

and DWIN (along with BWIN and CWIN) function identically.

Their only difference Is that they define different areas on the

screen.

Parallel Symbols: AWIN, BWIN, and CWIN

F F is a variable flag used to track a very specific student status

*. as he proceeds through the test. This status is best explained by

first presenting the scenario under which he takes the test.

The test "Select Firing Position" will be used as an example. The

student is allowed 7 minutes to complete the test. He must

score at least 6 items correct in order to pass. It is possible that

he might run out of time before he gets to all items on the test.

4.-, While he is permitted to answer the remaining items on the

test, his passing or failing must be determined at the point

where he runs out of time. Two variables are used to track

this: F and TESTF (standing for Test Failed).

The system checks his time after each response and determines

if he has exceeded the time limitation. The special status, then,

comes into play when the student runs out of time before

completing all 7 items. When the system determines that the

total of his timed responses exceeds the 7 minutes, it checks to

see how many answers he has correct. If AC=6 (the minimum

for passing), F is set to FALSE, meaning that the student has not

failed the test, although he ran out of time before completing all

items.

Below are the commands in the response analysis section of the

QUES frame that allow the student to run out of time before

completing the test, yet still pass provided he has answered six

items correctly:

Command Mod Data Field

Go if (TIME k 420)A(AC=6)

Calc F - False

These commands read as follows: If the student has exceeded

the 7 minutes for taking the test AND has answered six items

correctly, the flag F is turned to FALSE, meaning the student has

NOT failed the test.

XlI-19
Part XII, Cour-seware Documentation

Symbol Description of Use

P (con't) Once the student has completed the test and passes into the TRES

frame where his results are presented to him, the value of F is

examined. If its value is FALSE, the message contained in the

text page symbol TIMEP (standing for Time Pass) is displayed,

along with his test results of AT and AC. (See TIMEP for the

contents of this message.)

N2te: F is the flip side of the system flag TESTF which is used

when the student runs out of time but has NOT answered at

least six items correctly. See TESTF for a description of what

happens in this case.

Parallel Symbols: TESTF

PAIL FAIL is a system defined variable flag called into use through the

External Symbol File "Advisor." When FAIL is set to true, it

indicates to the system that the student has failed the test, and

interrupt cscurs.

FAIL is used only in the TRES (Test Results) frame. It is not

used in the QUES frame to interrupt the student when he has

failed because he still must see all items on the test. Example

commands associated with FAIL are:

Command Mod Data Field

Show If (AC S 6) & (TIME s 419)

Calc FAIL - true

Window 9 1, 15 43

Data DNPT

These commands are interpreted as follows: If the student did

not score the minimum number of answers correct (AC) needed

to pass, set FAIL to true and show the message contained in the

text page DNPT (did not pass test).

Setting FAIL to true has the same effect on the system as using

SETGRADE. The system automatically sets the student's score on

this lesson, stores the fact that he failed, and records the color

RED in his PD file. What the author would do using SETGRADE

is done automatically by the system when FAIL is used.

Parallel Symbols: PASS

Related Symbols: TESTF, F

XII-20

, .Xw
Part X1I, Courseware Documentation

Symbol Description of Use

FAILT FAILT is a text page message that tells the student he has failed

the test. Using the test "Select Firing Position" as an example,

the student receives this message when his performance meets

two conditions:

" He exceeded the time limit of 7 minutes, AND

" He did not score at least six items correct.

FAILT works in conjunction with the system flag TESTF, which

is set to TRUE when the above conditions are met. When TESTF

is TRUE, the student will receive the FAILT message when he

finishes the test and proceeds into the TRES frame for his

results. The following commands are used to display the FAILT

message.

Command Mod Data Field

Show If TESTF=True

Window 11 1,16 43

Data FAILT

FAILT's message for "Select Firing Position" is as follows: "You

have failed this test because you did NOT correctly answer at

least 6 items within the required 7 minutes. You must report

for counseling before taking this test again."

In summary, FAILT is displayed in all tests whenever the

student has run out of time without enough correct answers to

pass. To see the exact FAILT message each test displays, refer to

the program listings using the ADAPT Editor.

Parallel Symbols: DNPT, TIMEP, and PSDTS

.11'2

1ll-21
Part XII, Courseware Documentation

* Symbol Description of Use

GITGRADE GETGRADE is a system function whose purpose is to find rut the

current status of a unit, lesson, or segment. It is used here to

extract the number of the last test attempt made by the

student.

GETGRADE has the following arguments: color, score, unit,

lesson, segment, extra, and tries. A typical GETGRADE command

would look like this: GETGRADE (VRBLI, VRBL2, 9, 2, 0, 0,

NATM). This is interpreted by the system as follows: Go into

the student's .PD file and find out how he performed on the test

for Unit 9, Lesson 2. The color of his performance (red, green,

black) is placed in the variable VRBLI. The score he achieved on

the test is placed in the variable VRBL2. The number of test

attempts is placed in NATM.

Once GETGRADE has done this, the values contained in VRBLI,

VRBL2, and NATM can be examined and actions taken depending

upon their status. For example, if the color value placed by

GETGRADE in VRBLI is green, it means that the student has

already taken and passed this test. He should not be taking it

again and can be branched to an appropriate message telling him

this. (This particular use of GETGRADE occurs in the files

BN.2.2.S, BN.9.2.S, and BN.9.3.S, where the student elects to take

the test. The system checks via GETGRADE to see if color is

green or NATM (number of test attempts) is greater than

allowed.)

In the test files themselves, the most important reason behind

using GETGRADE is to find out how many times the student has taken the test previously. See NATM and TA for a discussion of

what is done with the value placed by GETGRADE in NATM.

Related Symbols: VRBLl, VRBL2, and NATM

XI-22
Part XII, Courseware Documentation

Symbol Description of Use

GOARW GOARW stands for "Go On Arrow" and is a macro commanding

the display and coloring of a box showing a forwards arrow

(pointing to the right). The macro commands place the GOBX

symbol (described below) in the lower right corner of the screen

(16 41,16 43) and color the background of this area white. The

student marks in this area to go on to the next page.

Commands relating to the macro GOARW are used only in the

TINT (Test Introduction) frame of each test. These commands

are:

Command Mod Data Field

Include Macro GOARW

Params GOBX

Parallel Symbols: BKARW

Related Symbols: GOBX, BKBX

GOBI GOBX stands for "GO On Box" and corresponds to a text page

storing the symbol of a forwards arrow. This symbol is used in

conjunction with the macro GOARW which displays the GOBX on

the screen and colors it in a background of white.

The student marks the GOBX symbol with his light pen when he

wants to go on to the next page. The GOBX symbol is only used

- in the TINT (Test Introduction) frame.

Parallel Symbols: BKBX

Related Symbols: BKARW, GOARW

XI-.-.3

4.'.
Part XII, Courseware Documentation

Symbol Description of Use

ILMAR ILMAR stands for Ill Mark, meaning that the student has

pressed his light pen to an area on the screen that cannot be

interpreted as either a correct or incorrect answer. This is

known as an unanticipated response and might happen if the

A, student marks somewhere at the top of the screen, when the

computer is expecting him to mark his response in one of the

cyan colored boxes (A, B, C, or D).

When this happens, the computer must present a message telling

the student to clearly mark in an area it can interpret as a

right or wrong answer. It does this through the text page

message contained in ILMAR. The message reads: "Mark

clearly in one of the cyan boxes." (The word "cyan" is colored

in cyan.) o '

To present this message when appropriate, commands are

paired in display construction and response analysis through

IFFDBK (if feedback) and TOFDBK (to feedback) mods. These

commands are:

Display Construction Response Analysis

" Cmd Mod Data Cmd Mod Data

Show IFFDBK 1 Go If W=O

Window 17 1,17 43 Result ?

Erase Retry

Data ILMAR TOFDBK 1

* ILMAR is the only feedback message the student can receive

while answering test questions. Feedbacks are not provided for

correct or incorrect answers, only for unanticipated ones.

See also: W, WHICHMATCH, and ABOX for how the statement

"W=O" is determined.

Parallel Symbols: TCHBX

XII-24
Part XII, Courseware Documentation

Symbol Description of Use

Latency Latency is a system variable. It indicates the number of

seconds the student took to complete his response to the last

display. Because each test has a time limit, it is necessary to

track the amount of time the student spends in the test and

determine his pass/fail status at the point where he exceeds the

allotted time.

This is done through two variables: Latency (system defined)

* . and TIME (author-defined). The timer begins when the student

sees the first test question. Response analysis commands to

calculate student response time are: TIME 0 Latency + Time.

By adding together the latencies of each student response, a total

figure called TIME can be matched against the time limit

established for each test. The student's pass/fail status is

determined at the point where he goes beyond the limit.

Latency (as well as TIME) is defined in terms of seconds. If a

test has a time limit of 7 minutes, this must be expressed to the

system as 420 seconds.

To see what happens when TIME is greater than the time limit,

please refer to: TESTF, FAIL, TIMEP, F

To see what happens when TIME is less than the time limit,

please refer to: PSDTS, DNPT

Related Symbols: TIME

LCORN LCORN stands for "Left Corner." It refers to the window with

an upper left corner of 16 1 and a lower right corner of 16 3. Its

location on the screen is at the lower left corner.

This symbol is used to analyze the student's marks in the TINT

4" (Test Introduction) frame. Here he is allowed to reverse through

and reread the screens. To do this, he would touch his light pen

to the back arrow box (which appears in the area defined as

LCORN). Response analysis commands determine if he has

marked in the LCORN area and return him to the previous page

if he has.

Parallel Symbols: RCORN

X 2

111-25

A 4**E* .. *<~ ,*\'
Part XII, Courseware Documentation

Symbol Description of Use

MESSG MESSG stands for "Message" and is defined as a text page.

When the student is on the final page of the TINT (Test

Introduction) frame, he has the option of marking either to

review the instructions or to begin the test. If he marks

anywhere but the boxes for these two options, he receives the

MESSG feedback: "Mark either to review the instructions or to

begin the test."

Parallel Symbols: ILMAR, TCHBX

NATM NATM stands for "Number of Test Attempts." NATM is a

variable integer whose value changes according to which test

attempt the student is on.

For a number of reasons, it is important to keep track of the

number of times the student has tried to pass a test. For one,

he is only allowed 3 tries to pass, according to established Army

criterion. Second, he receives slightly different items each time

he takes the test. Therefore, the system must know which

attempt the student is on, so it can either deny him any

attempts greater than 3, or branch him to the appropriate

display construction command section so that the test he's

currently taking varies from previous ones.

The series of steps to determine the number of test attempts is

contained in the following response analysis commands, found

on TINT/i:

Command Mod Data Field

Compute Calc GETGRADE (VRBLI, VRBL2,

9, 2, 0, 0, NATM)

Compute Calc TA-NATM

Compute Caic TA--TA+ I

This can be interpreted as follows: Via the GETGRADE function,

the system goes into the student's Permanent Data Area (PDA)

and extracts the number of times the student has taken the test

for Unit 9, Lesson 2. It puts this number into NATM.

So as not to interfere with the way the system itself tracks test

attempts (it increments NATM after the test is finished, not as

the student begins), the value extracted by GETGRADE and loaded

into NATM is also loaded into a second variable called TA (for

Test Attempt). TA is then incremented by I to account for the

new test attempt underway.

111-26
Part XII, Courseware Documentation

Symbol Description of Use

NATM

(con't) Note: When NATM is incremented (instead of creating and

Incrementing TA), the system still follows its own procedures

and increments NATM again at the test's conclusion. This

means that one test attempt was tracked by the system as two

attempts. Therefore, TA was created to prevent this double

counting.

When the student has finished the test and is in the TRES (Test

Results) frame receiving his results, the system automatically

increments the test attempt number and places this in the

student's PDA. Once the grade has been updated from the

system's point of view to account for the test attempt just

completed, the file is ready for the student's next test attempt

(if one is necessary or permitted). At that time, the number of

test attempts will again be extracted by the GETGRADE function,

loaded into NATM, transferred to TA, and incremented by 1.

The value of TA will be used to branch the student to the

appropriate version of the test.

Parallel Symbols: TA

See also: GETGRADE

NORES NORES stands for "No Results" and is a system defined flag

""called ' into use through the External Symbol File "Test." It is set

to TRUE to indicate to the system that page one of the system

test results display should not be shown.

The reason for setting NORES to true and suppressing the

display of the system results page is the nature of the display

itself. First, because the system provides the display, it is

1s% necessarily general and may seem somewhat irrelevant to the

student. Second and more importantly, the student could only

exit from this display by using the keyboard. The display is not

light pen driven; the student proceeds to the next screen by

pressing the ENTER key. This violates the criterion that all

tests be light pen driven.

Therefore, NORES has been set to true in the TRES frame of all

tests, and the results page the student sees is author-created

and requires a light pen mark to exit the student.

Related Symbols: NOREV, TESTD

111-27

,, , ' .-j -'. .'.'. ".',' '.' ' . ' .* .'. *' . - ',' - "*,* % *" ,-" * " " "• " " -. ' 4' " , ''% " "#
Part XII, Courseware Documentation

Symbol Description of Use

KORIEV NOREV stands for "No Review" and is a system flag called into

use through the External Symbol File "Test." It is set by the

author to indicate to the system that the student should not be

allowed to review the test after he has finished.

NOREV is included to reinforce the environment specifications

selected using ATT'N "18." In test specifications, the author

indicates whether or not to enable test review. In all tests, this

has been answered "no", due to the fact that the same items are

used across all three versions of each test. NOREV is set to true

as double insurance against review.

Related Symbols: NORES, TESTD

OVRTM OVRTM is an author-defined variable integer used in response

analysis of the test problems. Its use is necessary because each

test has a time limit. OVRTM is initially set to 0 (zero) in the

TINT (Test Introduction) frame of each test. In the QUES frame

where the student sees the test problems, OVRTM's value will

be changed to I (one) if the student exceeds the time limit.

Using "Select Firing Position" as an example: When the student

has exceeded the time limit for the test, response analysis

proceeds through the following series of commands:

Command Mod Data Field

Go If OVRTM=l

To RITEc

Go If (Time k 420) & (AC s 5)

Calc TESTF -True; ANSCO -AC;

OVRTM- I

Go If (Time z 420) & (AC 2 6)

Calc F-False; ANSCO-AC;

OVRTM-l

These commands are interpreted by the system as follows:

When the student exceeds the time limit, the system checks

the value of OVRTM. If it has already been set to 1, analysis

skips to the command labeled RITE where the student's answer

is checked for correctness. However, if OVRTM is not equal to 1,

analysis moves to the next command (OVRTM can only be 0 or

1). The value held in AC (Answers Correct) is checked. If AC is

not enough for the student to pass, TESTF is set to true, and the

student fails the test. However, if AC is enough for the student

to pass, F is set to false, and the student passes the test. In

both cases, OVRTM's value is changed from 0 to 1.

XlI-28

U"m'0-h ,
Part XII, Courseware Documentation

Symbol Description of Use

OVRTM

(con't) The student continues the test. and answers the remaining

questions. The system scores these as correct or incorrect (and

increments AC accordingly). However, because he exceeded the

time limit on a previous question, the value established for

TESTF and F at that time must not be changed. OVRTM

prevents analysis from returning to the commands which set

the values of TESTF and F. The first time analysis goes to these

commands, OVRTM's value becomes 1. When OVRTM equals 1,

analysis skips forward to the command labeled RITE and avoids

the commands that set TESTF and F. In this way, analysis can

only go to these latter commands only once.

PASS PASS is a system defined variable flag called into use through

the External Symbol File "Advisor." When PASS is set to true, it

indicates to the system that the student has passed the test.

Mastery occurs.

PASS is used only in the TRES (Test Results) frame. It is not set

* in the QUES frame when the student achieves mastery because

N.-. he must still see all remaining items on the test. The system

would stop him as soon as he passed if this symbol were used

N" there.

Setting PASS to true has the same effect on the system as using

SETGRADE. The author uses SETGRADE to set the student's score

on a lesson, store the fact that he has passed, and record the

color green in the student's .PD file. The system does this

automatically when PASS Is set to true.

Parallel Symbols: FAIL

Related Symbols: TESTF, F

XII-29
Part XII, Courseware Documentation

Symbol Description of Use

PSDTS PSDTS stands for ".Eassed the leit" and corresponds to a text

page that stores a message to the student that he has passed the

test. When the student finishes answering all test items, he

proceeds to the TRES frame (Test Results) and receives one of

four different messages regarding his pass/fail status. The

PSDTS message is displayed to him when his performance

matches these conditions:

" He completed the test in under the time limit, AND

" He answered correctly at least the minimum number of

items needed to pass this test.

Using "Select Firing Position" as an example, the commands to

display this message are as follows:

Command Mod Data Field

Show If (AC a 6) A ( TIME s 4199)

Window 11 1,16 43

Data PSDTS

The message that appears when the student has met the above

performance conditions is: "CONGRATULATIONS I!1 You passed!!!"

This message is colored in green and surrounded by a

rectangular green box.

Parallel Symbols: FAIL, TIMEP, and DNPT. (All of these

symbols are text pages that store a message about the student's

test results. Together, these three messages and the one

contained in PSDTS comprise the feedback messages the student

receives about his performance.)

';.

111-30

NN
Part XII, Courseware Documentation

Symbol Description of Use

QUEH QUES is the frame where the test questions are presented to the

student.

QUES in these tests consists of three identical base pages labeled

TPRBI, TPRB2, and TPRB3. Depending on the student's test

attempt number, he will be branched from the TINT (Test

Introduction) frame to one and only one of these pages, where

the test items are then presented to him. While the three pages

are identical in appearance, the display construction commands

differ so that, from one test attempt to another, the student sees

the items, as well as the text of the A, B, C, and D options,

presented in a different order.

One test ("Conduct Performance Counseling with a Subordinate")

contains two situation pages in the QUES frame as well as the

TPRB pages. The questions in this test revolve around the

situations; however, the screen is not large enough to display

both the situation text and the question as well, so the situations

are presented separately. The student can refer back to these

pages at any time while in the QUES frame. Their base page

labels are: SITc and SITN2c.

When the student has answered all items on the test, he is

automatically branched from the QUES frame to the TRES (Test

Results) frame, where his test results are displayed for him.

Mote: QUES is not equivalent to GQUES. e QUES corresponds

to a TICCIT provided model which gives the author many builtin functions and capabilities. The 0 (pronounced "theta")

symbol identifies a frame as part of TICCIT's REP (Rule-ExamplePractice) Template, which makes many special functions

automatic and not author-driven, such as the automatic display

and advance of questions upon student response. However, it

was found that control of the many variables in these tests was

undermined by using the REP model. For example, branching

among the TPRB base pages and the display of items became

extremely complicated when the eQUES model was used.

Therefore, all frames in the tests are author-defined, not REP

(e) defined.

Parallel Symbols: TINT, TRES

IL XII-31
Part XII, Courseware Documentation

Symbol Description of Use

QESB QESBX stands for "Question Box" and refers to the window (area)

where the question stem of each test problem is displayed. Its

area is at the top of the screen.

The command using QESBX is as follows: Show Window

QESBX, Data WHAT. This is interpreted by the system as:

"Show in the window area of QESBX the text stored in the

variable WHAT." (WHAT holds the text of the question stem.)

Parallel Symbols: AWIN, BWIN, CWIN, DWIN (The texts of the

options for each question are displayed in these windows.)

RCORN RCORN stands for "Right Corner." It refers to the window with

an upper left corner of 16 40 and a lower right corner of 16 43.

Its location on the screen is at the lower right corner and is the

P, area where the forward arrow (Go On) box appears.

RCORN is used to analyze the student's light pen mark in the

TINT (Test Introduction) and TRES (Test Results) frames, using

the following response analysis command: "Compare Areas

Input=RCORN." In the TINT frame a light pen mark in the area

of RCORN (where the forward arrow box is placed) advances the

student to the next page. In the TRES frame, a light pen mark

in RCORN (where the EXIT box is placed) exits the student from

the test.

RCORN is not used in the QUES frame. Here the student moves

forward to the next display by answering the question.

Parallel Symbols: LCORN

!" I.

5Xll-.
Part XII, Courseware Documentation

Symbol Description of Use

RESPI

RKSP2

REP3

RKSP4 These symbols are chapter level item strings that store the text

for the test options. Each test question is divided up into parts:

the question itself is held in an item string called WHAT. The

options (A, B, C, D) are stored in RESPI, RESP2, RESP3, and RESP4

(not respective). From test attempt to test attempt, the position

of the option text on the page is moved to a different location.

For example, in test attempt one, the text in RESPI might appear

as option A. This same text might appear as option B in test

attempt two, and as option C in test attempt three. In this way,

test questions and their possible answers appear different to the

student every time he takes the test.

Example display construction commands, taken from "Select

Firing Position", are as follows:

TA I TA2 TA 3

Cmd Mod Data Cmd Mod Data Cmd Mod Data

, Show Window AWIN Show Window AWIN Show Window AWIN

Data RESPI Data RESP2 Data RESP3

Show Window BWIN Show Window BWIN Show Window BWIN

Data RESP2 Data RESP3 Data RESP4

Related Symbols: WHAT, ANSRI, ANSR2, ANSR3

V.

111-33
Part XII, Courseware Documentation

Symbol Description of Use

SITITEM SETITEM is a system defined symbol (an integer) used to change

the current item number before presenting the next display.

The tests have not been authored using the TICCIT REP (RuleExample-Practice) model. In the REP model, advancing from one

item to the next is done automatically by the system. Because

these tests are author-defined (not REP), advancing the item

counter must be done by the author.

Commands using SETITEM appear in the QUES frame and are as

- ~follows:

Command Mod Data Field

Go If Item s 7

Calc SETITEM - Item + I

To HHHc

*ITEM is the current number of the question being shown. HHHc

is a label identifying the first command in display construction.

The system checks to see that the student is not on the last

problem (If Items7), then increments the number of the item

(SETITEM Item +1), and finally returns to the top of display

construction (to HHH), where it then displays the next question.

Note: ITEM is also a system symbol (integer). However, its

value is not changeable by the author except through using

SETITEM. Therefore, "ITEM-Item + " is not a valid command.

I'XI-3

-p.

- 111-34
Part XII, Courseware Documentation

Symbol Description of Use

TA TA stands for Test Attempt and is defined as a variable integer.

TA's value changes according to which test attempt the student

4 is on.

For a number of reasons, it is important to keep track of the

number of times the student has tried to pass a test. For one,

he is only allowed 3 tries, according to established Army

crtierion. Second, he receives slightly different items each time

he takes the test.

Therefore, the system must know which attempt the student is

on, so it can either deny him any attempts greater than 3 or

branch him so that the test he's currently taking varies from

previous ones.

The series of steps to determine the number of test attempts is

contained in the following response analysis commands, found

on TINT/i:

Command Mod Data Field

.ompute Calc GETGRADE (VRBLI, VRBL2,

9,2,0,0, NATM)

Compute Calc TA- NATM

A: Compute Calc TA - TA + 1

These commands can be interpreted as follows: Via the

GETGRADE function, the system goes into the student's .PD file

and extracts the number of times the student has taken the test

for Unit 9, Lesson 2. It puts this number into NATM.

So as not to interfere with the way the system itself tracks test

attempts (it increments NATM after the test is finished, not as

the student begins), the value extracted by GETGRADE and loaded

into NATM is also loaded into a second variable called TA (also

for Test Attempt). TA is then incremented by I to account for

the new test attempt underway.

"e. XII-35

N V
Part X1I, Courseware Documentation

Symbol Description of Use

TA (con't) When the student has reached the end of the TINT frame, he

must be branched into the QUES frame to receive the test

questions. However, each test attempt should present him with

a different version of the test. To this end, the QUES frame

contains 3 identical base pages with different display

construction commands. Which page he is sent to depends upon

the value of TA. If TA=I, he is sent to the first base page

(labelled TPRBI). If TA=2, he is sent to the second page (TPRB2).

TA=3 takes him to the third page (TPRB3). Because the display

construction commands differ, the test will appear differently to

the student each time he takes it.

Note: In one test (Conduct Performance Counseling), these TA

commands appear in the response analysis of the TPRBI ( as

opposed to the last page of the TINT frame). This is because the

first page the student sees in the QUES frame is a situation page

presenting the specific scenario around which the questions are

built. From this situation page, the student is branched to the

test questions depending on the value of TA.

Parallel Symbols: NATM

See also: GETGRADE

111-36
_MP I- J

Part XII, Courseware Documentation

Symbol Description of Use

TCHBX TCHBX stands for "Touch the Box." This symbol is a text page

that stores a message to the student. This message is displayed

whenever the student gives a response other than the expected

one of touching either the forward or backward arrow box.

In the TINT frame, the student should only advance a page (by

touching the forward arrow) or reverse a page (by touching the

backward facing arrow). If he touches another area on the

screen, he receives the TCHBX message: "Please mark either the

- box or the - box ." The system then gives the student a

retry and waits for a correct response.

To present this message when appropriate, commands are

paired in display construction and response analysis through

IFFDBK (if feedback) and TOFDBK (to feedback) mods. These

commands are:

Display Construction Response Analysis

Cmd Mod Data Cmd Mod Data

Show IFFDBK 1 Go If W=O

"',indow 14 1,15 43 Result ?

Erase Retry

Data TCHBX TOFDBK I

See also: W, WHICHMATCH, and ABOX to see how the statement

"W=O" is determined.

Parallel Symbols: ILMAR, TSTBX

TESTD TESTD stands for "Test Done" and is a system flag called into

use through the External Symbol File "TEST." It is used by the

author to indicate to the system that the student has finished

the test. This is necessary because the environment

specifications for each test (accessed and edited through ATT'N O-o• "18" indicate that mastery and interrupt will be author-coded,

not tracked by the system. When these options are selected in

the Test Environment Specifications, it is necessary to tell the

system when the test is done.

The TESTD command appears in the display construction section

of the TRES (Test Results) frane, as follows: Compute Calc

TESTD-'=.True.

Related Symbols: NOREV (for No Review), NORES (for No

Results)

XII-37

,"-...
Part XII, Courseware Documentation

Symbol Description of Use

TISTP TESTF stands for "Test Failed" and is a system variable flag

called in from the External Symbol File "Test." When TESTF is

set to "true", the student has failed the test.

TESTF is used in the QUES and TRES frames to keep track of a

special student status arising when the student has failed the

test because the time limit has elapsed without him correctly

answering the minimum number of items to pass. (For a

complete description of this scenario, refer to the description of

how the variable flag "F" is used.)

When the student exceeds the time limit and has not correctly

answered the minimum number of questions for passing, the

flag TESTF is set to true. The system holds this value and when

the student finishes the test and proceeds to the TRES frame

(test results), the value of TESTF is examined. Depending on its

value, an appropriate feedback message is displayed.

The following commands using TESTF appear in the QUES frame

of "Select Firing Position." After each student response the

system checks the student's TIME in the test. If he is over

time, the number of answers correct (AC) is checked to see if

TESTF should be set to true.

Command Mod Data Field

Go If (TIME k 420)A(AC s 5)

Calc TESTF-True

Later, in the display construction section of the TRES frame for

this test, TESTF is checked to see if it has been set to true. If it

has, the student receives the message contained in "FAILT",

which informs him that he has failed the test due to exceeding

the time limit of 7 minutes.

Command Mod Data Field

Show If TESTF=True

Window 11 1,16 43

Data FAILT

Parallel Symbols: F

See also: F (for a complete description of why the use of TESTF

and F is necessary); FAILT (for the message displayed to the

screen when TESTF=True).

1X-38
Part XII, Courseware Documentation

Symbol Description of Use

TIME TIME is a variable integer used to keep track of the amount of

time the student takes to complete the test. Its value is

determined by the equation:

TIME - Latency + Time

where Latency is a system variable used to clock the student's

response time to each question. By adding the latencies of each

response together, a total figure, TIME, can be determined.

Because each test has a time limit, it is necessary to track the

student's TIME. After each response to a question, his TIME is

updated and compared to the limit. If TIME exceeds the limit,

TESTF or F is set depending on how many answers correct the

student has at this point. In this way, the student's passing or

failing the test is held within the time limitation.

The timer begins as soon as the first test item is presented. No

tracking of TIME is done in the TINT or TRES frames.

Related Symbols: Latency

-: - See also: TESTF and F, FAIL and TIMEP

TIMEP TIMEP stands for "Time Pass" and refers to a text page storing

the following message: "You have run out of time allotted to

answer these questions. However, you answered at least six

items correctly, which is a PASSING score.

CONGRATULATIONS!!" (The words "passing" and

"congratulations" are colored green.)

When the student finishes the test and proceeds to the TRES

frame for his results, he can receive one of four different

messages regarding his performance. The TIMEP message is

displayed to him when he meets the following conditions:

" He exceeded the time limit, AND

" He answered correctly at least the minimum number

of items needed to pass.

The commands to display this message are as follows:

Command Mod Data Field

Show If F=True

Window I1 1, 16 43

Data TIMEP

For a description of the specific conditions under which F would

be set to True, refer to the symbol F and the symbol TESTF.

Parallel Symbols: DNPT, FAIL, and PSDTS.

II-39
Part XII, Courseware Documentation

Symbol Description of Use

TINT TINT is the frame where the student receives the Test

Introduction. TINT consists of several pages explaining the

conditions of the test, the criteria for passing, and the way in

which the student is expected to mark responses.

The base page labels for these pages are: INT1, INT2, INT3, INT4,

and so on.

Parallel Symbols: QUES, TRES

TRES TRES stands for Test Results and is the frame where the

student receives information on how many correct answers he

scored and whether or not he passed the test.

There is one page in this frame: its base page label is RESIc.

Because the REP (Rule-Example-Practice) model has not been used

in creating these tests, the system will not provide its own

results page. RESIc is author-created.

Parallel Symbols: TINT, QUES

111-40
Part XII, Courseware Documentation

Symbol Description of Use

TSTBX TSTBX stands for "Touch the Test Box." This symbol is a text

page that storef a message to the student. The message is

displayed only in the QUES frame of the test entitled "Conduct

Performance Counseling with a Subordinate" (BN.2.2.1.T).

This test contains two situations around which all test questions

are built. Because the screen is not large enough to present both

the situation text and the questions, each situation has been

placed on a separate page in the QUES frame. The student sees

these pages before he receives relevant test items. To move

from the situation pages to the page where the test items are

presented, he touches his light pen to the lower right corner of

the screen where a cyan colored box saying "TEST" appears. If

he marks anywhere else on the screen, he receives the message

stored in TSTBX: "To continue, mark clearly in the TEST box at

the bottom right of the screen." The system then gives the

student a retry and waits for a correct response.

To present this message when appropriate, commands are

paired in display construction and response analysis of the

situation pages, using IFFDBK (If Feedback) and TOFDBK (To

Feedback) mods. These are:

Display Construction Response Analysis

Cmd Mod Data Cmd Mod Data

Show IFFDBK 1 Go if W=O

Window 17 1. 17 43 Result ?

Erase Retry

Data TSTBX TOFDBK 1

See also: W, WHICHMATCH, and ABOX for how the statement

"W=O" is determined.

Parallel Symbols: ILMAR, TCHBX

XII-41
Part XII, Courseware Documentation

Symbol Description of Use

VRBL1

VRBL2

VRBLI and VRBL2 are used as arguments in the system's

GETGRADE function. Both are defined as variable integers.

Before the student enters the test file, the system is commanded

to "get his grade" on previous attempts to pass the test.

Information about the color of his status (green if he has

already passed the test, red if he has failed it, and black if he

has never tried this test before) is temporarily stored in VRBLI.

Information about his score on the last test attempt is placed in

VRBL2. It is then possible to determine if he should be allowed

in the test file at all. For example, if the value taken from

memory and loaded into VRBLI is "green," the student has

already passed the test and should not be permitted to take the

test again. He will receive a message to that effect.

For a complete description of the way that VRBLl and VRBL2

function, see GETGRADE.

Related Symbols: GETGRADE, NATM

4XII-42
Part XII, Courseware Documentation

Symbol Description of Use

W W is a variable integer used in conjunction with WHICHMATCH

in processing the student's marks on the screen. The student

may respond in one of three ways: correct answer, wrong

answer, and unanticipated answer. The system uses W as an

intermediary step between the student's input (which is an

area) and storage of the correct answer (which is a number).

The following commands are used to assign a number to the

student's input and "hold" that number in W so that it can be

interpreted and the proper action taken by the computer.

Command Mod Data Field

Compare Areas Input = RCORN I LCORN

Compute Calc W -WHICHMATCH

Go If W=l

To NEXT

Go If W=2

To BACK

This is interpreted as follows: The expected student response is

either in RCORN (where the forward arrow box appears) or

LCORN (where the backward arrow box appears). WHICHMATCH

is a system function that converts the student's area input into

a number. If the student has marked in the area assigned to

RCORN, his input is given a value of 1. If he has marked in

LCORN, his input is given a value of 2. (If he marked in neither

place, his input is given a value of 0.) This number is loaded

into the variable W. A series of "If" commands follow. When

the computer finds a command using the present value of W,

that command is executed. All others are ignored.

The example above is used in the TINT frame of all tests where

the student will either go forward or back. However, in the

QUES frame, W is compared against the correct answer held in

ANSR1, ANSR2, or ANSR3, depending on the student's test attempt

number. If W matches the value contained in ANSRI, 2, or 3,

. the student has answered a test item correctly. A complete

description of this process is presented under the symbol named

"ABOX."

Related Symbols: WHICHMATCH

111-43

N-N
Part XII, Courseware Documentation

Symbol Description of Use

WHAT WHAT is an item string used to store the question stem of all

test problems.

Each item is divided up into parts: the question itself is held in

WHAT. The option text (A, B, C, and D) is stored in item strings

called RESPI, 2, 3 and 4 (not respective).

The position where the text held in WHAT is displayed on the

screen does not change from test attempt to test attempt. WHAT

is always displayed at the top of the screen. The option text

will appear in different positions in order to present different

versions of the test (see RESP for an explanation of how this

works). WHAT is only used in the QUES frame.

Parallel Symbols: RESPI, 2, 3, and 4; ANSRI, 2 and 3.

WHICHMATCH WHICHMATCH is a system variable used in response

analysis. It assigns a number to a student response in

the following way: The system is given a list of

acceptable student responses. WHICHMATCH assigns a

number to the response the student actually makes by

first checking to see if the answer is included in the list.

If it is not, WHICHMATCH assigns the response a value of

0. If the response is listed as acceptable, WHICHMATCH

assigns it the number of its position in the list.

Commands are as follows:

, . ,Command Mod Data Field

Compare Areas Input = ABOX ! BBOX ! CBOX

Compute Calc W -WHICHMATCH

These commands are interpreted: Acceptable student responses

are in the areas of ABOX, BBOX, and CBOX. If the student marks

in ABOX, give this response a value of 1. Correspondingly, a

BBOX mark receives a value of 2, and a CBOX mark a value of 3.

(If the student did not mark in any of these areas, this is

considered an unanticipated response and is given a value of 0.)

The number assigned by WHICHMATCH is placed in the variable

integer W and then compared against the correct answer to see

if the student responded corerctly. If W is equal to 0, a w , feedback message is displayed telling him to mark clearly in a

cyan colored option box (in this example, A, B, C, or D).

Related Symbols: W

111-44

N 0 11 11 11111111.1
Part XlI: Symbols Used in Course 20

Symbols in Course 20

Introduction The following symbols are used in Course 20, the 19K

BNCOC CMI System.

Symbol Description of Use

BOXI - Boxl through Box7 are symbols used to store seven different text

BOX7 pages in the files DE.I.I.I.S., DE.I.I.2.S., and DE.1.1.3.S, where the

data entry pages are located.

When the Course 20 user comes to the data entry page, he is

shown the first student's name and test status on the task in

question. The student's current test status is displayed in the

form of three test attempt boxes that are colored red (R), green

(G) or white (W), depending on whether the student has failed,

passed or not attempted the test. This information is extracted

from the student's .PD file (using the GETSC and SHOSC macros)

and loaded into a variable called LI(0). Depending on the value

held in LI(0), one of seven BOXes is displayed to the user to

reflect the student status. These boxes are:

Boxl (shown when LI(O)=49): No attempt; boxes are W,W,W

Box2 (LI(0)50): GO on first attempt; boxes are G,W,W

Box3 (LI(O)=51): GO on second attempt; boxes are R, G, W

Box4 (LI(0)=52): GO on third attempt; boxes are R, R, G

Box5 (LI(0)=53): NOGO on first attempt; boxes are R, W, W

Box6 (LI(O)=54): NOGO on second attempt; boxes are R, R, W

Box7 (LI(0)=55): NOGO on third attempt; boxes are R, R, R.

IFFDBK/TOFDBK commands are used to display the appropriate

box. In response analysis of the data entry page, the value of

LI() is established and the system is commanded to GO/TOFDBK.

Example display construction commands are:

Command Mod . Data Field

Show Always

If LI(0)=49

Window 1 1,16 43

Mode Replace

Data BOXI

Show Always

If LI(O)=50

Window 1 1,16 43

Mode Replace

Data BOX2

XII-45

" 1 ** * ** * *
Part XII: Symbols Used in Course 20

Symbol Description of Use

BOX (cont.] Thus, if the student failed on the first attempt and passed on

the second, the Course 20 user sees this status as a red first test

attempt box, a green second box, and a white third box, taken

from the text page stored in BOX2.

See also: GETSC, SHOSC, and SRDBI

BYTPN BYTPN is an expression located in the file DE.3.S (frame: NAMID).

BYTPN contains an index which places a byte position into the

variable RGBYT. RGBYT is used to access the proper byte

position to read information from REGISTER.AF.

BYTPN is also used at DE.S (frame: MRFIL) which contains

commands for the "Review Roster" option on the Main Menu.

Each value in BYTPN after zero is an increment of 512. Every

person registered in a course on the TICCIT system is given 512

bytes of information. The BNCOC CMI system uses the

information from the TICCIT roster file (i.e., Mailbox number

and ID) to access these blocks of information in REGISTER.AF and

gather the necessary information.

CONV CONV stands for "Convert" and is a macro used in DE.S to

convert the student mailbox number and ID number to integers.

TICCIT stores both the student mailbox number and the student

ID in TICCIT decimal in a .RO file created via an on-line utility.

CONV converts this information from TICCIT decimal into integer

form. CONV does this by using two positions in the array LI to

store the converted mailbox number and four positions in the

array LI to store the converted ID number. LI(0) and LI(l) are

loaded into the variable MB (for mailbox) and LI(2) through LI(5)

are loaded into the variable ID. CONV does this for each student,

until the mailbox and ID numbers of all students listed in the

Roster File (RO file) have been changed to integer values. The

REGISTERAF file is then accessed and the integer values are

used to match up the ID number found in the .RO file with the

ID number and name found in the REGISTER.AF file.

,

XII-46
Part XII: Symbols Used in Course 20

Symbol Description of Use

COURS COURS stands for "Course" and is defined as a variable string at

the course level. When using Course 20 to enter student off-line

test results, it is necessary to identify for the system the course

to which the test results belong. The course number specified

by the user in the Main Menu option "Identify Course and

Section" is loaded into COURS. (In most cases, the course

number identified will be "019" for 19K BNCOC on MicroTICCIT.)

COURS is used by the system in conjunction with the variable

SECT (for section number) to identify the group of students

registered in that particular course and section number. In

order to permit the user to enter off-line test results or print

the Master Record, the system must use COURS and SECT to

access the correct Roster File and Master Record File of students.

The TICCIT Roster File of students and the Master Record File

are identified with the following commands:

Command Mod Data Field

Compute Calc ROSTR - COURS & SECT & J.RO4; SFILE

MASTER & COURS & ;.; & SECT

If the user has identified COURS as "019" and a section number

(SECT) of "00," these commands are interpreted as: The Roster

File to be used is 01900.RO. The Master Record File to be used is

MR019.00.

Parallel Symbols: SECT

'I.

4.

Xi-47

Vv
Part XII: Symbols Used in Course 20

Symbol Description of Use

EVENT EVENT is a macro used in display construction of the data entry

pages located in files DE.I.I.I.S, DE.l.1.2.S., and DE.I.I.3.S. Here is

where the Course 20 user comes to enter the results of off-line

student testing.

The data entry page shows the user the titles of the Cluster and

task for which s/he is entering data, as well as the names of

the students and their current status within that task. The

di. macro EVENT determines what task title should be displayed to

the user, through the following example commands:

Command Mod Data Field

Compute If VLIST(l)=l and VLIST(2)=16

Calc TITLE - Prepare Gunner's Station

"Prepare Gunner's Station" is the sixteenth task within the first

cluster. EVENT checks the values assigned to VLIST(l) (the

number of the cluster) and VLIST(2) (the number of the task

within the cluster) and loads the appropriate task title into

TITLE. This is then displayed on the data entry page with a

SHOW/DATA/TITLE command.

Note: The file DE.l.l.I.S is used for Cluster L (Diagnostic

Tests/Remedial Training)' DE.I.I.2.S is used for Clusters B-D.

DE.1.1.3.S is used for Clusters E-K.

See also: VLIST(1), VLIST(2)

4;

..

1II-48

L-
Part XII: Symbols Used in Course 20

Symbol Description of Use

F F is defined as a chapter level variable integer and appears in

DE.S, where the Course 20 user specifies the course and section

number of students for whom s/he wishes to enter off-line test

results. 4'.

When the user enters the "Identify Course and Section Number"

frame, F is set to 0 (zero). As soon as the user Identifies the

first digit of the course number, F is set to 1. F becomes 2 when

the user specifies the second digit of the course number, and 3

for the third digit. Since the course number must contain

exactly 3 digits, the value of F is checked to make sure that the

user has not specified a course number that is longer or

shorter. When the value of F exceeds 3, the user receives a

feedback message that says: "The course number must be 3

digits. Mark START OVER or ENTER SECTION." When F is less

than 3 and the user marks to ENTER SECTION, he receives the

feedback message: "The course number must be 3 digits.

Complete the number or mark START OVER."

F is also used to load the course number specified by the user

into the system array GI and show it on the screen. The

following commands do this (the variable W is the number

marked by the user as he specifies the course number, digit by

digit):

RESPONSE ANALYSIS

Command Mod Data Field

Go If (F=I) or (F=2) or (F=3)

Calc GI(F).- W

Retry

TOFDBK F

DISPLAY CONSTRUCTION

Command Mod Data Field

Show IFFDBK I

POSIT 8 16

Data GI(l)

Show IFFDBK 2

- POSIT 8 17

Data GI(2)

Show IFFDBK 3

POSIT 8 18

Data GI(3)

II-49
Part XII: Symbols Used in Course 20

Symbol -- Description of Use

F (con't) These commands are Interpreted as follows: If F is 1 (the user

is specifying the first digit of the course number), load the

number he marks into GI(1) and show this number on the

screen at position 8 16. When the second digit of the course

number is specified, F is 2 and GI(2) Is loaded with the number

the user marks, and so on.

When the user moves to the "Enter Section" page, F is 3. It

becomes 4 when the first digit of the section number is entered,

and 5 when the second number is entered. On this page, F is

used in the same way as on the "Identify Course" page, namely

to make sure the user specifies a two-digit section number and

to load GI(4) and GI(5) with the numbers marked and show these

numbers on the screen.

FILE FILE is a macro used in the data entry pages (DE.I.I.I.S,

DE.I.I.2.S, and DE.I.I.3.S). Its purpose is to read the contents of

the Master Record File (which contains the total number of

students registered in a particular course and section, student

names and their ID numbers).

When the Course 20 user comes to the data entry page to enter

student test results, s/he must be presented with the student

names and ID numbers, one by one. FILE goes into the Master

Record File and extracts this information, loading it into arrays

called NAME(n) and ID (n). The contents of these arrays are

what is shown to the user.

Noj: The READ macro located in the print routines performs

Identical actions in order to produce student names and IDs to

print on the Master Record.

See also: READ

X11-50

iNCNN .Ot
Part XII: Symbols Used in Course 20

Symbol Description of Use

FLAG FLAG is a variable flag defined at the page level. This symbol is

used in both display construction and response analysis of the

frame in DE.S that asks the Course 20 user to "Identify Course

and Section Number" of the students. When the user marks to

"Identify Course and Section Number," FLAG is turned ON before

the user is exited from the Main Menu page and branched to

where s/he will specify a course and section number.

When FLAG is ON, the system erases any course number

previously specified by a user and prepares to accept a new

course number. Once the user has specified the first digit of the

course number, FLAG is turned OFF so that this information can

be held.in memory. If the user marks to enter the section

number of his students, FLAG is turned ON again so that any

previously specified section number is erased and the system

can accept a new number. As soon as the user specifies the

first digit of the ection number, FLAG 1s again turund OFF; s

that this number can be held in memory.

..

1ll-51
Part XII: Symbols Used in Course 20

Symbol Description of Use

GETSC GETSC stands for "Get Score" and is a macro used in display

construction of the data entry pages located in files DE.I.I.I.S,

DE..1.l.2.S, and DE.l.1.3.S. Here is where the Course 20 user

comes to enter the results of off-line student testing.

The data entry page shows the user the titles of the Cluster and

task for which s/he is entering data, as well as the names of

the students and their current status within the task. In order

to display the student's status (GO/NOGO/No attempt made yet),

the system must go into the student's .PD file, extract the

relevant information, and interpret it for display on the screen.

This is done for the first student through the macro GETSC.

(For subsequent students, the system uses the macro SHOSC.)

GETSC uses the SRDBI function to read the location in memory

holding the test results of a particular student on a particular

cluster and task (see explanation under SRDBI for how this

command functions). This is done in two steps. First, the

system uses the SRDBI function to return the position (pointer)

of the beginning of the lesson table for the Cluster in question.

This pointer is used (along with the number of the task within

the cluster) to determine the exact byte position storing the

student status on that task (or lesson). Then the system uses

the SRDBI again to read what is stored in that position.

The information extracted can be one of 7 conditions: No

attempt; GO on the first, second, or third attempt; or NOGO on

the first, second, or third attempt. A value ranging from 49-55

is assigned in GETSC to each of these conditions and Is loaded

into the symbol LI(0).

In other commands on the data entry page, the value held in

LI(0) is used to color the three test attempt boxes with the

student's current status (see BOXI-BOX7).

See also: BOXI-BOX7, SHOSC, SRDBI

11-52

w~~ IN* %I
Part XII: Symbols Used in Course 20

Symbol Description of Use

HEADI- HEADI - HEAD8 stand for "Headers" and are constant expressions

HEADS to hold the headers that go at the top of the Master Record

produced by the print routines (DE.2.1.l.S, DE.2.1.2.S, and

DE.2.l.3.S).

For example, HEADI, which is printed at the top of the Master

Record, contains the header "BNCOC 19K Division" and the

command needed to print it. HEADI's expression is as follows:

HEAD(0)

BNCOC 19K Division ° ;

BWRIT (CHAN, HEAD(O), 0, $ERP, ECD)

Because the MicroTICCIT screen is bitmapped, it is necessary to

include in the HEAD expressions the number of blank spaces

needed to produce correct spacing on the page. There are no

print commands that allow the user to select a starting position

other than the top left corner. For this reason, the information

contained in the headers generally looks somewhat strange and

may contain quite a few blank spaces before actual text begins.

If you need to create a new header or revise an existing one,

keep this system constraint in mind.

At present HEAD expressions print the following:

Symbol Array. What's Printed

HEADI Head(0) BNCOC 19K Division

HEAD2 Head(l) USA NCOA/DSS

HEAD3 Head(2) Fort Knox, Kentucky 40121

HEAD4 Head(4) Master Record - Diagnostic Tests

HEAD5 Head(5)

HEAD6 Head(4) Master Record - Page 1 of 2

HEAD7 Head(4) Master Record - Page 2 of 2

HEAD8 Head(5) 0 (return or blank line)

An example command used to include the header on the Master

Record page is: Compute/Calc/@HEADI; @HEAD2; @HEAD3. This

produces the heading:

BNCOC 19K Division

USA NCOA/DSS

Fort Knox, Kentucky 40121

I. '

i XlI-53
Part XII: Symbols Used in Course 20

Symbol Description of Use

HEAD

[con't] Another way of commanding a header to be included on the

Master Record is:

Command Mod Data Field

Compute Calc Head(3)- 4 * j ; BWRIT (CHAN, Head(3),

0, $ERP, ECD)

The above command prints a carriage return (which appears as

a blank line). This latter method is used to produce clusterspecific information, for example, the header identifying the 18

tasks in the Diagnostic Test Cluster. Then student test results

for each task are printed below the header.

Command M Data Field

Remark Rink Headers for Diagnostic Tests

Compute Calc GS(0)- ID;

GS(0- NAME;

GS(2)- Li L2 L3 L4 L5 L6;

GS(3)- L7 L8 L9 LI0 Lii L12;

GS(4)- L13 L14 L15 L16 L17;

GS(5). L18*

Compute Calc Head(6)- GS(0) & GS(l) & GS(2) & GS() &

GS(4) & GS(5);

BWRIT (CHAN, Head(6), 0, $ERP, ECD)

Head(6), then, is the printed result and Is a line that reads:

ID NAME Li L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 ... LIB

When you program in ADAPT, it is not always possible to fit all

the information you want to appear as one line into the "Data

Field" of the command/mod. The above commands are a good

exmaple of this. It was not possible to produce Head(6) by

simply typing one line of text to appear on the printed Master

Record. First, GS(o) - GS(5) had to be loaded with as much

information as one line in the ADAPT "data field" would hold.

Then GS(O) through GS(5) had to be concatenated (strung together

with the ampersands - "&') and loaded into the variable Head(6).

It is the printing of Head(6) that creates the solid line of text

appearing on the Master Record.

XII-54
Part XII: Symbols Used in Course 20

Symbol Description of Use

IGET IIGET is a course level variable integer. This symbol is used to

hold the total number of students registered in a particular

course and section.

The Course 20 user must first specify the course and section

number of students before he can perform other actions within

Course 20. IIGET is used throughout Course 20 in a number of

ways. For example, in both the "Review CMI Roster" and

"Create/Update Master Record File" options, the value of IIGET is

checked to see how many students are registered in the course

and section specified. If this number is less than 6, only one

page is needed to display the student names to the user. If the

number is more than 6, a second page is needed. IIGET is used

in the macro SHOPG (show page) to number the page(s) listing

the students and to display a GO ON arrow box, if more than

one page exists. Additionally, when a new Master Record File is

created, the value of IIGET is shown to the user in a message

that tells him "(n) students have been placed into the Master

Record File for this course and section." (n) is the number of

students registered for the course and section indicated and is

drawn from the value of IIGET.

Another use of IIGET is found on the data entry pages (DE.I.I.I.S.,

DE.I.I.2.S., and DE.I.I.3.S). Here, IIGET is used in conjunction

with the variable INCR (for increment) In cycling through the

names of students, presenting one name at a time to the user so

that test results can be entered for each individual. The first

student name to appear is given an INCR value of 0. Each time

* the user marks the GO ON arrow to see the next student name,

INCR is incremented by I, until the user has cycled through the

entire list of students. If he marks the GO ON arrow at this

point, he should be taken back to the beginning of the student

list and shown the first student name again. The following

commands do this.

Command Mod Data Field

Compare Areas Input=16 41,16 43 (User marks GO ON.)

Calc INCR- Incr + I

Compute If INCR > (IIGET-I)

Calc Incr- 0

IIGET is used in the file DE.S in the display construction of the

frame MRFIL and in the macros LIST3 and SHOPG. It is also

used in the display construction of file DE.3.S and in the data

entry pages specified above.

III-55
Part XII: Symbols Used in Course 20

Symbol Description of Use

LIST1-2 LISTI and LIST2 are macros that command the system to show

a list of names and ID numbers of students registered in the

course and section number specified by a Course 20 user.

When a Course 20 user marks to "Create/Update the Master

Record File," he is first shown a list of student names and ID

numbers found in the currently existing Master Record File for

that course and section. The first six names and ID numbers

are displayed to him through using the macro LISTI, and (if

necessary) the second set of six names and ID numbers through

LIST2.

LISTI and LIST2 are also used when the user selects to "Review

.4 the CMI Roster." These macros display the list of names and ID -. numbers the user sees when examining the Roster file.

OPENR OPENR stands for "Open Roster File" and is a macro used in

creating/updating the Master Record File in the file DE.S.

OPENR supplies the system with file specifications to open and

use the TICCIT Roster file (the list of students registered In a

particular course and section and their ID numbers). OPENR

does this by accessing the correct directory and opening a free

channel on which to work with the Roster file. The system can

then open the Roster file and make it available for reading or

writing.

OPENR uses such system funtions as MDIR (to obtain the name

of the master system directory), DIR (to change the current

working directory), and GCHN(to get the number of a free

channel on which to open a file).

X.4..

111-56
Part XII: Symbols Used in Course 20

Symbol Description of Use

READ READ is a macro located in the print routine files, DE.2.1.1.S,

DE.2.1.2.S, and DE.2.1.3.S. Together these files collect all student

data needed to print the BNCOC Master Record.

READ reads the Master Record file identified in the variable

SFILE. The Master Record file for a particular course and

section contains data on the total number of students registered

in that course and section, and their names and ID numbers.

READ commands the system to open the Master Record file,

extract the total number of students registered, and put this

number into a symbol called GI(0). GI(O) is then loaded into

IIGET, which is used throughout Course 20 to cycle through the

list of student names and then return to the first name.

READ also extracts the ID numbers and names of all students

listed in the Master Record file and loads these (respectively)

into GS(l) and GS(2). GS(i) is then loaded into ID(N) and GS(2) into

Name(N). These latter symbols are used throughout Course 20

whenever ID numbers and names of students are displayed to

the user or are printed.

N1t: READ has the same function as the macro FILE. Both

macros access the Master Record file and read its contents of

total number of students registered in a specified course and

section, the student ID numbers, and their names.

111-57

MIN~
Part XII: Symbols Used in Course 20

Symbol Description of Use

REGID REGID stands for "Registration ID" and is the student ID number

in decimal that the user sees when s/he reviews the CMI Roster

file or inspects the current Master Record File.

REGID is displayed with the following command in the LIST

macros in the file DE.S:

Command Mod Data Field

Show POSIT A 5

Data REGID(B)

where A is the starting position on the screen and B is the

position in the string REGID. The value of A starts at 4 and B

starts at 0 (zero). The first student's ID number is held in

REGID(0) and is displayed on the screen at a starting coordinate

of 4 5. A is then incremented by 2 (the IDs are displayed in

double space) and B is incremented by 1, and the next student's

ID number is displayed.

REGID is also used in the file DE.3.S, where the Master Record

File is created/updated.

~111-58
'S

Part XII: Symbols Used in Course 20

Symbol Description of Use

SCORE SCORE is a macro used in two places in Course 20. These are:

the print routines located in DE.2.1.i.S, DE.2.1.2.S, and DE.2.1.3.S;

and the software used to produce the list of NOGOs (located in

DE.2.2.l.S and DE.2.2.2.S). There are, in fact, 11 SCORE macros,

each one instructing the collection of student "score" data for a

different cluster. These macros, in combination with the macro

TEE, find the appropriate location in memory that stores student

test results for tasks within the cluster (in other words, the

lesson table for each cluster).

SCORE in the Print Routines. Using the SRDBI function to read

the contents of the lesson table for each student, SCORE loads

this information (the student's score on all tasks within the

cluster) into a variable called LI(O). The value of LI(O) is checked

to see if the student has passed, failed, or not yet attempted the

task test. Depending upon his status, a second variable, the

array SC, is loaded with one of 7 conditions:

Student SL 'us SC becomes:

No attempt NA

GO, 1st attempt GI

GO, 2nd attempt G2

GO, 3rd attempt G3

NOGO, 1st attempt NI

NOGO, 2nd attempt N2

NOGO, 3rd attempt N3

The array SC is loaded with the student's results on all tasks

within the cluster. For example, for the SCORE macro

pertaining to the Diagnostic Tests, SC(O) holds the student's

status on the firbL task, SC(1) holds his status on the second

task, SC(2) his status on the third task, and so on, up to SC(17)

for his results on the eighteenth and final task in that Cluster.

Refer to Figure 2 in Part X of this manual for the name of the

SCORE macro used for each cluster and the file where it is

included. The names vary slightly. For example, SCORE is used

to collect student performance data on the Diagnostic Tests, and

SCRII is used for collecting results in Cluster K.

Once the SCORE macro has collected student performance data,

the Master Record can then be printed, using the codes specified

above (NA, Gl, G2, etc).

XII-59
Part XII: Symbols Used in Course 20

Symbol Description of Use

SCORE (cont.)

SCORE in the NOGO Routines. In the software used to produce a

student list of NOGOs, SCORE is slightly different from the

description above. The value loaded into LI() is checked to see

if it represents a GO, NOGO, or no attempt result. Each time the

system finds a NOGO for a student, it increments the student's

count of NOGOs by 1, 2, or 3, depending upon whether the latest

NOGO was received on the first, second, or third test attempt.

The number of NOGOs for the first student whose file is read is

held in the variable VLIST(V + N). V is originally designated as

4 10. Since the first student is considered as N=O, his number of

NOGOs is stored in VLIST(10). The second student's number of

NOGOs is stored in VLIST(II) and so on. All clusters (except the

Diagnostic Tests) are read for a student before the system moves

on to compiling the next student's number of NOGOs.

As with the print routine files, SCORE in the NOGO files is used

in conjunction with the macro TEE to determine where in

memory to begin and end reading data.

See also: SRDBI, GETSC, SHOSC, TEE

SECT SECT stands for "Section Number" and is a variable integer

defined at the course level.

Students are registered into Course 19 to receive 19K BNCOC online instruction. Each student is also assigned a section number

of two digits (such as "00"). There may be up to 15 students in

a each section of Course 19. This restriction is a function of

Course 20 and not the TICCIT oDerating system.

When using Course 20 to enter off-line student tet results, it is

necessary to identify for the Ut tz z La

number of the students to which the test results correspond.

The section number specified by the user in the Main Menu

option "Identify Course and Section" is loaded into SECT. SECT

is used in conjunction with the course number to identify the

correct Roster File and Master Record File to access, so that the

correct student names can be displayed for the off-line test

results to be entered. See the explanation under COURS for the

commands that use SECT to do this.

Parallel Symbols: COURS

"'

11-60
Part XII: Symbols Used in Course 20

Symbol Description of Use

SFILE SFILE Is defined as a chapter level variable string and is used to

hold the Master Record File data for the course and section

number of students specified by a Course 20 user.

In display construction of the Main Menu, the following

command identifies the name of the Master Record File to be

accessed In subsequent actions (such as data entry or printing of

the Master Record). This name is loaded into SFILE.

Command Mod Data Field

Compute Calc SFILE- 4 MR4 & COURS & . & SECT

If, for example, the Course 20 user specifies a COURS (course

number) of "019" and a SECT (section number) of "00", the

Master Record File for students registered in 019, section 00 is

MR019.00. The name MROI9.00 is loaded into SFILE.

Subsequent commands reference SFILE, and this permits access

to the correct Master Record file. (The Master Record file

contains information about how many students are registered in

that course and section, the student names, and their ID

N. numbers.)

On the Data Entry Pages the system is instructed to open the

Master Record file name held in SFILE. The SRDBI function Is

then be used to read and write test results data from each

student's PD file listed in the Master Record file identified in

SFILE.

. . ,".

N.0

XI-61

i- r'' ' "

. ' ' "'?" :, > ,"' #P .'' " .. ' " ' " i". ' " ., c.Z" ,' , ' '," ," " ,", ' 
Part XII: Symbols Used in Course 20

Symbol Description of Use

SHOSC SHOSC stands for "Show Score" and is a macro appearing in the

response analysis of the data entry pages (located in DE.I.I.I.S,

0" DE.I.I.2.S, and DE.l.l.3.S). Here is where the Course 20 user

comes to enter the results of off-line student testing.

The data entry page shows the user the titles of the cluster and

task for which s/he is entering data, as well as the names of

% the students and their current status within the task. In order

%to display the student's status (GO/NOGO/No attempt made yet),

the system must go into the student's .PD file, extract the

revelant information and interpret it for display on the screen.

For the first student name displayed to the user, this is done

through the macro GETSC. For subsequent students, this

retrieval and display of current test status is done through the

macro SHOSC.

The two macros are quite similar. They differ only in that

GETSC must identify the location in memory used to store this

student information. When SHOSC is used (with the second and . all following students), this lesson location information is

already available. SHOSC commands simply go to that location

and extract the data stored there. The student status extracted

can be one of 7 conditions: No attempt, GO on the first, second,

or third attempt; or NOGO on the first, second, or third attempt.

SHOSC commands assign a value ranging from 49 to 55 to each of

.'. these conditions and load this value into LI().

In other commands on the data entry page, the value held in

LI(0) is used to color the three test attempt boxes with the

student's current status.

See also: BOXI - BOX7, GETSC, SRDBI

X[II-62

A . ,. . % . . " . " • " -. " - - " . " - % % ", "-" % " % #
. Part XII: Symbols Used in Course 20

Symbol Description of Use

SRDBI The SRDBI is a system function called into use through the

External Symbol File called "SRDBI." It is used to read data from

and write data to the student's PD file for a particular course.

Course 20 uses the SRDBI to read and write student test results

in BNCOC to their .PD files for Course 19. IN this way, both online and off-line student performance in BNCOC (Course 19) can

be stored on MicroTICCIT.

The SRDBI is used in the following macros: GETSC (used to read

the first student's PD file and get his score on a BNCOC task),

SHOSC (used to read subsequent students' .PD files), PUTSC (used

to write off-line test results to students' PD files for Course 19),

and SCORE (used to read each student's PD file for eventual

It printing of the Master Record).

As examples of using the SRDBI to read data from a student's PD

file, the following two commands are used in the macro GETSC

(get score):

Command Mod Data Field

Compute Calc SRDBI ( .D , OPLRD, SERP, ECD,

LESN, VLIST(O), 6, ID(n), COURS)

Compute Calc SRDBI ( 4 .D 4, OPUL, $ERP, ECD, LESN,

VLIST(O), 6, ID(n), COURS)

The arguments of the first SRDBI command are interpreted as

follows:

D Go to the ,D area in memory, where student

records are held.

OPLRD Lock this area to prevent inadvertent

writing to it, then read it. (This is a system

symbol.)

$ERP If an error occurs in reading, go to the page

labeled $ERP.

ECD If an error has occurred, display its error

code on the page specified above.

I,

* 1I1-63

'C,
Part XI! Symbols Used in Course 20

Symbol Description of Use

SRDBI (cont.) LESN

VLIST(O)

6 VLIST(O) is the area inside the .D area to

begin reading. Each BNCOC Cluster is

assigned a distinct VLIST(O) value that

references the word position in memory

holding the pointer to that cluster's lesson

table. For example, Cluster B assigns a value

of 678 to VLIST(O). The 678th word in the .D

area holds the pointer to Cluster B's lesson

table (or where in memory lesson

information for Cluster B begins).

These 3 arguments command the system to:

go to the VLIST(O) position in memory and

transfer the numbers stored there (which is

6 characters long) into LESN. LESN is,

therefore, the location of the first word in

that Cluster's lesson table. (The first word

stores the number of lessons in the Cluster.)

ID(n)

COURS Perform the above operations for the student

whose ID number is referenced here, using

the student's .PD file for the course number

specified by COURS.

Thus, the first SRDBI command goes into the referenced

student's PD file and locks it to prevent other actions from

being performed on it. Then the system extracts the position

where the lesson table begins for the cluster in question.

The second SRDBI command is used to unlock the area, so that

the area is again available to be written to.

A subsequent command (not using the SRDBI) finds the specific

location within the lesson table where data is stored for the

task in question. Then the SRDBI is used again to read the data

held at that location (this command is not shown here) -

namely, whether the student has passed, failed or not attempted

the task test. This information is used to color the student's

test attempt boxes on the data entry page.

XII-64
Part X11: Symbols Used in Course 20

Symbol Description of Use

SRDBI

[cont.] When a Course 20 user enters data on a student's off-line test

performance, the SRDBI is used to write to the student's PD file.

Writing test scores to a student's PD file is done in the macro

PUTSC (for "Put Score"). This macro is found in the data entry

pages. When a user marks a student result of GO or NOGO, the

system interprets the mark and assigns it a LI(0) value between

49 and 55. Commands in PUTSC convert the LI(0) value into the

value stored in memory and assign this value to the variable

PUT. The SRDBI command used to write the data to the

student's PD file reads as follows:

Command Mod Data Field

Compute Calc SRDBI ( 4 .D J, OPWRU, $ERP, ECD, PUT,

WRD, 6, ID(incr), COURS)

where OPWRU is a system argument that writes the data

specified in PUT to the memory location specified in WRD (in all

cases, the location storing test results for the task in question)

for the student identified by ID(incr).

The SRDBI, in summary, is used in Course 20 to read and write

student test data for Course 19 into appropriate locations in

memory.

See also: GETSC, SHOSC, PUTSC, and SCORE

-r

111-65s

4W
Part XII: Symbols Used in Course 20

Symbol Description of Use

TEE TEE is a macro used to perform two options in Course 20. The

first is in the print routine files that produce the Master

Record, located in DE.2.1.l.S (Diagnostic Tests), DE.2.1.2.S (Clusters

B-D), and DE.2.i.3.3 (Clusters E-K). TEE is also used in the files

that produce the NOGO report listing all students in a particular

course and section, their ID numbers, and their total number of

NOGOs. The software that produces the NOGO list is located in:

DE.2.2.l.S (Clusters B-D) and DE.2.2.2.S (Clusters E-K).

TEE is used in each of these files to find the pointer to the

beginning of each cluster's (unit's) lesson table. The lesson table

holds information on how many tasks there are in the cluster

and the student status on each task. TEE is used in combination

with the SCORE macros to read each student's .PD file and

collect Information on his performance within BNCOC.

TEE uses the starting position of the first cluster (position 676 in

the .D area of memory) in order to calculate the positions where

lesson table pointers are stored for every other BNCOC cluster.

The algorithm for determining each cluster's lesson table pointer

is:

Command Mod Data Field

Compute Calc UNIT.- VLIST(3) + ((Al x 2) - 2)

where UNIT is the word location for the lesson table pointer of

the cluster in question and VLIST(3) is position 676 in memory.

Al is the number of the cluster on which data Is being collected,

and its value is specified in the PARAMS mod of the command

that executes TEE (see command below). For example, if the

system is gathering student performance data within Cluster B,

Al will be specified as 2 in the PARAMS mod. The algorithm

then becomes: UNIT.- 676 + ((2 x 2) - 2), or 678. The position in

memory holding the pointer to Cluster B's lesson table is 678.

III-66
Part XII: Symbols Used in Course 20

Symbol Description of Use

TEE (cont.] TEE then uses this number (loaded into the symbol UNIT) as an

argument in the SRDBI command. It goes to position 678 in

memory and reads the number that is stored there, placing it in

the symbol LTAB (for Lesson Table). The SRDBI is used again to

read the number contained in the LTAB position in memory and

to place this number (the number of lessons or tasks in the

cluster) into the symbol LNUMB. The final command in TEE

determines where in memory the lesson table for the cluster

stops and calls this number HALT. HALT is then used in the

SCORE macros to stop collecting data from a student's .PD file

when all information on the cluster in question has been

collected.

Commands to execute TEE always precede commands to execute

SCORE. Using Cluster B as an example, these commands are:

Command Mod Data Field

Include Macro TEE

PARAMS 2

Include Macro SCOR2

See also: SCORE, SRDBI

111-67 A22
Part XII; Symbols Used in Course 20

Symbol Description of Use

VLIST(O) VLIST(0) is a system variable used in the file DE.I.S, which

houses the BNCOC Course Menu. Here, each task cluster assigns

a different value to VLIST(0), starting with 676 for the first

cluster, 678 for the second cluster, 680 for the third, and so on

(see Figure 2 in Part X of this manual for a complete listing of

the values assigned to VLIST(0) for each task cluster in BNCOC.)

VLIST(O) tells the CMI system the position in memory that stores

the pointer to the lesson tables for each task cluster. For

example, Cluster B's pointer is located at 678. The pointer

indicates the position in memory where the lesson tables begin

for tasks within Cluster B. VLIST(O) is used as an argument in

the SRDBI function. See the description under SRDBI for how

VLIST(0) is used to read data from and write data to the

appropriate location in memory.

See also: SRDBI

XII-68
Part XII: Symbols Used in Course 20

Symbol Description of Use

VLIST(1) VLIST(1) is a system variable used in the file DE.I.S, where the

BNCOC Course Menu is held. Each Task Cluster listed on the

course menu is assigned a VLIST(l) value, starting with 1 for the

first cluster, 2 for the second, and so on. (See Figure 2 in Part

X of this manual for a complete listing of the values assigned to

VLIST(1) for each cluster.)

VLIST(1) is used to display the correct Cluster letter on the data

entry pages. The following command does this:

Command Mod Data Field

Show Calc TC- VLIST(l): ?, L, B, C, D, ... K

Window 3 22,3 24

Data TC

TC is indexed from the value of VLIST(l). For example, if

VLIST(l) is 4, the cluster letter D is shown. This allows the

Course 20 user to make sure that he is entering data within the

correct cluster.

VLIST(1) is also used in conjuction with VLIST(2) to assign a title

to each testable event and display this on the screen as well.

An example command for assigning a title is shown below for

the first task within the first task cluster:

Command Mod Data Field

Compute If VLIST(l1)- & VLIST(2)=

Calc TITLE.- Six Digit Grid

See also: VLIST(2)

'SI9

II-,
Part XII: Symbols Used in Course 20

Symbol Description of Use

VLIST(2) VLIST(2) is a system variable that is used to hold the number of

the task the Course 20 user is working with. Each task is

assigned a VLIST(2) value depending upon its position on the Task

Cluster menu. For example, the first task listed on the Cluster

menu is given a VLIST(2) value of 1, the second task is assigned a

value of 2, and so on. These assignments are made in the files

DE.I.I.S through DE.I.II.S, where the Cluster menus are housed.

The number assigned to VLIST(2) is displayed on the data entry

pages with the following command:

Command Mod Data Field

Show Window 3 32,3 35

Data VLIST(2)

Displaying the task number (VLIST(2)) allows the Course 20 user

to make sure that s/he is entering data within the correct task.

VLIST(2) is also used In conjunction with VLIST(1) to assign a title

to each testable event and display this on the screen as well.

An example command for assigning a title is shown below for

the first task within the first task cluster:

Command Mod Data Field

Compute If VLIST(1)=l and VLIST(2)=I

Calc Title- Six Digit Grid

VLIST(2) is also used to calculate where in memory to read and

write student data to. When a Course 20 user enters off-line

student test results, the value of VLIST(0) is used to find the

pointer to the lesson table for the cluster in question. The first

position of the lesson table stores the total number of lessons

(tasks) in that cluster. VLIST(2) is added to the pointer held in

the VLIST(0) position in memory, and the resultant number

indicates where in memory data for the task in question is

stored. The system can then write data to that position when

student status within the task needs to be updated. In a similar

way, VLIST(2) is used in conjunction with VLIST(0) when the

BNCOC Master Record is printed. Here, however, data is read

from (not written to) the student's PD file.

See also: VLIST(1), SRDBI

II-70

- • I
Part XIII, Recordkeeping

Part XIII: Recordkeeping

Table of Contents

page

Introduction XIII-3

1. BNCOC Master Record XIII-5

2. Operations Log XIII-6

3. Coursellst. LS XIII-7

4. Registration Directory XIII-8

5. System Directories XIII-9

6. Macro files XIII-10

7. Problem Log XIII-!!

XllF.4 ' '"%*;"" q '' " ' '" ''/ "'" "' " i" "'''" ' "
Part XIII, RecordIkeeping
Part XIII, Recordkeeping

Introduction

The TICCIT operator should keep careful records regarding the day-today operations. Record information about , backups and other types of

normal operations procedures, and problems that are encountered.

Also keep records regarding courses currently on the system and users

in each course. A list of the courseware currently archived on tape will be

useful. Instructions regarding the creation of course templates using

Makecourse should be written down for each course. In addition, a list of

the directories on the system will be useful in case other people from other

sites use the system to load courseware.

This section of the Manual is designed to provide a structure for

Recordkeeping; however, each TICCIT operator may wish to design his own

forms and replace these pages.

A sample showing the format of the BNCOC Master Record created by

using Course 20 is also included.

lIII-3

W1111-
Part XIII, Ricordke~pin~

'4.,

-q p

4

4*

P'S

p

4

V P ,.~9 ~ - - - p ~ p~
Part XIII, Recordkeeping

The BNCOC Master Record

BNCOC 19K DIVISION

USA NCOA/DSS GI = Passed First Attempt

Fort Knox, Kentucky 40121 G2 = Passed Second Attempt

G3 = Passed Third Attempt

2/5/85

MASTER RECORD-PAGE I

BI B2 B3 B4 B5 Cl C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 CS ...........

Number Name

214352605 BOYD, JOHN GI G2 GI G2 GI GI Gi GI G1 GI G2 G3 GI

123121121 CALLOWAY, P. R

879098721 DENNIS, CARL

334567223 ELLIS, KENNETH

234156789 KNOTT, JOSEPH

908760008 LANHAM, EDWAR

514364523 MELTON, DAVID

214908709 NORRIS, WILLIAM

'p.

i

1111-5
Part XIII, Recordkeeping

Operations Log

Introduction Record routine transactions here.

Things to Do 9 Record the time and date of each backup.

o Check diskspace and record the amount of free

space on the disk.

o Delete break files on the disk.

Date Time Problems noted if any. Diskspace Remaining1

I From the Operator Menu, select File Utilities Menu. Select DISKSPACE

to determine how much free space is on the disk and record the amount left

here.

XIII-6

.''SW, _

r

,i.W ' ', , " ',:% ,'_ ' ', , " f ',r , " / L" ' ' :
Part XIII, Recordkeeping

Courselist.LS

Introduction Run the Courselist.LS utility from the Makecourse

menu. Record the current information about

courses on the disk. See Part IV, page 11, of this

Manual for instructions.

Date entered

COURSE START END RANGE NO. GR DIR TITLE2

IA 110000 119999 9999 31 3 ADAPT TRAINING

i-I

2 Course Name, starting module number, ending module number,

i. module range, course number, graphics directory number, title of course.

1111
Part XIII, Recordkeeping

Registration Directory

Introduction Write down the information about each user at the

time of registration.

You can also use the utility on the Registration

Menu to check the users registered into each course

on the system.

Note their section number (if any), password (if

any) authorization code and user mode. Users may

be registered in up to 10 courses.

Name Course Section Authorization User Password

Code Mode

Jones, Gerald 0 none OP IN none

1111-8

3, = 
Part XIII, Recordkeeping

System Directories

Introduction Names of system directories can vary from site to

site. It is a good idea to write down the directories

that exist on your system.

Master Directory l1

Source Courseware

Source Graphics

Audio/Graphics Directory(s)

Directory where

Registration System Files

are stored, e.g. TREGISTER

Directory storing

System Modules,

e.g, TPROGRAMS ___________________

Object Courseware

(Module) Directory

others:

'III-9
Part XIII, Recordkeeping

Examining A Macro File

A MACRO file is a file containing a list of CLI commands and arguments

which allow the user to perform a series of tasks by typing in only one

word -- the name of the macro file. When you type in the word UP, you

are calling up a MACRO created by Hazeltine personnel. You can write your

own MACROs to perform other frequently performed series of tasks.

1. At the R prompt type LIST DMO/A/E -. MC

2. You should see the following list:

DELTAL

NOCMAP Deletes processor's ability to create

object course maps

DOWN Releases TICCIT and returns control to

RDOS; returns user to master directory

CRCMAP

BACKUP

TEMP

REGSORT Updates the User Directory and adds

new information to Registration file

UPDATEI

" UP Releases RDOS and transfers control to

the TICCIT operating system

3. To initialize (install) the master directory type DM0.

4. To list out the contents of a Macro file type TYPE UP.MC.

You will see the following information on your screen.

UNLINK MPOS..<OL,SV,LS,CO,ST,US>

LINK <MPOS< EPCO @UPRV@ >.(OL,SV,LS)

LINK <MOS,EPCO @UPRV@ >.(CO,ST)

LINK MPOS.US ITC.US

TICCIT.SV/U/G 8/D 7/P 6/X 1001/E 1/0 NL/L 3 3/C/Rt

5. To list out the contents of DOWN type TYPE DOWN.MC.

You will see the following information on your screen.

DIR XMDIRX; CLEAR CLI.OL CLI.ER; BOOT XMIRX

1111-10

'V ,
Part XIII, Recordkeeping ~Problem Log

Introduction Record any problems that occur as soon as possible.

Record the sequence of events just before the

problem came up under "Problem History."

Describe what steps were taken to resolve the

problem.

Include both hardware and software problems in

your log.

Date Problem History How Problem was Resolved

Xlll-li

- XI w%1%
Part XIII, Rmrdwping

XIII-12
GLOSSARY

ADAPT The name of the courseware authoring language

which runs in the TICCIT (MPOS) environment.

APT The name of the courseware authoring language

which runs in the TICCIT environment which has

been replaced by ADAPT. APT is currently used to

create TICCIT maps and test control files for TICCIT

courseware written in ADAPT.

ASCI File A file which stores characters coded according to

the the American Standard Character International

Institute.

Authorization Code The code assigned to each user during registration

in a TICCIT course which alerts the system as to

the degree of access to TICCIT utilities. A user may

be assigned to a different USER modes in each

course but has only one authorization code.

Examples are ST (student), IN (instructor), OP

(operator), SY (programmer). Authorization codes

indicate whether a user may access certain menus

from the Supermenu.

Backup (v) To make a copy of a program, file, or contents

of system disk; (n) A copy of a program, file, or

contents of system disk.

Bit-mapped (screen) Graphics built by addressing each bit (pixel) of the

display screen. Both text and graphics are

displayed by bit-mapping on the TICCIT screen.

Break File A file created by the operating system to store

error messages and which should be deleted

periodically from memory. Files created

automatically by TICCIT when an error occurs.

Breakfiles are created for each MicroTICCIT

terminal (e.g., BREAKOOO.BR, BREAKOOL.BR, etc.).

They may be printed using a line printer.

Byte An eight bit addressable unit of memory; Each

word contains two bytes.

CLI Command Line Interpreter; a special interface

program which allows the system user to

communicate more easily with the computer's

operating system by entering a single command.

The CLI is available both offline (RDOS version) and

online (TICCIT version).

6-1
Glossary

Command Line

Interpreter See CLI.

Core Memory The 256K random access memory area of the TICCIT

system containing the programs currently in

memory; aeseso, Random Access Memory.

Course U A TICCIT course which provides access to TICCIT

system modules (utility programs) to authorized

users; see aJsq Supermenu.

COURSELIST.LB A TICCIT system file that stores information about

all courses currently stored on the system.

Disk Block A 256 word (512 byte) section of the disk; also called

a sector

DISKMAIT A system utility that checks the system disk for

errors, commonly run before performing a backup

of the system disk.

DMO The name of the Master Directory on a TICCIT

System II.

Dump Pile A collection of other files which retains information

such as dates, directory information, etc.

ECLIPSE S/20 The microprocessor installed in TICCIT System II.

ECLIPSE S/120 The microprocessor installed in TICCIT System III.

Pile Extension Part of the file name which appears after the

decimal point which usually has a special meaning

to the system such as .DR (indicates a directory

file). The RDOS file naming convention allows

users to add a two character extension.

Input Device A device used to enter (input) data into the

computer such as a keyboard or a light pen.

Line Printer A printer interfaced to the system such as the

Versatek or Epson which will print the contents of

system files.

LPT The name of the system line printer.

Log Off To exit the system by pressing ATT'N, typing "off"

and pressing ENTER.

Los On To begin using the system by pressing ATT'N and

typing user identification, course number, and

(optionally) a password.

G-2
Gos3ary

Macro A special file consisting of a list of CLI commands

which are frequently used by the TICCIT operator.

A Macro filename has an extension of MC, e.g.

UP.MC. Note: Macros may also be created using

ADAPT commands.

Makecourse A TICCIT system utility that creates a course

template (PDA file) which stores information about

the structure of the course such as the number of

units and number of lessons per unit.

MicroTICCIT The term applied to TICCIT system configurations

using the IBM-PC terminal.

Module A TICCIT file with a numeric name and no file

extension, used to store TICCIT object courseware

and TICCIT system programs

Module Range A set of numbers assigned to a particular module

directory, e.g., 1-3999 is the module range for

TPROGRAMS, the directory which stores TICCIT

system modules

MPOS The TICCIT Operating System; also referred to as

TICCIT.

MTO The name of the magnetic tape input/output levice.

Network Controller The MicroTICCIT terminal that controls the flow of

information to and from the TICCIT system and

each of the other MicroTICCIT terminals and which

is used to perform shutdown operations.

Object Courseware The processed form of TICCIT courseware modules.

Octal A number system with base 8 which is used by the

Eclipse S/20 system to store binary data.

Off-line Generally used to mean that the TICCIT operating

system is down (not running); e.g., an Off-Line

Utility must be accessed from the Data General

Console. You are on-line in relation to RDOS but

off-line in relation to TICCIT.

On-line Generally used to mean that the TICCIT operating

system is up and running; e.g., an On-line utility

means a utility you can access from the

MicroTICCIT terminal. Also, any time a particular

system is in use; e.g., on-line at the Data General

Console.

Output Device A device used to retrieve information from the

computer such as a display screen or a printer.

G-3
Glossary

PDA The Permanent Data Area-- a section in core

memory designated to hold student performance

data about a particular course.

PDAO19OO0 The name of the file that

contains the template for the course number "19."

0000002201.PD The name of the file that

contains the permanent data for a particular

student (ID #220).

Process To create an object file from a source file; also

called "compile."

Proctor A term used to identify the individual in charge of

the TICCIT laboratory who is familiar with the

course content and MicroTICCIT usage; see also,

Proctor Password and Proctor Functions.

Proctor Functions A group of commands providing authorized users

with access to parts of the system other than the

course they are logged on to; one command allows a

user to access a restricted TICCIT test.

Proctor Password A password used to access Proctor Functions

including accessing restricted TICCIT tests.

Prompt A character displayed by the system which

indicates that the user may enter data or a

command; e.g., "R" indicates that you are in RDOS;

"?" indicates that you are in TICCIT, etc.

Random Access

Memory (RAM) A volatile type of memory which allows read/write

access; see also, Core Memory

Restricted Tests A TICCIT test which cannot be accessed by a

student user without assistance from a Proctor;

se also Proctor, Proctor Functions, Proctor

Password

RDOS The Data General Real-time Disk operating system.

Roster File A TICCIT file which includes the names and IDs of

students registered for a particular course and

section which is used by the 19K BNCOC CMI

program software to create file which stores the

BNCOC Master Record File Data. This file must also

be created to access class reports for the TICCIT

Student Record utility.

Student ID A unique number from 1 to 9 numbers assigned to

a user at registration.

6-4
Gloary

Source Courseware The unprocessed form of TICCIT courseware

modules which can be accessed using the ADAPT

Courseware Editor.

Supermenu The menu of TICCIT Course 0 which provides access

to TICCIT utilities and programs: Author Menu,

Operator Menu, Instructor Menu, Programmer

Menu, and Student Menu.

Switches Arguments added to a command to restrict its

application such as global switches which modify

the command and local switches which modify the

argument only.

SYSOP A term abbreviated from System Operator.

TAL The name of a former version of the TICCIT

authoring language which has been replaced by

ADAPT.

* TICCIT The MicroTICCIT operating system; also called

MPOS.

*c TICCIT Decimal

System A code used to identify characters typed at the

MicroTICCIT keyboard to the TICCIT system which

is similar to the ASCII code.

TICCIT label The label given to a TICCIT courseware file which

identifies its location within a course (course,

unit, lesson, segment); e.g., BNO10103.CW.

TPROGRAMS The name of the module directory that stores the

TICCIT system modules.

TREGISTER.DR The directory which contains the files which have

registration and authorization data: REGISTER.AD

and REGISTER. AF.

User Mode The type of user registered in a particular TICCIT

course, e.g., student, instructor, author. The

system only records performance data for users

with a student mode.

Utility A program such as Makecourse which performs

some task for the user as opposed to courseware.

~G-5

_ *
Glossary

Wildcard A character which replaces the names of all files

with a similar characteristic or attribute; for

example: DUMP BNCW -. - dumps all files with

the name BNCW regardless of the rest of the name

or the extension; system wlldcards include:

hyphens (-), asterick M*, and comma (,).

Word An addressable unit in memory; The Eclipse S/20

word has 16 bits.
COURSELIST.LS, IV-14

ABOX (symbol), XII-11 Course names, 11-8

AC (system symbol), XII-12 Course template, IX-6

ADAPT Course 0, x; seealso, Supermenu

author defined model, IX-5 Course 19

REP model, IX-5 accessing tests, 11-19

symbols, uses of, XII batch processing, 11-10

system functions, 111-9 contents, 11-14

test files, XI-10, XI-19, XI-21 course menu, i1-16

ANSCO (symbol), XII-12 diagnostic tests and remedial

ANSRl, ANSR2, ANSR3 (symbols), training, 11-16

XII-13 installation, 11-3

APT loading courseware, 11-7

maps, XI-ll loading graphics, 11-9

test control files, XI-16 Makecourse, 11-4, 111-13

ASCII code, xiv processing graphics, II-11

AT (system symbol), XII-14 registering users, 11-12

AWIN (symbol), XII-14 structure on MicroTICCIT,

XI-6

Backing up (the system), IV-8 See also, Revising Course 19

BBOX (symbol), XII-15 Course 20

BKARW (symbol), XII-15 batch processing 111-18

BKBK (symbol), XII-16 contents, 111-21

BNCOC instructional organization, description of units, X-5, X-6

VI-5 file labels and contents, X-7

BOXI-7 (symbols), XII-45 installation, 111-5

BREAK files, VII-II loading from tape, 111-16

BUILDMD, VII-6 main menu, 111-21

BYTPN (symbol), XII-46 Makecourse, 111-13

BWIN (symbol), XII-16 off-line test results

(entering), XI-12

CBOX (symbol), XII-16 programming, X-5

CONV (symbol), XII-46 processing graphics, 111-19

COURS (symbol), XII-47 reporting requirements in

Courseware BNCOC, XI-9

batch processing, 11-10; V-13 system files (CMI), Ill-10, IIImodules, VII-8 21

names, VII-8 See also, Revising Course 20

structure, VII-3 Courseware authoring language, see

transfer to tape, 1-4, V-5 APT and ADAPT

CLI, see Command Line Courseware projects, XI-8

Interpreter CWIN (symbol), XII-17

CMI system files, 111-26

CMI system capabilities, 111-11 .D Area, 111-8

CMI System, see Course 20 DBOX (symbol), XII-17

COLLEGE.SV (utility), VI-I Deleting

Colors courseware, V-15; V-17, V-17,

palette, XII-5 V-17

uses, VII-4 files, V-6

Command Line Interpreter object graphics, V-16, V-17

defined, vii source graphics, V-16, V-18

RDOS, VIII-3 Disk blocks, VIl1-6

TICCIT, VII-9 DISKMAINT, IV-8

Core memory, VII-3

I-i
INDEX

DISINOTES, VI-7; see also LCORN (symbol), XII-25

NOTES utility Links (graphics), V-8

Disk space (saving), V-15 LIST1-2 (macros), XII-56

DM0, VIII-5 LIST command, VII-il

DNPT (symbol), XII-18 SLPT, VIII-10

Dumping to tape Logging data

courseware, V-3 collecting data, VI-8

graphics, V-7 retrieving data, VI-10

DWIN (Symbol), XII-19 see also, Item Analysis

Reports

EVENT (macro), XII-48 Logging modes, VI-9

Extended data areas, V-il Log on procedures, 111-6

F (chapter level flag), XII-49 Macro files, VIII-I

F (variable flag), XII-19 Makecourse

FAIL (system symbol), XII-20 course template, IX-6

FAILT(symbol), XII-21 Course 19, 11-4

FILE (macro), XII-50 Course 20, 111-13

FLAG (symbol), XII-51 general, V-10

Master directory, see DMO

GETGRADE (system function), XII-22 Master Record (BNCOC)

GETSC (macro), XII-52 codes, 111-26, XI-12

GOARW (symbol), XII-23 creating, 111-22

GOBX (symbol), XII-23 example

Graphics printing reports, 111-24

changing, VII-13 relationship to BNCOC testing,

directory, VII-12 XI-12

file attribute, VIII-9 MESSG (symbol), XII-26

processing, V-14 MIcroTICCIT

review system graphics, VII-12 courseware structure, XI-5

system, VII-12 Network Controller, vii

transfer to tape, 1-5 workstation, vii; IV-5

MicroTICCIT terminals, see WorkFile names on tape, V-19 station

Files MODULE ID, VII-7

extensions, VIII-6 Modules (TICCIT), VII-6

listing, VIII-6 courseware, VII-8

directories, VII-14

GDIR, VIII-5 parameters, VII-15

range in Makecourse, V-10

HEADI-8 (expressions), XII-53 TICCIT, VIII-3

MPOS, VIII-3; VIII-5

Icons, XI-14 see also TICCIT

IIGET (symbol), XII-55 MRCCC.SS, 111-26

ILMAR (symbol), XII-24 MT0, 1-3, VIII-10

I/O devices, see Input/Output

devices NATM (symbol), XII-26

Input/Output devices, VIII-10 Network Controller, vii

Item Analysis Reports,xiii 19K BNCOC CMI System, see

ITEMS.SV, VI-10 Course 20

19K BNCOC for Tank Commanders,

see Course 19

NORES (symbol), XII-27

Latency (System variable), XII-25 NOREV (symbol), XII-28

1-2
INDEX

NOTE ( function key), VI-3 RDOS, vii, VIII-3

NOTK utility commands, VIII-6

archiving data, VI-6 file attributes, VIII-8

described, xiii file characteristics, VIII-8

developer use, VI-3 file names, VIII-8

DISKNOTIS, V1-7 file types, VIII-8

printed reports, VI-6 READ (macro), XII-57

output, V1-3 REGID (symbol), XII-58

retrieving data, V1-5 REGISTER.AF, III-10

user instructions, VI-4 Registration, see TICCIT

registration

Object courseware, VII-8 REP Model, see ADAPT

Object files, defined, V-15 RESPI, RESP2, RESP3, RESP4

Off-line (symbols), XII-33

BNCOC courseware, XI-13 Restricted Tests (accessing in

entering test results, XI-12 Course 19), 11-19

instruction, defined, viii Revising Course 19, IX-1

On-line instruction, defined, viii adding a lesson, IX-10

OPENR (macro), XII-56 adding a segment, IX-12

Operator, TICCIT, IV-3 adding a unit, IX-7

OVRTM (symbol), XII-28 deleting a lesson, IX-24

deleting a segment, IX-21

PASS (system symbol), XII-29 deleting a test, IX-24

Passwords, deleting a unit, IX-16

changing, xi; IV-11; IV-15 modifying a menu, IX-28

proctor, xi modifying a test, IX-25

removing, IV-12 Seealso, Creating a TICCIT

Set proctor password, VII-15 Test, X1

System Operator, xi, V11-5 Revising Course 20

user, viii, IV-12 adding a New Task, X-18

PDADUMP, VI-12 adding a New Task Cluster,

.PD files, see Permanent Data X-9

Area deleting a Cluster, C-22

Permanent Data Area deleting a Task, X-27

defined, xii ut.Ang Course 20 wlth

described, 111-5 courses other than Co

Lesson Tables, 111-9 urse 19, X-31

.PD files, xiii, 111-6 Seealso, Courseware

structure, 111-7 Documentation, XII

Proctor, Roster File (TICCIT)

password, xi creating, 1H-13, 111-26; V-20

S. role, xiv used by Course 20, 111-10

set password, VII-15

* Prompts, V111-4 SCORE (macro), XII-59

RDOS, vii SECT (symbol), XII-60

RDOS editor, V111-4 Sections

TICCIT, vii Creating multiple sections, Vvirtual console, V111-4 20,V-21

PSDTS (symbol), XII-30 Restrictions in the CMI

System (Course 20),

QUES (symbol), XII-31 111-5

QESBX (symbol), XII-32 Sectors (Disk), see Disk blocks

SETITEM (system symbol), XII-34

RCORN (symbol), XII-32

1-3
INDEX

Set New Proctor Function TICCIT registration

Password, VII-15 authorization codes, x

Set Page for TICCIT Printouts, cleaning up, V-16

IV-14 course numbers, ix

SPILE (symbol), XII-61 importance of, viii

SHOSC (macro), XII-62 in Course 20, 111-20

Source files, defined, V-15 procedures, V-20

SRDBI (system function) section numbers, ix

in Course 20, XII-63 user ID numbers, viii

installing the SRDBI patch, user passwords, viii

111-27 user modes, viii

Startup diskettes for IBM-PC, IV-5 TIME (system symbol), XII-39

Student Menu, IV-13 TIMEP (symbol), XII-39

Student Progress Reports, xiii, TINT (frame label), XII-40

XI-9 TPROGRAMS, VII-14

Symbols, see ADAPT TRES (frame label), XII-40

Supermenu, x TSTBX (symbol), XII-41

Switches (RDOS), VIII-6 TYPE (command), VIII-7

SYSOP, see System Operator

System Operator (TICCIT) User ID numbers, viii

description, VII-5 User Modes, viii, 11-12; VII-10

password, xi User passwords, viii

TA (symbol), XII-35 VRBL1, VRBL2 (symbols), XII-42

TCHBX (symbol), XII-37 Videodisc, 11-19

TEE (macro), XII-66 Virtual console, VIII-4

TESTD (system symbol), XII-37 VLIST(0), VLIST(1), VLIST(2), X-36;

Test Development, XI XII-68; XII-70

TESTF (system symbol), XII-38

Test restrictions, XI-18 W (symbol), X-43

Test symbols, XII-10 WEEKLY.SV, VI-10

TICCIT WHAT (symbol), XII-44

authoring languages, viii WHICHMATCH (system variable),

bringing TICCIT UP, IV-5 XII-44

courseware structure, xiii Wildcard, VII-9, VII-11

data collection, XI-10 Workstation, vii, see also, startup

data storage, xiv diskettes

decimal coding system, xiv

labels, 1-5, 11-8, V-6

modules, VII-6, VIII-3

MPOS, vii, VIII-3

operating system, vii

operator role, xiv

proctor role, xiv

registration, viii

registration directory, VII-10

system components, vii

system specifications, VII-3

system utilities, viii

tests, X-33, XI

1-4